MODEL 567

Contents

Safety...... 1

Emergency...... 2

Controls...... 3

Driving...... 4

Maintenance...... 5

Information...... 6 Contents

© 2021 PACCAR Inc. - All Rights Reserved This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features or equipment which may be either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment which are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any illustrations or descriptions relating to features or equipment which are not on this vehicle. PACCAR reserves the right to discontinue, change specifications, or change the design of its vehicles at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. The information contained in this manual is proprietary to PACCAR. Reproduction, in whole or in part, by any means is strictly prohibited without prior written authorization from PACCAR Inc.

SAFETY -

1 Chapter 1 | SAFETY

Using this Manual...... 6 Safety Alerts...... 6 Illustrations...... 7 General Safety Instructions...... 7 Data Recorder...... 10 Environmental Protection Agency...... 10 Repairs...... 11 Additional Sources of Information...... 12 Cab Access...... 12 How to Access the Upper Bunk...... 14 Deckplate Access...... 19 How to open the hood...... 20 Seat...... 23 What to do before starting the vehicle...... 32 Vehicle Loading...... 34 Visual inspection while approaching the vehicle...... 34

4 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY -

Daily Checks...... 35 1 Weekly Checks...... 36 Systems Check...... 37

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 5 SAFETY - Using this Manual

Your vehicle may not have all the features available at the time of publication. 1 or options mentioned in this manual. Peterbilt Motors Company reserves the Using this Manual Therefore, you should pay careful attention right to make changes at any time without Please take the time to get acquainted with to the instructions that pertain to just your notice. your vehicle by reading this Operator’s vehicle. In addition, if your vehicle is Manual. We recommend that you read and equipped with special equipment or options understand this manual from beginning to not discussed in this manual, consult your Safety Alerts end before you operate this equipment. dealer or the manufacturer of the This manual contains useful information for equipment. Read and follow all of the safety alerts the safe and efficient operation of this There are several tools built into this contained in this manual. They are there equipment. It also provides service manual to help you find what you need for your protection and information. These information, with an outline for performing quickly and easily; first is the Quick Table alerts can help you avoid injury to yourself, safety checks and basic preventive of Contents. Located at the front of the your passengers, and help prevent costly maintenance inspections. We have tried to manual, this table lists the main subjects damage to the vehicle. Safety alerts are present the information you’ll need to learn covered and gives section numbers where highlighted by safety alert symbols and about functions, controls, and operation— you can find these subjects. Use the Quick signal words such as “WARNING,” and to present it as clearly as possible. We Table of Contents to find information on a “CAUTION,” or “NOTE.” DO NOT ignore hope you’ll find this manual easy to use. large subject and then use the detailed any of these alerts. There will be times when you need to take table of contents found on the first page of this manual out of the glovebox. When you each chapter. Cross-referenced citations Warnings do, please be sure to return it when you also help you get the information you need. are finished using it. If some other part of the manual contains further information on the subject you are reading about, we’ll indicate that in a cross- NOTE reference like this: (See Safety Alerts on The safety message following this symbol page 6). and signal word provides a warning against After you've read this manual, it should Finally, you’ll find a helpful Subject Index. operating procedures which could cause be stored in the cab for convenient ref- It’s in the back of the manual and death or injury. They could also cause erence and remain with this truck alphabetically lists the subjects covered. equipment or property damage. The alert when sold. All information contained in this manual is will identify the hazard, how to avoid it, and based on the latest production information

6 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Illustrations

the probable consequence of not avoiding the hazard. 1 Example: CAUTION Illustrations

Continuing to operate your vehicle with Some of the illustrations throughout this WARNING insufficient oil pressure will cause seri- manual are generic and will not look ous engine damage. Failure to comply exactly like the engine or parts used in Hot engine oil can be dangerous. You may result in equipment or property your application. The illustrations can could be burned. Let the engine oil damage. contain symbols to indicate an action cool down before changing it. Failure required and/or an acceptable or to comply may result in death, person- Notes unacceptable condition. al injury, equipment or property dam- The illustrations are intended to show age. repair or replacement procedures. The procedure will be the same for all Cautions applications, although the illustrations may differ. The message following this symbol and signal word provides important information that is not safety related but should be followed. The alert will highlight things that General Safety The safety message following this symbol may not be obvious and is useful to your and signal word provides a caution against efficient operation of the vehicle. Instructions operating procedures which could cause Example: equipment or property damage. The alert WARNING will identify the hazard, how to avoid it, and the probable consequence of not avoiding NOTE Improper practices, carelessness, or the hazard. ignoring any warnings may cause Example: Pumping the accelerator will not assist in starting the engine. property damage, personal injury, or death.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 7 SAFETY - General Safety Instructions

features, continued safe and reliable to relieve the pressure from the 1 operation depends greatly upon regular cooling system. WARNING vehicle maintenance. Follow the maintenance recommendations found in Manually rotating the crankshaft re- the Preventive Maintenance section. This WARNING quires a trained technician and specialty will help preserve your investment. tools. DO NOT pull or pry on the fan in Make sure your vehicle is in top working Removing the fill cap on a hot engine an attempt to rotate the crankshaft. Ap- condition before heading out on the road, it can cause scalding coolant to spray plying force to the fan can damage the is the responsible driver's duty to do so. out and burn you badly. If the engine fan blades or cause premature fan fail- Inspect the vehicle according to the has been in operation within the previ- ure. Failure to comply with the approved Driver's Check List. ous 30 minutes, be very careful in re- procedure may result in property dam- moving the fill cap. Protect face, • Work areas should be dry, well lit, age, personal injury, or death. hands, and arms against escaping flu- well ventilated, free from clutter, id and steam by covering the cap with loose tools, parts, ignition sources Before performing any repair, read and a large, thick rag. DO NOT try to re- and hazardous substances. understand all of the safety precautions move it until the surge tank cools down and warnings. The following is a list of • Wear protective glasses and or if you see any steam or coolant es- general safety precautions that must be protective shoes when working. caping. Always remove the cap very followed to provide personal safety. Failure • DO NOT wear loose-fitting or torn slowly and carefully. Be ready to back to follow these instructions may cause clothing. Tie back and/or tuck in off if any steam or coolant begins to death or injury. Special safety precautions long hair. Remove all jewelry when escape. Failure to comply may result are included in the procedures when they working. in death, personal injury, equipment or apply. • Before beginning any repair, property damage. Keep in mind that even a well maintained disconnect the battery (negative [-] vehicle must be operated within the range cable) and discharge any • Always use wheel chocks or proper of its mechanical capabilities and the limits capacitors. jack stands to support the vehicle of its load ratings. See the Weight Ratings • Put a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag in or vehicle components before label on the driver's door edge. the operator's compartment or on performing any service work. DO Every new vehicle is designed to conform the controls. NOT work on anything that is to all Federal Motor Vehicle Safety • Allow the engine to cool before supported only by lifting jacks or a Standards applicable at the time of slowly loosening the coolant fill cap hoist. Before resting a vehicle on manufacture. Even with these safety jack stands, be sure the stands are

8 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - General Safety Instructions

rated for the load you will be Make sure all lifting devices are • Always use tools that are in good placing on them. positioned correctly. condition. Make sure you have the 1 • Before removing or disconnecting • Corrosion inhibitors and lubricating proper understanding of how to use any lines, fittings, or related items, oils may contain alkali. DO NOT the tools before performing any relieve all pressure in the air, oil, get the substance in eyes and service work. Use only genuine fuel, and cooling systems. Remain avoid prolonged or repeated replacement parts from PACCAR. alert for possible pressure when contact with skin. DO NOT • Always use the same fastener part disconnecting any device from a swallow. If ingested, seek number (or equivalent) when system that contains pressure. immediate medical attention. DO replacing items. DO NOT use a High pressure oil or fuel can cause NOT induce vomiting. In case of fastener of lesser quality if death or personal injury. contact, immediately wash skin replacements are necessary. (e.g., • Always wear protective clothing with soap and water. In case of DO NOT replace a SAE 10.9 grade when working on any refrigerant harmful contact, immediately with 8.8 grade fastener.) lines and make sure that the contact a physician. Always keep • Always torque fasteners and fuel workplace is well ventilated. any chemicals OUT OF REACH connections to the required Inhalation of fumes can cause OF CHILDREN. specifications. Overtightening or death or personal injury. To protect • Naphtha and Methyl Ethyl Ketone under-tightening can allow leakage. the environment, liquid refrigerant (MEK) are flammable materials and • Close the manual fuel valves prior systems must be properly emptied must be used with caution. Follow to performing maintenance and and filled using equipment that the manufacturer's instructions to repairs, and when storing the prevents the release of refrigerant ensure safety when using these vehicle inside. gas. Federal law requires capturing materials. Always keep any • DO NOT perform any repair when and recycling refrigerant. chemicals OUT OF REACH OF impaired, tired, fatigued, or after • When moving or lifting any heavy CHILDREN. consuming alcohol or drugs that equipment or parts, make sure to • When working on the vehicle, be can impair your functioning. use proper techniques and alert for hot parts on systems that • Some state and federal agencies in assistance. Ensure all lifting have just been turned off, exhaust the United States of America have devices such as chains, hooks, or gas flow, and hot fluids in lines, determined that used engine oil slings are in good condition and tubes, and compartments. Contact can be carcinogenic and can cause are of the correct load capacity. with any hot surface may cause reproductive toxicity. Avoid burns.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 9 SAFETY - Data Recorder

inhalation of vapors, ingestion, and contains vanadium pentoxide, 1 prolonged contact with used engine which has been determined by the oil. State of California to cause cancer. Data Recorder • DO NOT connect the jump starting Always wear protective clothing California Vehicle Code - Section 9951 - or battery charging cables to any and eye protection when handling Disclosure of Recording Device ignition or governor control wiring. the catalyst assembly. Dispose of Your vehicle may be equipped with one or This can cause electrical damage the catalyst in accordance with more recording devices commonly referred to the ignition or governor. local regulations. If catalyst to as "event data recorders" (EDR) or • Coolant is toxic. If not reused, material gets into the eyes, "sensing and diagnostic modules" (SDM). dispose of coolant in accordance immediately flood eyes with water If you are involved in an accident, the with local environmental for a minimum of 15 minutes. Avoid device(s) may have the ability to record regulations. prolonged contact with skin. In vehicle data that occurred just prior to case of contact, immediately wash and/or during the accident. For additional skin with soap and water. In case information on your rights associated with CAUTION of harmful contact, immediately the use of this data, contact: contact a physician. • The California Department of Motor Corrosive chemicals can damage the • Other chemicals in this vehicle are Vehicles - Licensing Operations engine. DO NOT use corrosive chemi- also known to the State of Division cals on the engine. Failure to comply California to cause cancer, birth • http://www.dmv.ca.gov/ may result in equipment or property defects or other reproductive harm. damage. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead California Proposition 65 Warning and lead compounds, chemicals Environmental Protection • Diesel engine exhaust and some of known to the State of California to Agency its constituents are known to the cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. State of California to cause cancer, Some of the ingredients in engine oil, birth defects, and other hydraulic oil, transmission and axle oil, reproductive harm. engine coolant, diesel fuel, air conditioning • The catalyst substrate located in refrigerant (R12, R134a, and PAG oil), the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) batteries, etc., may contaminate the

10 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Repairs

environment if spilled or not disposed of Your dealer’s service center is the best properly. led or injured, or you could make your place to have your vehicle repaired. You 1 vehicle unsafe. Perform only those can find dealers all over the country with tasks you are fully qualified to do. the equipment and trained personnel to get WARNING you back on the road quickly—and keep you there. Diesel engine exhaust and some of its WARNING Your vehicle is a complex machine. constituents are known to the State of Anyone attempting repairs on it needs California to cause cancer, birth de- Modifying your vehicle can make it un- good mechanical training and the proper fects, and other reproductive harm. safe. Some modifications can affect tools. However, all warranty repairs must Other chemicals in this vehicle are al- your vehicle's electrical system, stabili- be performed by an authorized service so known to the State of California to ty, or other important functions. Before facility. If you aren’t an experienced cause cancer, birth defects or other re- modifying your vehicle, check with mechanic, or don’t have the right productive harm. This warning require- your dealer to make sure it can be equipment, please leave all repairs to an ment is mandated by California law done safely. Improper modifications authorized service facility. They are the (Proposition 65) and does not result can cause death or personal injury. ones best equipped to do the job safely from any change in the manner in and correctly. which vehicles are manufactured. CAUTION Contact your local government agency for Maintenance Manuals information concerning proper disposal. The installation of electronic devices to If you do decide to do any complex repair the On Board Diagnostics (OBD) con- work, you’ll need the maintenance nector, the vehicle Controller Area Net- manuals. Order them from your authorized work (CAN), or their associated wiring dealer. Please provide your Chassis Serial Repairs is not permitted. Doing so can ad- Number when you order, to be sure you versely affect vehicle performance get the correct manuals for your vehicle. WARNING and/or cause fault codes to be record- Allow about four weeks for delivery. There ed. The OBD connector is provided for will be a charge for these manuals. DO NOT attempt repair work without temporary connection of service tools sufficient training, service manuals, and for diagnostic purposes only. and the proper tools. You could be kil-

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 11 SAFETY - Additional Sources of Information

Final Chassis Bill of Material about regulations governing transportation the best way to enter and exit a 1 A complete, non-illustrated computer across state lines. Conventional Cab. printout listing of the parts used to custom- build your vehicle is available through the WARNING dealer from whom you purchased your Cab Access vehicle. Jumping out of the cab or getting into the cab without proper care is danger- WARNING ous. You could slip and fall, which Additional Sources of could lead to death or personal injury. Always reinstall steps before entering Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, Information the cab or accessing the deck plate. or grease off of the steps before enter- Without steps you could slip and fall. ing the cab. Use the steps and grab Major component suppliers also supply Failure to comply may result in person- handles provided, and always keep at operation manuals specific to their al injury or death. least three points of contact between products. Additional manuals and other your hands and feet and the truck. pieces of literature are included in the Look where you are going. glove box literature package. Look for WARNING information on products such as the engine, driver's seat, transmission, axles, Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, wheels, tires, ABS/ESC, radio, fifth wheel, or grease off the steps before entering lane departure, and adaptive cruise the cab or accessing the deck plate. control. If you are missing these pieces of Stepping on a slippery surface can literature, ask your dealer for copies. cause a fall which may result in death Another place to learn more about trucking or personal injury. is from local truck driving schools. Contact one near you to learn about courses they Be careful whenever you get into or out of offer. Federal and state agencies such as your vehicle’s cab. Always maintain at the department of licensing also have least three points of contact with your information. The Interstate Commerce hands on the grab handles and your feet Commission can give you information on the steps. The following picture shows

12 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Cab Access

secure rolling code technology that prevents someone from recording the entry 1 WARNING signal. To help lessen the chance and/or se- verity of death or personal injury in NOTE case of an accident, always lock the doors while driving. Along with using FCC ID: L2C0031T IC: 3432A-0031T the lap shoulder belts properly, locking FCC ID: L2C0032R IC: 3432A-0032R the doors helps prevent doors from in- This device complies with Part 15 of advertently opening and occupants the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of from being ejected from the vehicle. Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions (1) This To lock or unlock the doors from outside device may not cause harmful interfer- the cab: ence, and (2) This device must accept 1. • Rotate the key toward the rear any interference received, including in- of the vehicle to lock terference that may cause undesired (clockwise), or operation. Changes or modifications • Rotate the key toward the front not expressively approved by the party of the vehicle (counter responsible for compliance could void clockwise) to unlock. the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term IC: before the ra- dio certification number only signifies Remote Keyless Entry (Option) that Industry Canada technical specifi- How to Lock and Unlock the Cab Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is a system cations were met. Doors that adds security and convenience to your vehicle. The system will lock or unlock cab The vehicle has one key for cab doors, Operate Door Locks using Remote ignition, and the optional sleeper luggage doors with the key fob. The system will Keyless Entry compartment. Frame-mounted tool box alert you with parking lights when the locks and locking fuel tank caps each have selected doors are locked or unlocked. The Open doors will not lock using the key fob. separate, individual keys. system includes two key fobs that provide The key fob should be within 30 ft. (9 m) of

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 13 SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

the vehicle and should not be in proximity ladder can be folded up into the upper Ladder Unfolded 1 of other RF sources such as television, bunk. radio or cell phone transmitters. To unlock the cab doors: 1. Press the UNLOCK button once. Ladder Folded and Latched The driver's door will unlock and the parking lights will come on for 40 seconds. 2. Quickly press the UNLOCK button a second time within 5 seconds to unlock the passenger door. 3. Press the LOCK button. The doors will lock and the parking lights will come on for 2 seconds.

How to Access the Upper

Bunk Ladder Partially Unfolded

Upper Bunk Ladder This vehicle may be equipped with an upper bunk ladder. The ladder enables you to conveniently climb into the upper bunk without stepping on the lower bunk. The ladder can be unfolded when needed. The How to Unfold the Upper Bunk ladder folds up into the upper bunk Ladder structure when not in use, while driving, or It is important to follow all specified safety when accessing the lower bunk. The instructions when unfolding the upper bunk ladder.

14 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

Unlatching the ladder 1 WARNING CAUTION

DO NOT attempt to fold or unfold the Make sure floor area is clear prior to ladder while an occupant is in the low- folding and unfolding the ladder. There er bunk. Allow the lower bunk occu- should be nothing between the ladder pant to vacate the bunk before folding leg and floor carpet when the ladder is or unfolding the ladder. Failure to do unfolded. Failure to do so may result in so may result in personal injury. property damage.

1. Ensure the lower bunk is in the CAUTION down position. 2. Lower the upper bunk. 5. Position your left hand, open palm, Upper bunk must be in down position 3. Locate the release latch on the beside the latch to control the before folding and unfolding the lad- driver's side front edge of the upper unfolding action of the ladder as it der. Always lower the upper bunk be- bunk. fore folding and unfolding the ladder. separates from the bunk structure. 4. Release the ladder by pulling the Failure to do so may result in property Maintain contact with your left latch out. damage. hand, open palm, in the same position until the ladder is completely unfolded. CAUTION 6. When the ladder is about half way unfolded, position your right hand, Lower bunk must be in down position open palm, on the upper right side before folding and unfolding the lad- of the ladder to help guide the der. Failure to do so may result in ladder into position. property damage.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 15 SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

Hand Positions to Unfold the Ladder 1 WARNING CAUTION DO NOT grip the ladder while folding and unfolding it. Always use an open Do not attempt to open the lower bunk hand when folding and unfolding the when the ladder is unfolded and verti- ladder to prevent injuries and pinching cal. Failure to comply may result in of fingers. Failure to comply may result property damage. in personal injury.

Apply pressure in opposite directions to CAUTION ensure smooth operation of the ladder. Never attempt to pull the bottom of the ladder forward when the ladder is in the down position. Failure to comply may result in property damage.

CAUTION

Never attempt to fold or force the lad- der toward the passenger side of the 7. Make sure the ladder is completely vehicle once the ladder has reached unfolded against the internal stop. vertical position and is against the in- ternal stop inside the upper bunk. Do- The ladder should be vertical at this point. ing so can cause damage to the lad- der.

16 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

How to Climb In and Out of the Face the ladder Upper Bunk WARNING 1

WARNING Never climb a damaged, bent, or bro- ken ladder. Doing so may result in per- Make sure the ladder is fully open be- sonal injury. fore climbing up or down the ladder. The ladder should be against internal stops and vertical before using it. Fail- WARNING ure to do so may result in death or per- sonal injury. Never allow multiple people on the lad- der at the same time. Only one person on the ladder at any time. Failure to WARNING comply may result in personal injury.

Never use the ladder while the vehicle Make sure the ladder is in the unfolded is in motion. Always fold and stow the position. ladder before moving the vehicle. Fail- 1. Face the ladder when climbing up ure to comply may result in death or or down. personal injury.

2. Maintain a firm grip when climbing WARNING up or down the ladder. Use the ladder and grab handles provided, Do not exceed the weight limit of 320 and always keep at least three lb on the ladder. Failure to comply may points of contact between your result in personal injury or death. hands and feet and the truck. Always face toward the bunk when entering or exiting the upper bunk and look where you are going.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 17 SAFETY - How to Access the Upper Bunk

3. As you get higher on the ladder, How to Fold the Upper Bunk of the ladder. Maintain contact with 1 maintain contact with the sleeper Ladder your left hand, open palm, in the upper grab handles as you get onto same position until the ladder is the upper bunk. approximately half-way folded. WARNING Hand Positions to Fold the Ladder

Upper Grab Handles DO NOT attempt to fold or unfold the ladder while an occupant is in the low-

1 er bunk. Allow the lower bunk occu- pant to vacate the bunk before folding or unfolding the ladder. Failure to do so may result in personal injury.

CAUTION

Lower bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- der. Failure to do so may result in property damage.

1. Ensure that the lower bunk is in the down position. 2. Position your left hand, open palm, against the lower left side of the ladder. Maintain contact with your 1. Upper Grab Handles left hand, open palm, in the same position until the ladder is completely folded. 3. Position your right hand, open palm, against the upper right side

18 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Deckplate Access

simultaneously use the left hand to WARNING apply pressure to the right. The Without steps you could slip and fall. 1 ladder will begin to fold up. Failure to comply may result in person- al injury or death. DO NOT grip the ladder while folding 5. When the ladder is approximately and unfolding it. Always use an open half-way folded, remove your right hand when folding and unfolding the hand from the right side of the WARNING ladder to prevent injuries and pinching ladder. of fingers. Failure to comply may result 6. Continue to push with your left in personal injury. Keep steps clean. Clean any fuel, oil, hand until the ladder has been or grease off the steps before entering folded into the upper bunk the cab or accessing the deck plate. structure. Stepping on a slippery surface can CAUTION 7. Secure the latch. cause a fall which may result in death or personal injury. Lower bunk must be in down position before folding and unfolding the lad- CAUTION der. Always fold the ladder before rais- WARNING ing the lower bunk. Failure to do so Make sure the ladder is fully closed may result in property damage. while the vehicle is in motion. Failure When you are climbing onto and off to do so may result in property dam- the deck plate, maintain at least three Apply pressure in opposite directions to age. points of contact with your hands on ensure smooth operation of the ladder. the grab handles and your feet on the steps. Always face toward the vehicle WARNING when entering or exiting the cab and Deckplate Access look where you are going. Failure to Right hand must be clear of the ladder comply may result in death or personal when it is approximately half-way fold- injury. ed. Failure to do so may result in per- WARNING sonal injury. Always reinstall steps before entering 4. Use the right hand to apply the cab or accessing the deck plate. pressure to the left and

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 19 SAFETY - How to open the hood

mating side is on the cab or quarter fenders. 1 WARNING

When stepping onto a surface to enter WARNING the cab or access the deck plate, only use the steps and grab handles instal- Before opening or closing the hood, led and designed for that purpose. make sure your footing is secure and Failure to use the proper steps and stable. Failure to do so may cause the grab handles could cause a fall which hood to open or close uncontrollably may result in death or personal injury. which may result in death or personal injury.

NOTE

Any alteration (adding bulkheads, headache racks, tool boxes, etc.) be- hind the cab that affects the utilization of installed grab handles, deck plates, or frame access steps should comply with Federal Motor Carrier Safety Reg- ulation 399.

How to open the hood

Access the engine by opening the hood. The hood is typically held in the closed position by a latch system. The latches are typically mounted on the hood and the

20 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - How to open the hood

1 CAUTION

A hood not latched securely could open during operation and cause vehi- cle damage. Be sure to latch the hood securely.

WARNING

A pivoting hood could hurt someone or be damaged itself. Before opening or closing the hood, be sure there are no people or objects in the way. Failure to stand in a position of safety can cause death or personal injury. Close the Hood The hood hold-open device will only be 1. Release the latches engaged if the vehicle hood is fully open. Once it is fully open, the latch will automatically engage and will need to be disengaged by the operator. The release lever for the hood hold-open device is 2. Put one or both hands on the top of located near the front hinge of the hood. the hood front. Tilt the hood forward by pulling at the top of the hood keeping your feet on the ground for stability. Keep pulling on the hood until you are certain that the hood hold open device is engaged.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 21 SAFETY - How to open the hood

Under Hood Air Intake? 1 WARNING The option for under hood intake is a switch on the dash that allows the operator DO NOT let go of the hood while it to use air from under the hood in the event closes. Close the hood in a controlled the air filter housing's inlet is blocked by manner which requires hands firmly snow or ice. grasping the hood and feet on a sta- ble, non-slip, surface. Failure to control WARNING the hood as it closes may result in death or personal injury DO NOT open the under hood air door with hands. This door is held closed with a spring which may pull the door Pull the lever out to disengage the hood WARNING closed unexpectedly. Failure to comply hold-open device. may result in personal injury. Always ensure the hood hold open latch is engaged to keep the hood fully open any time anyone gets under the CAUTION hood for any reason. Failure to do so may cause the hood to close uncon- Only operate the under hood intake air trollably which may result in death or switch when outside temperatures are personal injury. below 32°F (0°C). Engaging the under hood air intake while temperatures are WARNING above freezing may result in engine damage. Before closing the hood, be sure the The switch is directly wired to a solenoid When closing the hood, be sure that you area is clear—no people or objects are on the air filter housing. This air solenoid maintain the same point of contact (top of in the way. Failure to do so may result (normally closed) will engage when hood) to control the movement of the hood in death or personal injury. as it closes. Gently lower the hood into signaled which will supply air to a piston. place to avoid damage to the hood or cab. This air pressure will overcome a spring

22 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Seat

which holds a door closed inside the air filter housing. Fully engaged, the door will 1 open and air will enter from under the hood WARNING instead of the opening on the side of the hood. Always ensure that the passenger seat is locked into the forward facing posi- tion when the vehicle is in motion. Seat Locking the swivel seat into the for- ward facing position maximizes visibili- This seat has up to ten different controls ty to the surrounding area. Failure to that maximize the driver's comfort. comply creates a safety hazard that Lumbar (and bolster support if available) may result in death or personal injury. are provided for superior support to the back during operation. Lower support is standard and the optional functions include WARNING upper lumbar and bolster functions. Pressing on the “+” symbol of the button DO NOT use the swivel function while will add support in the area. Pressing the a passenger is in the seat and the ve- opposite side of the button will release The seats in this vehicle are equipped with hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not pressure and will reduce support in the a switch that locks out the fore-aft isolator provide proper protection if the pas- area. function in the seat. When locked, the seat senger is not facing forward and the will not move back and forth. It will be vehicle is in an accident. Failure to rigidly fixed and only allowed to move up comply may result in death or personal and down with the vehicle’s movements. injury. This vehicle may be equipped with a swivel function on the passenger seat. This function allows the passenger seat to rotate and face towards the inside of the cab.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 23 SAFETY - Seat

1 CAUTION WARNING

DO NOT use the seat heater for more When using the seat heater or ventila- 2 than 10 minutes at a time. Always turn tion system, DO NOT place anything 1 off the seat heaters when they are not on the seat that insulates against heat needed. Overuse of the seat heater or cooling, such as a blanket, cushion, may decrease the capacity of the vehi- or similar item. This may cause the cle’s batteries and may result in poor seat heater or ventilation system to 1. Lower and Upper Lumbar starting and potential equipment dam- overheat, which may cause a heat-in- Adjustment age. duced burn or may damage the seat. 2. Bolster Adjustment (option) WARNING

This seat may be equipped with a seat heater or ventilation system. There is a possibility that some people may suffer heat-induced burns or excessive cool- ing when using the system. DO NOT use either of these systems if you 7 3 have a diminished ability to sense tem- perature, a reduced ability to feel pain, or have sensitive skin. 6 1 2 5 1. Seat heater/cooler 1 2 3 4 2. Seat thigh support up/down 1. Seat fore/aft 3. Seat bottom angle adjustment 2. Express down 3. Suspension stiffness

24 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Seat

4. Seat height Locking the swivel seat into the for- driving off, always check to ensure that 5. Lumbar and Bolster (Bolster is an ward facing position maximizes visibili- the seat is firmly latched in position. 1 optional feature) ty to the surrounding area. Failure to Failure to comply may result in person- 6. Recline comply creates a safety hazard that al injury, death, equipment or property 7. Armrest angle may result in death or personal injury. damage.

WARNING WARNING WARNING DO NOT drive or ride with your seat DO NOT use the swivel function while Before driving or riding in a vehicle, back in the reclined position. You a passenger is in the seat and the ve- ensure that there is adequate head could be injured by sliding under the hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not clearance at maximum upward travel seat belts in a collision. Failure to com- provide proper protection if the pas- of seat. Injury may occur if head clear- ply may result in personal injury or senger is not facing forward and the ance is not adequate. Failure to com- death. vehicle is in an accident. Failure to ply may result in personal injury or comply may result in death or personal death. injury. Passenger Seat Swivel (Option) 1. Set the seat's fore/aft position via This vehicle may be equipped with a swivel the bar located below the seat function on the passenger seat. This How to adjust a seat cushion. This is a mechanical latch function allows the passenger seat to that does not involve any electric or rotate and face towards the inside of the WARNING air operated devices to control cab. adjustment. DO NOT adjust the driver's seat while 2. Set the seat height via the large switch on the left side of the seat WARNING the vehicle is moving. The seat could move suddenly and unexpectedly and cushion. This switch is located in the center of the seat pad and uses Always ensure that the passenger seat can cause the driver to lose control of air to adjust the seat height. is locked into the forward facing posi- the vehicle. Make all adjustments to tion when the vehicle is in motion. the seat while the vehicle is stopped. 3. Adjust the thigh support by toggling After adjusting the seat and before the switch located immediately

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 25 SAFETY - Seat

under the seat bottom cushion and Unbelted riders could be thrown into the Correct Use of Restraint 1 above the fore/aft position windshield or other parts of the cab or adjustment lever. could be thrown out of the cab. They could Correct Placement of Lap Belt 4. Adjust the seat bottom angle using strike another person. Injuries can be much the switch next to the thigh support. worse when riders are unbelted. Always 5. Adjust the seat back recline angle observe user warnings pertaining to safety using the large lever situated near belts. Your vehicle is equipped with a seat the seat belt buckle. belt indicator lamp located on the dash. 6. Adjust the lumbar support by using the switch bank located on the side WARNING the seat cushion between the up/ down adjustment switch and the DO NOT drive vehicle without your seat recline adjustment lever. seat belt and your passengers' belts Correct Placement of Shoulder Belt 7. Adjust the steering wheel. fastened. Riding without a safety belt 8. Adjust the cab side mirrors. properly fastened can lead to injury or death in an emergency. Safety Restraint Belts Safety belts have proven to be the single WARNING most effective means available for reducing the potential for either death or DO NOT use the swivel function while personal injury in motor vehicle accidents. a passenger is in the seat and the ve- The combination lap/shoulder belt is hicle is in motion. The seat belt will not equipped with a locking mechanism. The provide proper protection if the pas- system adjusts automatically to a person's senger is not facing forward and the size and movements as long as the pull on vehicle is in an accident. Failure to the belt is slow. Hard braking or a collision comply may result in death or personal locks the belt. The belt will also lock when injury. driving up or down a steep hill or in a sharp curve.

26 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Seat

Incorrect Use of Restraint Safety Restraint Belt Twisted Lap Belt Too High on the Hip 1

During Pregnancy

Shoulder Belt Incorrectly Under the Arm Pregnant women should always wear Safety Restraint Tips combination lap/shoulder belts. The lap belt portion must be worn snugly and as • DO NOT wear a belt over rigid or low as possible across the pelvis. To avoid breakable objects in or on your pressure on the abdomen, the belt must clothing, such as eye glasses, never pass over the waist. A properly worn pens, keys, etc., as these may seat belt may significantly reduce the risks cause injury in an accident. to woman and baby in the event of a crash. • Any authorized person sleeping in your vehicle while it is moving should use the bunk restraint. • Any authorized person sitting in the sleeper area on the sofa bed (if equipped) while it is moving should wear a seat belt. • A responsible operator sees to it that everyone in the vehicle rides or sleeps safely. The operator is responsible to inform any passengers or co-drivers how to

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 27 SAFETY - Seat

properly use the seat belts and • Never bleach or dye seat or bunk How to Use Lap/Shoulder Belt 1 bunk restraint in the vehicle. restraint belts: chemicals can Follow these steps to fasten your seat belt • DO NOT strap in more than one weaken them. Do, however, keep and be sure anyone riding with you does person with each belt. them clean by following the care the same. • Keep seat belt and bunk restraint label on the belts. Let them dry buckles free of any obstruction that completely before allowing them to may prevent secure locking. retract or be stowed away. WARNING • Damaged or worn belts in the cab • Make sure the seat belts and bunk Proper seat belt adjustment and use is or sleeper subjected to excessive restraint of the unoccupied important to maximize occupant safe- stretch forces from normal wear, passenger seat or bunk is fully ty. Failure to wear or adjust the safety must be replaced. They may not wound up on its retractor or is belt properly may result in death or protect you if you are in an stowed, so that the belt or restraint personal injury. accident. tongue is in its properly stowed position. This reduces the • Any belts or restraints that have possibility of the tongue becoming To fasten the belt: been subjected to an accident a striking object in case of a 1. Grasp the belt tongue. should be inspected for any loose sudden stop. (attaching) hardware or damaged 2. Pull belt in a continuous slow buckles. • DO NOT modify or disassemble motion across your chest and lap. the seat belts or bunk restraint in • If belts show damage to any part of 3. Insert belt tongue into buckle on your vehicle. They will not be assembly, such as webbing, inboard side of seat. available to keep you and your bindings, buckles or retractors, 4. Push down until the tongue is passengers safe. they must be replaced. securely locked with an audible • If any seat belt or bunk restraint is • DO NOT allow safety belts (seat or click. not working properly, see an bunk) to become damaged by 5. Pull belt to check for proper authorized dealer for repair or getting caught in door, bunk, or fastening and adjustment. replacement. seat hardware, or rubbing against a. Pull shoulder section to make sharp objects. sure belt fits snugly across the • All belts must be kept clean or the chest and pelvis. retractors may not work properly.

28 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Seat

b. There should be less than one belt is fastened. inch (25 mm) gap between the 1 body and the belt. WARNING c. The shoulder belt must be DO NOT remove, modify, or replace positioned over the shoulder, the tether belt system with a different it must never rest against the tether system. A failed or missing teth- neck or be worn under the er belt could allow the seat base to arm. fully extend in the event of an acci- d. Make sure any slack is wound dent. Failure to comply may result in up on the retractor and that death or personal injury. the belt is not twisted. If the belt is locked, lean the body back to remove any tension in the belt. After WARNING releasing the belt, allow the belt to retract completely by guiding the belt tongue until Failure to adjust external tether belts the belt comes to a stop. properly can cause excessive move- To unfasten the belt, push the release ment of the seat in an accident. Tether button on the buckle and the belt should belts should be adjusted so that they spring out of the buckle. The seat belt are taut when the seat is in its most indicator will turn off once the driver's seat Tether Belts upward and forward position. Failure Make sure that the tether belt is attached to comply may result in death or per- to the cab floor and seat frame. It should sonal injury. be routed through the buckle on each side. Often the attachments are made using a Adjust an external tether by either split-type hook. Make sure both halves of lengthening or shortening the strap. To the hook are around the anchor bracket. lengthen it: 1. Turn the buckle to a right angle to the webbing. 2. Then pull the buckle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 29 SAFETY - Seat

3. To shorten the tether, pull on the 2. Latch the seat belt. Belt Damage and Repair 1 strap. 3. If available, adjust the seat belt Damaged belts in the cab must be height adjuster to a comfortable replaced. Belts that have been stretched, Komfort Latch Feature driving position. cut, or worn out may not protect you in an 4. While seated appropriately, push accident. the "on" button to engage the If any seat belt is not working properly, see Komfort Latch. an Authorized Service Center for repair or 5. Learn forward in the seat until you replacement. hear a "click." For further information on seat belts and 6. Return to normal driving position, seat belt maintenance, see Safety and the Komfort Latch maintains Restraint System - Inspection on page 247. the preset amount of tension relief. More information and video tutorials can be Sleeper Bunks and Restraints found at: http://www.clicktugsnug.com/ This vehicle comes equipped with a bunk To disengage the mechanism unbuckle the restraint for the primary lower bunk and the seat belt and then press the OFF button of optional upper bunk. These restraints the Komfort Latch or tug on the shoulder should be used whenever the bunks are WARNING strap. occupied by a person while the vehicle is in motion. The sleeper bunk restraint is DO NOT set the Komfort Latch with intended to reduce the risk of being thrown too much slack. Too much slack may from the bunk in a crash. This device is not reduce the effectiveness of the seat designed to hold the occupant in a fixed belt. Failure to comply may result in position on the bunk and may not prevent death or personal injury. all injuries in the event of a crash.

To eliminate cinching, simply activate the Komfort Latch device located on the seat belt webbing at the appropriate time: 1. Adjust the seat to its proper driving position.

30 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Seat

Lower Bunk Sleep Restraints WARNING WARNING 1

Be sure the restraint system is used Any loose items on the upper or lower when anyone is occupying the sleeper bunk should be moved to a secured while the vehicle is moving. In an acci- place before driving the vehicle. Fail- dent, an unrestrained person lying in a ure to comply may result in death, per- sleeper bunk could be seriously in- sonal injury, equipment or property jured. He or she could be thrown from damage. the bunk. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or Per FMCSR 392.60 - Unauthorized property damage. Persons Not to be Transported. Federal law prohibits the transportation of persons Lower Bunk Upper Bunk in commercial vehicles unless they are specifically authorized in writing by the motor carrier. See the cited FMCSR for a WARNING WARNING

Always keep the lower bunk in its hori- Be sure the latch that holds the upper zontal, latched, position while the vehi- bunk in the folded position is working cle is moving. If left open, stored items properly so the bunk will not fall down. could become loose during an acci- Pull on the bunk to be sure it is latched dent and strike you, causing death or securely. If the bunk falls, you could be personal injury. injured. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or Before you move the vehicle, check to be property damage. sure the lower bunk is in the down position.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 31 SAFETY - What to do before starting the vehicle

complete description of the regulation and distractions may include radio controls, exemptions. fall out in a sudden stop which may GPS navigation controls, cellular telephone 1 lead to death or personal injury. Upper Bunk Sleep Restraints calls, cellular text messages, reading or reaching for something on the floor. Compartments in the cab and sleeper are Minimizing your distractions will improve provided for storage of necessary items safe driving and will help avoid an accident used during operation. The storage areas involving death or personal injury. above the door are designed to hold a Be aware of local regulations that may combined total not exceeding 14 lbs (6 kg) prohibit the use of cellular telephones while per compartment and the other overhead driving. In addition to being an unsafe compartments (including those in the practice, it may be against local or federal optional sleeper) should hold a combined ordinances to use cellular devices while total not exceeding 5 lbs (2.2 kg) per operating the vehicle. compartment. Much has gone into the manufacturing of your vehicle including advanced What to do before starting engineering techniques, rigid quality Upper Rear Sleeper Storage control, and demanding inspections. These the vehicle manufacturing processes will be enhanced Your vehicle may be equipped with an Safe Vehicle Operation by you, the safe driver, who observes the upper storage shelf that extends over the following: lower bunk and across the rear of the Be sure to perform pre-trip inspections • Knows and understands how to sleeper. The following warning applies: before starting and operating the vehicle. operate the vehicle and all its For your safety, as well as those around controls WARNING you, be a responsible driver: • Maintains the vehicle properly • If you drink alcohol, do not drive. • Uses driving skills wisely. Overhead compartments are not in- • Do not drive if you are tired, ill, or This manual is not a training manual. It tended for personnel use or for items under emotional stress. cannot tell you everything you need to exceeding their designed weight limits. Safe driving is only possible with the know about driving your vehicle. For that Exceeding the weight limits may cause proper concentration on the driving task. you need a good training program or truck the shelf to collapse and/or items may Keep distraction to a minimum to improve driving school. If you have not been your concentration. Examples of trained, get the proper training before you

32 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - What to do before starting the vehicle

drive. Only qualified drivers should drive Drivers Checklist this vehicle. To keep your vehicle in top shape and 1 For more information, refer to Department WARNING maintain a high level of safety for you, your of Transportation Regulation 392.7, which passengers, and your load, make a states that interstate commercial motor DO NOT text and drive. Your reaction thorough inspection every day before you vehicles are not to be driven unless the time, perceptions, and judgment can drive. You will save maintenance time later, driver is sure that certain parts and be affected while texting or using any and the safety checks could help prevent a accessories are in working order. other form of mobile messaging while serious accident. Please remember, too, Do not drink alcohol and drive. Your driving. Failure to comply may result in that Federal Motor Carrier Safety reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be death, personal injury, equipment or Regulation 392.7 requires a pre-trip affected by even a small amount of property damage. inspection and so do commercial trucking alcohol. You could have a serious or even companies. fatal accident, if you drive after drinking. Emergency Equipment You are not expected to become a DO NOT drink and drive or ride with a It is good practice to carry an emergency professional mechanic. The purpose of driver who has been drinking. equipment kit in your vehicle. One day, if your inspections is to find anything that you have a roadside emergency, you will might interfere with the safe and efficient WARNING be glad the following items are with you: transportation of yourself, any passengers, • Window scraper and your load. If you do find something The use of alcohol, drugs, and certain • Snow brush wrong and cannot fix it yourself, have an medications can impair perception, re- • Container or bag of sand or salt authorized dealer or qualified mechanic actions, and driving ability. These cir- • Emergency light repair your vehicle right away. cumstances can substantially increase • Warning triangles The following operations are to be the risk of an accident. Failure to com- performed by the driver. Performing these • Small shovel ply may result in property damage, checks and following the maintenance personal injury, or death. • First aid kit procedures in this manual will help keep • Fire extinguisher your vehicle running properly. • Vehicle recovery hitches.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 33 SAFETY - Vehicle Loading

components installed from the factory on to 1 the vehicle and their designed Vehicle Loading specifications. (Axle weight ratings are listed on the driver's door edge.)

WARNING GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. This is the MAXIMUM WEIGHT your vehicle DO NOT exceed the specified load rat- is allowed to carry, including the weight of the empty vehicle, loading 1 - Axle Weight ing. Overloading can result in loss of 2 - Payload Distribution platform, occupants, fuel, and any 3 - MAXIMUM LOAD RATING (1) 7,880 (3,574) 7,540 (3,420) vehicle control, either by causing com- load. Never exceed the GVWR of your (2) 4,120 (1,869) 24,348 (11,061) ponent failures or by affecting vehicle vehicle. (3)12,000 (5,443) 31,925 (14,481) Lbs (Kg) Lbs (Kg) handling. Exceeding load ratings can GCW Gross Combination Weight (GCW). also shorten the service life of the ve- This is the actual combined weight of 1. Axle Weight hicle. Failure to comply may result in your vehicle and its load: vehicle, plus trailer(s), plus cargo. death or personal injury. 2. Payload Distribution GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating. This is the 3. Maximum Load Rating total weight that one axle is designed to transmit to the ground. You will find Be sure that the load on the vehicle is WARNING this number listed on the driver's door distributed evenly across each axle so that edge. no axle has to support more than its rated An unevenly distributed load or exces- Load Be sure any load you carry is GAWR. In total, the vehicle and its load sive load over one axle can adversely Distribution distributed so that no axle has to should not exceed the GAWR for each axle affect the braking and handling of your support more than its GAWR. and must not exceed the GCW. vehicle, which could result in an acci- dent. Even if your load is under the le- gal limits, be sure it is distributed even- ly. Failure to comply may result in Visual inspection while death, personal injury, equipment or approaching the vehicle property damage. While approaching the vehicle, inspect the The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) general appearance of the vehicle and its or the maximum front and rear Gross Axle surroundings for any signs of needed Weight Ratings are determined by the attention.

34 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Daily Checks

cables are present and in good working order. NOTE Daily Checks 1 • Hood latch If equipped with a three-piece roof fair- • Brake lines and hoses ing, DO NOT DRIVE WITH ROOF NOTE • Steering components - check FAIRING FOLDED DOWN, since the pitman arm, drag link, tie rod, marker lamps will not be effective in These checks are in addition to, not in steering shaft and power steering that position. place of, Federal Motor Carrier Safety hoses, etc., for loose, broken, or Regulations. These regulations may missing parts. Perform these basic inspection steps be purchased by writing to: Superin- • Hydraulic clutch fluid before operating the vehicle. tendent of Documents U.S. Govern- Chassis and Cab Exterior 1. Check the overall appearance and ment Printing Office Bookstore 710 N. condition. Are windows, mirrors, Capitol St. N.W. Washington, DC • Lamps - are any exterior lamps and lights clean and unobstructed? 20402, or [email protected]. cracked or damaged? Perform an exterior lamp test. See Exterior 2. Is the air-intake opening clear of Engine obstructions? Lighting Self-Test on page 107 for 3. Check beneath the vehicle. Are • Engine oil more information. there signs of fuel, oil, or water • Engine coolant • Is the air-intake opening clear of leaks? • Power steering fluid obstructions? 4. Check for damaged, loose, or • Engine belt • Window and mirrors - clean and adjusted? missing parts. Are there parts • Fuel filter (water separator) Fuel showing signs of excessive wear or System on page 273 • Tires, wheels and hubs Tires on lack of lubrication? Have a qualified page 290 Wheels on page 294 and • Windshield washer fluid mechanic examine any Systems Check on page 37 • Battery cables - check the questionable items and repair them • Suspension components - check condition of the battery and without delay. for loose or missing fasteners. alternator cables for signs of 5. Check your load. Is it secured Check damage to springs or other chafing or rubbing. Make sure that properly? suspension parts such as cracks, all clamps (straps) holding the gouges, distortions, bulges or chafing.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 35 SAFETY - Weekly Checks

• Brake lines and hoses - check • Steering column - adjust for easy 1 lines, linkages, chambers, parking reach and visibility. Weekly Checks and service brake operation. • Mirrors - check and readjust • Air system - Air System on page mirrors if necessary. 232 • Lamps - turn ignition key to the ON NOTE • Steps and grab handles position to allow the bulb check • Frame mounted tanks (fuel, diesel and the systems check to test the These checks are in addition to, not in exhaust fluid, etc) - check truck systems. Perform an Exterior place of, Federal Motor Carrier Safety underneath the vehicle for signs of Light Selft Test Regulations. These regulations may fluid leaks. If any are found, correct • Instruments - check all instruments. be purchased by writing to: Superin- before operating the vehicle. Is the see Systems Check on page 37 tendent of Documents U.S. Govern- tank fill cap secure? Are the tank • Windshield - check operation of ment Printing Office Bookstore 710 N. straps tight? Is the strap webbing in windshield wipers and washers. Capitol St. N.W. Washington, DC place? • Horn - check operation of horn. 20402, or [email protected]. • Trailer connections - are they • Fuel - check vehicle's fuel level. Is Engine secure and the lines clear? If they there enough fuel? are not being used, are they stored • Diesel exhaust fluid - check level. • Belts properly? Is the trailer spare wheel Is there enough fluid? • Hoses secure and inflated? Is the landing gear up and the handle secured? • Air conditioning filters in the cab • Clamps and/or sleeper - check the • Fifth wheel - Is the kingpin or the • Radiator condition of the sleeper air sliding fifth wheel locked? • Air filter and its housing conditioning air filter. Keep the • Engine Aftertreatment system sleeper floor area behind the Cab Interior components passenger front seat clear of debris • Seat - adjust the seat for easy and pet hair. The sleeper air • Exhaust pipes reach of controls and visibility. conditioner draws air from this area • Engine air pre-cleaner (option) - • Seat belts - fasten and adjust and excessive dirt or pet hair may For vocational vehicles with safety restraint belts (which may shorten the service life of the optional engine air pre-cleaner, include restraints in the sleeper). sleeper air conditioning air filter. check the purge valve at the bottom of the hood mounted

36 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Systems Check

engine air pre-cleaner for any • PACCAR 20k Front Axle Kingpin Systems Check evaluates each monitored obstructions. Make sure the purge Joint Grease/Tie Rod Ends (option) system and displays its progress for the 1 valve will open and close as (VOCATIONAL USE) - For operator. The Systems Check will appear needed to purge dirt and water vocational vehicles with this axle, when the Exterior Lighting Self-Test (ELST) from the engine intake air. grease with Heavy-Duty is activated, or when viewing the • Automatic transmission fluid Multipurpose Lithium Based: #1 or Notifications sub-menu. (where applicable) - Check level, #2 grade, every 50 hours. (Refer to Systems Check can be interrupted at any after the engine has warmed up to Front Axle and Suspension on time by operating temperature. page 273 for maintenance • Pressing Select instructions.) Chassis and Cab Exterior • Switching the ELST switch to OFF • Turning the ignition key to OFF or • Battery - check battery and ACC terminals. Systems Check • Releasing the Parking Brake. • Hood supports and guides are The Systems Check can also present the properly lubricated. System Check Display following optional features. • Wheel cap nuts - are they all in place and torqued properly - Tire Pressure Monitoring System tighten if necessary. Wheels on (TPMS) (option) page 294 One of the systems the vehicle monitors is • Controls and wiring - check for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System condition and adjustment (TPMS). • Steering components - check 1 pitman arm, drag link, intermediate 105 84 105 105 shaft U-joint pinch bolt, tie rod, 105 105114 105 105 steering shaft and power steering hoses, etc., for loose, broken, or missing parts. 105 105 105 105 105 • Cab air conditioner fresh air filter - 105 105 105 105 check for condition and cleanliness. 2

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 37 SAFETY - Systems Check

TPMS shows individual tire pressures for shown, as well as general driving tips that 1 each location and will change the color of can improve brake saving and fuel the tire: economy (see Driver Rewards). • Outlined – Tire pressure not Driver Performance Assistant (DPA) available (option) • Gray – Nominal • Amber – High or low pressure If enabled, The Driver Performance Assistant score for Braking Habits is • Red – Very low or high pressure, or shown, as well as general driving tips that high temperature can improve brake saving and fuel To read about tires and recommended economy (see DPA ). maintenance practices, see Tires on page 290.

System Check Display with TPMS

105 84 105 105 105 96 105 105

1 2 3 4 5

105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105

Once the Systems Check has completed, the results will display in a summary. A detailed explanation of this summary can be viewed by accessing the Menu after a Systems Check has completed. Driver Rewards (option) If enabled, the Driver Rewards score for Fuel Economy, Engine Idle Time, or both Fuel Economy and Engine Idle Time are

38 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) SAFETY - Systems Check

1

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 39 EMERGENCY -

Chapter 2 | EMERGENCY 2 Roadside Assistance...... 41 Low Air Alarm ...... 41 Stop Engine Light...... 42 Low Oil Pressure...... 42 Engine is Overheating...... 42 How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse...... 44 Where are the Fuses Located?...... 46 How to Jump Start a Battery...... 46 How to Recover a Vehicle...... 48

40 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance Low Air Alarm NOTE Call toll-free to talk to someone at the The instrument cluster gauges may 2 PACCAR Customer Center. appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring attention to a particular system.

1. Slow down carefully. 2. Move a safe distance off the road and stop. If this alarm turns on while parked or 3. Place the transmission in neutral 1-800-4Peterbilt (800-473-8372) driving, be sure to perform these tasks: The Customer Call Center is open (park with automatic transmissions, 24/7-365 days a year and staffed with if equipped) and set the parking trained personnel (English and other WARNING brake. languages if necessary), free of charge, to 4. Turn OFF the engine. provide total roadside assistance. Their If the air pressure falls below 60 psi 5. Turn ON the emergency flasher custom mapping system can locate the (414 kPa) the spring brakes may stop and use other warning devices to nearest Authorized dealers and the vehicle abruptly, which could alert other motorists. Independent Service Providers (ISPs) cause an accident resulting in person- If the light and alarm do not turn off at start- based on the vehicle's location. In addition, al injury or death. Observe the gauges. up, DO NOT try to drive the vehicle until the customer center can dispatch services If the warning alert comes on, do not the problem is found and fixed. for jump and pull starts, tires, trailers, fines continue to drive the vehicle until it has and permits, chains, towing, hazardous been properly repaired or serviced. clean-up, out of fuel (roadside), mechanical repairs, and preventive maintenance services. If they can’t answer a specific question, they will direct you to a representative who can.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 41 EMERGENCY - Stop Engine Light

2. Move a safe distance off the road Stop Engine Light Low Oil Pressure and stop. 3. Place the transmission in neutral (park with automatic transmissions, 2 if equipped) and set the parking brake. 4. Turn OFF the engine. CAUTION 5. Turn ON the emergency flasher and use other warning devices to Continuing to operate your vehicle with alert other motorists. insufficient oil pressure will cause seri- ous engine damage. Failure to comply 6. Wait a few minutes to allow oil to This warning light illuminates when the may result in equipment or property drain into the engine oil pan, and engine has a serious problem. This is an damage. then check the oil level. emergency and the vehicle should be 7. Add oil if necessary. If the problem safely stopped at the soonest opportunity. It is important to maintain oil pressure persists, contact an authorized within acceptable limits. If oil pressure dealer as soon as possible. drops below the minimum psi (kPa) the oil WARNING pressure gauge will illuminate and change color. Additionally, the Stop Engine Lamp This should be considered an emer- will turn red. Engine is Overheating gency. You should stop the vehicle as safely as possible and turn OFF the ig- nition. The vehicle must be serviced NOTE and the problem corrected before driv- ing again. Failure to do so may cause The instrument cluster gauges may severe engine or Diesel Particulate Fil- appear, if hidden from view, change ter damage, or cause an accident brightness and change color to bring which may result in death or personal attention to a particular system. injury. 1. Slow down carefully.

42 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - Engine is Overheating

engine may be overheating, DO NOT idling without an alert driver present. If TURN OFF THE ENGINE unless a low the engine does overheat, as indicated CAUTION water warning device indicates a loss of by the engine coolant temperature coolant. lamp, immediate action is required to The cooling system may overheat if Follow these steps if the engine coolant correct the condition. Continued unat- 2 the engine coolant is at the minimum temperature is rising, or the temperature is tended operation of the engine, even level. A sudden loss of coolant, already above normal, and there are no for a short time, may result in serious caused by a split hose or broken hose other warning alarms displayed in the engine damage or a fire. Failure to clamp could also lead to an overheat instrument cluster. comply may result in death, personal condition. Always inspect to ensure injury, equipment or property damage. hoses and clamps are not cracked, worn, or loose. Failure to comply may NOTE result in equipment or property dam- age. The instrument cluster gauges may appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring NOTE attention to a particular system.

The system may also temporarily over- 1. Reduce engine speed, or stop. heat during severe operating condi- When stopped, place the tions such as: transmission in neutral (N) and set • Climbing a hill on a hot day the parking brake. Keep the engine running. • Stopping after high-speed/high- load driving • Debris blocking air flow through WARNING the cooling module (radiator) To reduce the chance of personal in- If the engine coolant temperature warning jury, vehicle damage, and/or death lamp comes on and the audible alarm from overheated engines, which can sounds showing an overheat condition, or result in a fire, never leave the engine if you have any other reason to suspect the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 43 EMERGENCY - How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse

3. Make sure the engine fan is turning WARNING by switching the Engine Fan Switch from AUTO to MAN How to Inspect and Removing the fill cap on a hot engine (Manual). Replace a Fuse 2 can cause scalding coolant to spray 4. Idle the engine to see if this out and burn you badly. If the engine reduces the coolant temperature. If Turn the ignition off and turn all lights off. has been in operation within the previ- the temperature does not begin to Locate the fuses in either the cab, sleeper, ous 30 minutes, be very careful in re- drop, shut off the engine and or main power fuse box. moving the fill cap. Protect face, contact your nearest authorized All the electrical circuits have fuses to hands, and arms against escaping flu- dealer. protect them from a short circuit or overload. If something electrical on your id and steam by covering the cap with 5. If the temperature begins to return chassis stops working, the first thing you a large, thick rag. DO NOT try to re- to normal, allow the engine to idle 3 should check for is a blown fuse. move it until the surge tank cools down to 5 minutes before shutting it off. or if you see any steam or coolant es- This allows the engine to cool caping. Always remove the cap very gradually and uniformly. WARNING slowly and carefully. Be ready to back 6. If overheating came from severe off if any steam or coolant begins to operating conditions, the DO NOT replace a fuse with a fuse of escape. Failure to comply may result temperature should have cooled by a higher rating. Doing so may damage in death, personal injury, equipment or this time. If it has not, stop the the electrical system and cause a fire. property damage. engine and let it cool before Failure to comply may result in death, checking to see if the coolant is personal injury, equipment or property low. damage. NOTE 7. Be sure the vehicle is parked on Keep the engine running at idle speed level ground or the readings may unless a warning icon turns on that re- be incorrect. Check the coolant CAUTION quires the engine to be shut off. level at the coolant surge tank. Check the coolant level after each trip Never patch fuses with aluminum foil 2. Check to ensure the Oil Pressure when the engine has cooled. The coolant or wire. This may cause serious dam- Gauge reads normal. level should be visible within the surge age elsewhere in the electrical circuit, tank. Add coolant if necessary. and it may cause a fire.

44 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Inspect and Replace a Fuse

inspected by an authorized dealer. CAUTION CAUTION When replacing a failed polyswitch If a circuit keeps blowing fuses, have Blown Fuse (circuit breaker), always use an ap- 2 the electrical system inspected for a proved polyswitch (circuit breaker) with short circuit or overload by an author- a current rating equal to or less than ized dealer as soon as possible. Fail- the polyswitch (circuit breaker) being ure to do so could cause serious dam- replaced. Only use the approved Type age to the electrical system and/or ve- II modified reset polyswitch (circuit hicle. breaker). NEVER use a Type I (auto- matic reset) or Type III (manual reset) polyswitch (circuit breaker). A fuse CAUTION with a current rating equal to or less than the polyswitch (circuit breaker) Before replacing a fuse, turn OFF all being replaced can also be used. lights and accessories and remove the ignition key to avoid damaging the electrical system. 1. Separation (Blown) CAUTION

1. Turn off all lights and accessories Always close and latch the engine and remove the ignition key to 3. If it is blown, replace it with a fuse of the same rating. If a fuse of the compartment fuse box cover. A latch- avoid damaging the electrical ed cover ensures a water tight seal system. same rating is not available, a fuse of a lower rating may be which can prevent damage to electri- 2. Determine from the chart on the temporarily substituted. You can cal components. fuse panel which fuse controls that also use a fuse from a circuit you component. can do temporarily without (for • If the circuit has a fuse, remove example an accessory circuit or that fuse and see if it is blown. radio). • If the circuit has a polyswitch, have your electrical system

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 45 EMERGENCY - Where are the Fuses Located?

Where are the Fuses WARNING WARNING Located? 2 Never jump start a battery near fire, Heed all warnings and instructions of Fuses for the cab are located in the fuse flames, or electrical sparks. Batteries the jumper cable manufacturer. Failure panel behind the drivers side kick panel. generate explosive gases that could to comply may result in death, person- Main power relays are located on the explode. Keep sparks, flame, and al injury, equipment or property dam- power distribution center, in the engine lighted cigarettes away from batteries. age. compartment, mounted to the front wall of Failure to comply may result in death, the cab. personal injury, equipment or property Fuses for the optional sleeper are located damage. CAUTION on a separate fuse box accessible through the luggage compartment door. Applying a higher voltage booster bat- WARNING tery will cause expensive damage to sensitive electronic components, such When jump starting using a battery as relays, and the radio. Failure to How to Jump Start a charger/booster, verify that the battery comply may result in equipment dam- Battery charger/booster is set to the same jump age. start voltage and amperage specifica- tions as the vehicle electrical system WARNING and batteries (i.e., if the vehicle electri- CAUTION cal system is a 12 volt system, the jump Batteries contain acid that can burn start voltage on the battery charger/ Improper hook-up of jumper cables or and gases that can explode. Ignoring booster shall be set at no higher than a not following these procedures can safety procedures may result in death, 12 volt setting). Failure to comply may damage the alternator or cause seri- personal injury, equipment or property cause an explosion and/or fire resulting ous damage to both vehicles. damage. in death, personal injury, and/or equip- ment or property damage.

46 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Jump Start a Battery

8. Attach one end of a jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the NOTE CAUTION discharged (dead) battery. This will have a large red + or P on the Always connect positive (+) to positive Vehicles equipped with an Engine battery case, post, or clamp. (+) and negative (-) to negative (-). 2 Start Module (ESM) should not be jumped using the ESM Starter terminal 12. If either vehicle is equipped with (S+). Failure to comply may result in NOTE battery disconnects, ensure that arcing or battery damage. they are in the ON position. If your vehicle is equipped with an En- 13. Start the vehicle that has the good 1. Remove any jewelry that may gine Start Module (ESM), attach the battery first. come in contact with the battery positive (+) cable to the vehicle battery • Let it run for 5 minutes, or terminals. and not the ESM Starter terminal (S+). • If charging a system containing 2. Select a jumper cable that is long See the Maxwell Installation Guide an Engine Start Module (ESM), enough to attach to both vehicles in and User Manual for additional infor- let it run for 15 minutes. Briefly a way that ensures neither vehicle mation about LED status conditions, pressing the Push-to-Test touches each other. maintenance, and troubleshooting. button on the ESM will indicate 3. Position the two vehicles together, 9. Attach the other end of the same the ESM's charge state. When but do not allow them to touch. cable to the positive (+) terminal of the status LED presents a solid 4. Turn OFF all lights, heater, radio, the good (booster) battery. green light the ESM is and any other accessory on both 10. Attach the remaining jumper cable sufficiently charged. vehicles. FIRST to the negative (-) terminal 14. Start the vehicle that has the 5. Set the parking brake. (black or N) of the good battery. discharged (dead) battery. 6. Shift the transmission into park 11. Attach the other end of the The engine should start. If the engine fails position or neutral for manual negative cable to the negative (-) to start, do not continue to crank the transmissions. terminal of the dead battery. starter. Instead, contact the nearest 7. If either vehicle is equipped with authorized dealer. battery disconnects ensure they are in the OFF position prior to connecting the two vehicles.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 47 EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

the axle shafts in the axles will cause WARNING damage to the axle gears. WARNING 2 When disconnecting jumper cables, Before towing a vehicle, test your air make sure they do not get caught in CAUTION brakes to ensure that you have proper- any moving parts in the engine com- ly connected and inspected the recov- partment. Failure to comply may result If your vehicle has a Meritor axle with ery vehicle’s brake system. Failure to in death, personal injury, equipment or a driver-controlled main differential do so could lead to a loss of vehicle property damage. lock, install the caging bolt before re- control which may result in an accident moving the axles for towing, see How involving death or personal injury. Reverse the above procedure exactly to Manually Lock a Differential. Instal- when removing the jumper cables. With ling the caging bolt prevents damage All lubricating and clutch application oil engine running, disconnect jumper cables by locking internal axle components in pressure is provided by an engine-driven from both vehicles in the exact reverse position. pump, which will not work when the engine order, making sure to first remove the is stopped. You could seriously damage negative cable from the vehicle with the your vehicle by towing it with the driveline discharged battery. CAUTION connected and the drive wheels on the ground. Worse, when vehicles are towed, Connect recovery rigging only to hitch- either by wrecker or piggyback, the How to Recover a Vehicle es intended for that purpose. DO NOT lubricant in the top front of the drive axle attach to bumpers or brackets. Use will drain to the rear. This will leave the top only equipment designed for this pur- components dry. The resulting friction may damage them. Always remove the main CAUTION pose. Failure to comply may result in equipment damage. drive axle shafts before towing your vehicle. Remove the drive axle shafts or lift the driving wheels off the ground before 1. Review and understand all the towing the vehicle. Towing the vehicle cautions and warnings of this with either the wheels on the ground or section. 2. Disconnect the drive axle shafts and cover the open hubs. This is

48 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

necessary because if the See How to Manually Lock a Differential on Manually Release the Parking transmission is driven by the page 53 Brake driveshaft (rear wheels on the 6. Follow state/provincial and local There may be times when there is not ground), no lubricant will reach the laws that apply to vehicles in tow. enough air pressure, or the engine's air gears and bearings, causing 7. Do not tow vehicles at speeds in compressor is not able to produce enough 2 damage to the transmission. . excess of 55 mph (90 km/h). pressure, to release the parking brakes. In See How to Prepare the Axles for Towing For additional information concerning such cases, the parking brakes (or Spring on page 52 heavy duty truck recovery, refer to the Brakes) can be manually released. 3. Connect the towing chain or cable following Technology & Maintenance using best recovery practices . Council (TMC) literature. WARNING See Best Practices for Recovery Rigging • Recommended Practice #602–A — “Front Towing Devices For Trucks on page 55 DO NOT drive vehicle with malfunc- and Tractors” 4. Make sure the recovered vehicle's tioning brakes. If one of the brake cir- parking brakes are released. . • Recommended Practice #602–B — cuits becomes inoperative, braking “Recovery Attachment Points For See Manually Release the Parking Brake distances will increase substantially Trucks, Tractors, and Combination on page 49 and handling characteristics while Vehicles" 5. If you desire to use the recovered braking will be affected. You could lose • Recommended Practice #626 — vehicle’s brakes, ensure that the control of your vehicle or cause an ac- “Heavy Duty Truck Towing vehicle’s air system is connected to cident. Have it towed to the nearest Procedures” that of the recovery vehicle. Ensure dealer or qualified repair facility for re- that any air line that has been Copies of these can be obtained from the pair. Failure to comply may result in removed from a driver-controlled following address: Technology & property damage, personal injury, or main differential lock is firmly Maintenance Council 950 N. Glebe Road death. capped to prevent loss of air (703) 838-1763 Arlington, VA 22203 Email: pressure from the recovery vehicle [email protected] Website: http:// if it is supplying air pressure. If you tmc.truckline.com don’t desire to use the recovered vehicle’s brakes, ensure that you cage the spring brakes before attempting to move the vehicle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 49 EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

chains, or other safe means to prevent WARNING rolling before manually releasing the spring brakes. 2 DO NOT operate a vehicle when the spring brakes have been manually re- To move a vehicle immobilized by the leased. Driving a vehicle after its spring brakes due to loss of air pressure in spring brakes are manually released is the brake system, perform the following extremely dangerous. The brakes may procedure: 3. Slide out the release stud. not function. Failure to comply may re- 1. Remove the cap from the spring sult in death, personal injury, equip- chamber ment or property damage.

WARNING

DO NOT disassemble a spring brake chamber. These chambers contain a 4. Insert the release stud through the powerful spring that is compressed. opening in the spring chamber Sudden release of this spring may re- where the cap was removed. Insert sult in death or personal injury. it into the pressure plate. Turn the release stud 1/4 turn clockwise in the pressure plate. This secures WARNING the cross pin into the cross pin area of the pressure plate and Releasing the spring brakes on an un- locks it into the manual release 2. Remove the release stud assembly secured vehicle could lead to an acci- position. from the side pocket, and remove dent. The vehicle could roll, which may the release nut and washer from result in death, personal injury, equip- the release stud. ment or property damage. Always se- cure the vehicle with wheel chocks,

50 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

torque the release stud assembly. designed to be used as towing devices for (S-Cam-type maximum: 50 lb-ft (68 long distance. N·m), Wedge-type maximum: 30 Specially designed hitches are required to lb-ft (41 N·m)). The spring brake is recover your vehicle. The recovery hitches now mechanically released. attach to the frame. Two hitch assemblies, 2 made up of the following parts, are recommended for the proper recovery of your vehicle: 5. Assemble the release stud washer and nut on the release stud.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the Recovery Hitch proper recovery hitch assembly, contact an 6. With a wrench, turn the release A removable recovery hitch is a device that authorized dealer to obtain the proper stud assembly nut until the attaches to the sockets in the front bumper equipment. compression spring is 90-95 in the event that the vehicle needs to be percent caged. While doing this, recovered. These hitches are designed for check to make sure the push rod short distance and intermittent duty to help (adapter push rod or service push pull a vehicle. These hitches are not rod) is retracting. DO NOT over-

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 51 EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

How to use a Recovery Hitch 2. With lock pins removed, insert the hitches through the bumper and WARNING into the square hitch socket. CAUTION 3. Align the hole in the tow hitch with DO NOT use parts from other trucks or 2 the square hitch socket hole. materials from other sources to repair Recovery pull maximums assume the 4. Insert the lock pin into the square a hitch or to replace a missing hitch. tow rigging evenly distributes the load The parts provided for recovery are hitch socket hole and through the between both recovery hitches. See hole in the tow hitch until the lock made of high strength materials and examples in Recovery Rigging for de- are specifically designed for vehicle re- tab is within the square hitch tails. Serious damage to the vehicle socket. covery. Failure to use the correct fac- may occur if rigging is not connected 5. Rotate the lock pin 90 degrees to tory equipment may result in an acci- properly. dent involving death or personal injury. secure the pin in place. 6. Ensure that the tow pin and lock CAUTION clip are installed before using the CAUTION hitch. When recovering ditched or bogged 7. Remove the hitches and store all Connect recovery rigging only to hitch- vehicles, stay well below Maximum parts after recovering the vehicle. es intended for that purpose. DO NOT Capacities. Even at loads below maxi- attach to bumpers or brackets. Use mum, the physical strain of recovering How to Prepare the Axles for only equipment designed for this pur- a vehicle could damage axles, suspen- Towing pose. Failure to comply may result in sions, fifth wheels, etc. equipment damage. If the vehicle is going to be towed from the Use the following procedure to install the front axle and using the rear axle for Vehicle Recovery Hitches. See Recovery support, then the axle shafts should be Hitch Assembly illustration for part prepared [removed] so that minimal identification. damage is made to the differential during the towing process. 1. Check the square sockets behind Ensure that the recovered vehicle does not lower bumper for obstructions, have an open air line. An open air line on clear if necessary. the recovered vehicle will cause a leak in the air system of the recovery vehicle if

52 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

both vehicles’ brake systems are 1. Lift driving wheels off the ground or connected. This could cause a loss of remove the driveline and axle CAUTION system air, which can cause the service shafts before towing the vehicle. brakes not to function, resulting in the Water, dirt, and other material can en- sudden application of the spring brakes ter an open hub or axle. This can con- 2 causing wheel lock-up, loss of control, or CAUTION taminate the axle fluid and cause pos- overtake by following vehicles. sible damage to components. Ensure Failure to lift the driving wheels off the that the hubs are covered with plastic ground or remove the driveline and WARNING whenever a drive axle shaft is re- axle shafts before towing the vehicle moved. could seriously damage your vehicle. An open air line on the recovered vehi- All lubricating and clutch application oil cle will cause a leak in the air system pressure is provided by an engine- How to Manually Lock a Differential of the recovery vehicle if both vehicles’ driven pump, which does not work Follow these procedures if the vehicle has brake systems are connected. This when the engine is stopped. When ve- a driver controlled differential lock. could cause a loss of system air, which hicles are towed either by wrecker or Always lock the differential when the axles can cause the service brakes not to piggyback, lubricant in the top front of are being removed to aid in re-installation. function, resulting in the sudden appli- the drive axle will drain to the rear. This procedure should be done before the cation of the spring brakes causing This will leave the top components dry, axle shafts are removed. wheel lock-up, loss of control, or over- resulting in friction that will seriously take by following vehicles. You could damage these components. be in an accident involving personal in- CAUTION jury or death. Ensure that any air line 2. If the vehicle has driver controlled that has been removed from a driver- differential lock, then manually lock the differential. Failure to install the caging bolt when controlled main differential lock is firm- towing vehicles with driver-control 3. Remove drive axle shafts. ly capped to prevent loss of air pres- main differential lock can result in 4. Cover the open ends of the hubs to sure from the recovery vehicle if it is damage by failing to lock internal com- prevent dirt and debris from supplying air pressure. ponents in position. entering the axle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 53 EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

• If you desire to use the recovered 4. When fully engaged, a 0.25-0.5 in. vehicle’s brakes, ensure that the (6.35-12.7 mm) space will remain WARNING vehicle's air system is connected to between the air cylinder and the that of the recovery vehicle. Also bolt head. This action will lock the 2 An open air line on the recovered vehi- ensure that any air line that has differential by pushing a piston into cle will cause a leak in the air system been removed from a driver- a “lock” position. of the recovery vehicle if both vehicles’ controlled main differential lock is brake systems are connected. This firmly capped to prevent loss of air Recovery Hitch Capacities could cause a loss of system air, which pressure from the recovery vehicle. can cause the service brakes not to The maximum rated loads for vehicle • If you don’t want to use the function, resulting in the sudden appli- recovery varies depending on the direction recovered vehicle’s brakes, ensure cation of the spring brakes causing or angle of pull. These capacities are listed that you cage the spring brakes wheel lock-up, loss of control, or over- in the table below and are for the two before attempting to move the take by following vehicles. You could hitches working together, simultaneously. vehicle. be in an accident involving personal in- jury or death. Ensure that any air line Direction of Pull Maximum that has been removed from a driver- Capacity lbs. controlled main differential lock is firm- (kg) ly capped to prevent loss of air pres- sure from the recovery vehicle if it is Directly forward 80,000 (36,000) supplying air pressure. Directly vertical or 14,600 (6,600) horizontally to the CAUTION side 45 degrees in any 20,000 (9,000) A recovered vehicle will have no op- 1. Remove the air line and firmly cap direction erational brake system. Additionally, the air line from the vehicle. (2) the rear axle spring brakes will proba- 2. Remove the caging bolt from its bly be applied. storage hole. (1) 3. Screw the caging bolt into the air line hole. (2)

54 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

Best Practices for Recovery Recovery Rigging Options Returning to Service After Rigging Recovering Once the vehicle is recovered, the axles need to have oil added to prevent gear CAUTION damage during operation. 2 Recovery pull maximums assume the 1. Into the pinion cage, add 1 pint (.47 tow rigging evenly distributes the load liter) of lubricant or into the between both recovery hitches. See interaxle differential, add 2 pints examples in Recovery Rigging for de- (.94 liter) of approved lubricant. tails. Serious damage to the vehicle 2. After adding the specified type and may occur if rigging is not connected amount of lubricant, drive the properly. vehicle. It should be unloaded. Drive 1 to 2 miles (1.5 to 3 km) at a Use a double chain or cable setup that speed lower than 25 mph (40 CAUTION distributes the load equally to both hitches km/h). This will thoroughly circulate (see either example in Recovery Rigging the lubricant through the assembly. Options illustration): When recovering ditched or bogged 3. If the parking brakes were vehicles, stay well below Maximum • Never loop a single chain or cable manually released, they will need Capacities. Even at loads below maxi- through both hitches, also known to be modified back to their normal mum, the physical strain of recovering as reeving (not shown). operating condition. a vehicle could damage axles, suspen- • Use a spreader or equalizer bar to 4. If the differential lock was manually sions, fifth wheels, etc. distribute the load on both hitches locked, then the caging bolt needs (1), or to be put back in its storage • If no spreader bar is available, location and the differential lock air connect the main tow chain or line needs to be re-installed in its cable no closer than 6 ft. (1.8 m) normal position. from the vehicle: (2) to (3). Add lubricant back to the axles after • Secure the towed vehicle using two recovering the vehicle and before putting it additional chains or cables (see back into service. Safety Chains) (not shown).

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 55 EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

What to do if the Vehicle is Stuck in • For best traction and safety, avoid spinning the wheels Failure to comply may result in equip- Sand, Mud, Snow or Ice ment damage. Follow these practices to avoid transmission damage: WARNING 2 • Always start vehicle in motion with the shift lever in first gear. Towing the Vehicle DO NOT spin the wheels faster than • Be sure that transmission is fully A dealer or commercial towing service will 35 mph (55 km/h). Spinning a tire at have the necessary equipment to safely speedometer readings faster than 35 engaged in gear before releasing the clutch pedal (manual only). tow the vehicle and should be able to make mph (55 km/h) can be dangerous. arrangements to limit any damage to the • Do not shift into reverse while the Tires can explode from spinning too vehicle. The towing service and the dealer vehicle is moving. fast. Under some conditions, a tire should be aware of towing regulations and • If the vehicle needs to be may be spinning at a speed twice that safety precautions. recovered from being stuck, do not shown on the speedometer. Any re- The towing service will ensure that the permit the vehicle to be towed for sulting tire explosion could cause in- following precautions are taken: jury or death to a bystander or passen- long distances without removing • Use of a safety chain system ger, as well as extensive vehicle dam- the driveshaft. • Abide by all local towing age: including tire, transmission, If tire chains are needed, make sure they regulations and/or rear axle malfunction. are installed on both sides of the driving axle. Installing chains on only one side of • Ensure that the towing device does These suggestions are provided to improve the axle can cause equipment damage. not contact any surfaces that could the ability to free a vehicle if the vehicle be damaged while in transit gets stuck in sand, mud, snow, or ice: • If towing from the front, ensure that • Move the gearshift lever or selector CAUTION the rear axles are prepared for from First to Reverse towing Chains on the tires of only one tandem • Apply light pressure on the • If towing from the rear, ensure that axle can damage the driveline U-joints accelerator pedal while the all body components such as roof, and the inter-axle differential. Repairs transmission is in gear side, and chassis fairings are could be costly and time-consuming. • Remove your foot from the secured properly to avoid damage accelerator while shifting while in transit • Do not race the engine

56 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) EMERGENCY - How to Recover a Vehicle

WARNING Secure the roof, side, and chassis fair- 2 ings while towing from the rear. An un- secured fairing may come off of the vehicle during transit. Failure to secure the fairings while towing may cause an injurious accident resulting in death or personal injury.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 57 CONTROLS -

Chapter 3 | CONTROLS

Instrument Cluster...... 60 3 Peterbilt Digital Display Controls...... 62 Peterbilt Digital Display...... 63 Selecting a View...... 66 Configure Settings...... 72 Drive Summary...... 77 Driver Rewards (option)...... 77 Driver Performance Assistant (option)...... 78 Bulb Check...... 79 Guide to the Warning Symbols...... 81 Optional Gauges...... 92 Dash Switches...... 93 Ignition Key Switch...... 107 Exterior Lighting Self-Test...... 107 Steering Column Controls...... 108 Steering Wheel Controls...... 112

58 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS -

Door Mounted Mirror Controls...... 113 Heating and Air Conditioning...... 114 Sleeper Alarm Clock...... 123 Cab Accessories...... 124 3

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 59 CONTROLS - Instrument Cluster

see the paragraphs that follow. Please common features and controls available. remember that each vehicle is custom- You can pick out the parts that apply to you Instrument Cluster made. Your instrument panel may not look and read them to be fully informed on how For information on using the dash and exactly like the one in the pictures that your particular vehicle operates. instrument cluster options while driving, follow. We have tried to describe the most

1. Peterbilt Digital 3 Display 2. Compact Trailer Valve 3. Navigation/ Infotainment (or Optional Gauges) 4. Switches 5. Glovebox 6. Parking Brakes 7. Cupholders 8. Air Conditioning 9. Radio

60 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Instrument Cluster

1. Additional Switches 2. Ignition Switch

3

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 61 CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display Controls

View, navigate and select items in the Menu, and view Popup messages. The Peterbilt Digital Display shortcut button will access items that are Controls configured in the settings, Shortcuts on page 76. 1 2 3 Scroll Wheel Use the Scroll Wheel to navigate through menus and press down to select menu options, change settings when in the menu, and switch between Views.

3

1. Scroll Wheel 2. Shortcut 3. Back/Cancel The controls located on the right pod of the steering wheel are used to select Drive

62 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

For example, press down and then scroll to Use the Scroll Wheel to scroll through the the following actions will wake the display, access the clock menu. Then press down values then press down to select. making it visible: and scroll again to adjust the clock values. Menu Example Set Function • Opening (or keeping open) the cab Press down to select the menu: doors Menu Example: main Menu • Using steering wheel switches • Tapping the brake • Turning the ignition switch to ON, 3 ACC, or START • Starting the engine. If after 20 seconds none of these actions are taken, the display will darken to conserve power, but will awaken if any wake action is performed. If the Anti-Theft option is active and you attempt to start the Back engine, a passcode prompt will appear; the Press again to select the sub-menu: engine cannot be started until the correct Use the Back button to return to the Menu Example: Settings passcode is entered (see Anti-Theft on previous menu, suppress a popup , or page 76). cancel a selection. Popups on page 81.

Peterbilt Digital Display

The digital display will stay visible during all driving situations and in some parked situations. When the parking brake is set

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 63 CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

Display Indications Always Shown 1. Active Warnings 2. Outside Air 12 13 1 2 3 Temperature 11 3. Diesel Particulate Filter Indicator 3 4. View Indicator 5. Transmission Mode 6. Sub-Trip 7. Trip 8. Driver Profile 9. Odometer 4 10. Engine Hours 11. Battery 5 12. Aux Battery Indicator

10 9 8 7 6 13. Clock

The numbers may change without user outside temperate approaches freezing Active Warnings interaction if individual warnings are (36°F or 2°C) an icon will appear next to intermittent, time based, self correcting, or the temperature (snowflake for freezing Red or amber popups are counted and the the situation is rectified. and thermometer for high) and a chime will total is displayed by the active warning sound. The system's unit of measure indicator. In addition, these counts are also Outside Air Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius) can be changed by presented in navigating to the settings menu. The Outside Air Temperature monitors the • Systems Check outside air temperature display uses a ambient temperature outside the truck • The Notifications Sub-menu sensor (located at the bottom of the The display will alert the driver to high and • A Drive Summary driver's side mirror assembly) to measure low temperature conditions. When the outside air temperature only. It is not

64 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Peterbilt Digital Display

capable of displaying the temperature of Sub-trip Odometer Left Switch Pod the road surface on either the temperature The Trip Odometer can be split into smaller display or the snowflake icon. Additionally, segments called Sub-trips. Start a Sub-trip the outside air temperature reading may be by pressing Trip on the steering wheel. affected by exposure to direct sunlight. The maximum distance that the sub-trip will show is 9,999.9 at which point it will 4 5 1 2 View Indicator start over at zero. When it maxes out, the 3 The View Indicator identifies which view is current sub-trip ends and begins a new currently selected: one. Sub-trip information is also found in • Favorites (if enabled) the settings menu Trip Summary on page 72. • Minimized • Minimized with Advance Driving Assistance (Optional) Trip Odometer • Basic The Trip Odometer shows how far the vehicle has gone traveled since last it was • Enhanced reset. The maximum distance that can be shown on the Trip Odometer is 99,999.9 at Drive, Neutral, and Reverse which point the operator needs to reset. Indicator Press Trip to set. Press and hold Trip to The Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator reset (Item 1 in following image). reflects the shifter position of an Automatic Transmission. Manual transmissions and 3 certain automatic transmission do not provide feedback to the display. Instead, 1. Trip marker the transmission shifter indicates the gear 2. Limiter control condition. 3. Cruise control ON/OFF 4. Cruise control set/resume 5. Toggle switch

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 65 CONTROLS - Selecting a View

The operator may also use the trip charge. The battery icon will be replaced • Favorites summary to view the same information Trip with the Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) • Minimized Summary on page 72. icon when Low Voltage Disconnect is • (Optional) Minimized with active. The battery icon is gray when Advanced Driver Assistant operating normally, but changes to amber Driver Profile Indicator • Basic View to indicate a low voltage condition and red The number following the icon indicates to indicate a high or very low voltage • Enhanced View which driver is active when Driver Profiles 3 condition. Each view is identified by a specific view are enabled. For information on Driver indicator on the right side of the display Profiles, Choosing the Active Driver Profile area. on page 74. Clock The clock can be displayed in a 12-hour or Minimized View Odometer 24-hour format. Clock settings can be altered in the Settings Sub-menu. A combination speedometer and The odometer displays the total distance tachometer will show in the center of the your vehicle has traveled. The maximum Minimized View. distance that can be shown on the Transmission Gear Display odometer is 9,999,999.9. The odometer Vehicles with PACCAR or Eaton Speedometer and Tachometer will roll over to zero if maximum mileage is automated transmissions will show the Vehicle and engine speed are presented at achieved. transmission mode, current gear, and the center of the display. Units for vehicle diagnostic information associated with the speed can be changed to either Standard Engine Hours transmission. Vehicles with manual or Metric in the Digital Display menu (see transmissions will show the current gear. Engine hours will display the total number Units and Language on page 72) or by This display does not apply for vehicles of hours the engine has been operated. using the steering wheel Shortcut button with Allison transmissions. The maximum hours that can be shown (see )(see Peterbilt Digital Display Controls are 99,999.9 before the counter rolls over on page 62). to zero. Selecting a View Minimized View with Driver Battery Voltage Assistance (Option) The instrument cluster has 5 views for the The Battery Voltage indicator shows the operator to use. battery icon, voltage, and the state of

66 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Minimized with Driver Assistance (Option) 1. Optimal RPM Indicator 2 1 2 2. Smart Tach® 3. Engine Speed 4. Transmission Gear 5. Driver Assistance 3 area 12.5V 86% 10:45 P 1 1 30ºF 100% AUX DPF 6. View Indicator

3

10 15 RPM 5 64 20 6 0 M PH 25

SPEED LIM IT 65 18 D N

PTO 348.5 9,999,999.9 MI 1 Trip M I B 9,999.9 M I

5 4

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 67 CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Adaptive Cruise Control This indication at vehicle start means it is prevent a forward collision when advancing Notification (option) equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 kph). (ACC) and Collision Mitigation. These Please review the ACC section of this features work together to improve driver manual, and the manufacturer’s manual, safety and enhance the driving experience. prior to driving this vehicle. When Cruise Control is active, ACC will accelerate and slow the truck to maintain a Basic View and Enhanced View 3 chosen distance from a detected forward vehicle. Collision Mitigation will attempt to

68 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Selecting a View

Enhanced View 1. Gauges for Basic View and Enhanced 2 1 1 2 View 2. Gauges for Enhanced View only 3

3

Basic View Enhanced View This view combines the instrumentation This view includes all the gauges present presented in Minimized View with gauges in the Basic View, adding gauges on the such as Fuel and DEF level. left and right in the display. Enhanced View

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 69 CONTROLS - Selecting a View

is designated by the bottom icon in the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) View Indicator. The diesel exhaust fluid gauge shows the approximate amount of DEF fluid in the NOTE Gauges DEF tank. The instrument cluster gauges may DEF Level Gauge appear, if hidden from view, change brightness and change color to bring 3 1 attention to a particular system.

DEF 2 F Fuel Level 8.2 MPG Fuel Level Gauge E 1 2

2 Gauge locations may be customizable and the gauge can react depending on the CAUTION readout indicated. (Favorites on page 75) 1 DEF Some gauges are a flat bar rather than a Use Diesel Exhaust Fluid only. Failure F 8.2 MPG typical dial gauge. to do so may damage components of E the Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF). 1 2 The Fuel gauge(s) indicate the fuel level. NOTE Besides empty and full, the gauge also indicates 1/4, 1/2, and 3/4 of total capacity. WARNING The instrument cluster gauges may DEF fluid is required to meet certain appear, if hidden from view, change emission requirements. A warning icon and DO NOT carry additional fuel contain- brightness and change color to bring popup message will appear when the DEF attention to a particular system. ers in your vehicle. Fuel containers, ei- level is low. Do not allow your DEF tank to ther full or empty, may leak, explode, remain empty. Please refer to your and cause or feed a fire. Failure to emission supplemental manual for more comply may result in death or personal details about DEF fluid. injury.

70 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Selecting a View

WARNING NOTE NOTE

Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- For Export vehicles, the fuel gauges The instrument cluster gauges may tion source could cause an explosion. will not state: ULTRA LOW SULFUR appear, if hidden from view, change A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with DIESEL FUEL ONLY. brightness and change color to bring diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- attention to a particular system. 3 sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap near an open flame. Use only the fuel NOTE and/or additives recommended for Favorites View (optional) your engine. Failure to comply may re- This vehicle may be manufactured Vehicles with Favorites View will allow the sult in death, personal injury, equip- with different fuel systems and differ- operator to customize the arrangement of ment or property damage. ent draw tube locations. Because of many of the gauges. Using the Favorites this and the amount of road crown, it is View requires the operator to Scroll to recommended that you do not operate select the Minimized View. Once the CAUTION your vehicle with less than one-quarter Minimized view is showing, Scroll up once of your truck's fuel capacity. Allowing more to the star icon the View Indicator. Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel the fuel level to go below one-quarter See Favorites on page 75 to customize (ULSD) Fuel, as recommended by en- of capacity could result in the lack of the Favorites view. gine manufacturers. If you need further fuel to keep the engine running. In ad- information on fuel specifications, con- dition, you will want to keep the fuel sult the Engine Operation and Mainte- tanks at least half-full to reduce con- nance Manual. densation of moisture in the tanks. This moisture can damage the engine.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 71 CONTROLS - Configure Settings

Notifications Automatic Time When enabled, trucks with (optional) Automatic Time will receive time Configure Settings Notifications display system messages zone appropriate data. related to the condition of your vehicle. It Menu Example: main Menu displays 24-Hour Choose between 12 or a 24 hour format. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System Time AM or PM (A or P) shall only be displayed (TPMS) (optional) in 12-hour time format. • Active messages 3 Set Time Set Time is available when Automatic Time • Systems Check isn't enabled. Set the clock to indicate your local time.

Trip Summary Presents a summary of details such as fuel Units and Language economy and distance of the trip, collected Units during the main trip and/or Sub-trips. Use this setting to change the units of The following Menus These details will be collected until the Trip measurement between Standard, Metric • Notifications is reset, or the max trip distance (99,999.9 (Bar), and Metric (PSI). Language • Trip Summary miles for main, 9,999.9 for Sub-Trips) is reached. Use this setting to change the language. • Settings • Truck Information Settings Features are accessible when Features allows the operator to enable 1. The Parking Brake is set Settings allows the operator to customize optional features on the vehicle to 1 2. All active popup messages are the Display. customize their experience. viewed and suppressed General 3. Press the Select button Predictive Cruise Overshoot Configure the Predictive Cruise Control These menus allow the operator to Time configure settings on the vehicle. Overshoot through this menu item. See This menu allows the operator to Predictive Cruise Control (Option) on page customize the clock.

1 If Anti-Theft is enabled, Settings will not be accessible until the correct Passcode is entered.

72 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Configure Settings

148 for more details about Overshoot and Shutdown Timer Predictive Cruise Control. generated can also cause transmis- sion wear. WARNING LVD Setup Change the LVD battery voltage set point Never idle your vehicle for prolonged CAUTION for LVD to turn on Low Voltage Disconnect periods of time if you sense that ex- (LVD) (option) on page 255. haust fumes are entering the cab. In- Do not stay in the vehicle with the en- 3 vestigate the cause of the fumes and gine running or idling for more than 10 Trailer Detection (Option) correct it as soon as possible. If the minutes with the vehicle's Heater and The trailer outputs on your vehicle will vehicle must be driven under these A/C ventilation system in RECIRC or detect a connected trailer when this feature conditions, drive only with the windows at LOW FAN SPEED. Even with the is enabled. The operator will be notified open. Failure to repair the source of ventilation system on, running the en- when a trailer connection is not detected. the exhaust fumes may result in death, gine while parked or stopped for pro- personal injury, equipment or property longed periods of time is not recom- Digital RPM (optional) damage. mended. Provides a digital numeric readout of the engine speed in the speedometer. CAUTION Windshield Wiper Interlock This activates the headlights when the DO NOT allow your engine to idle, at windshield wipers are turned on. low rpm (400-600 rpm), longer than five minutes. Long periods of idling af- Dark Cabin ter the engine has reached operating Dark Cabin prevents cab interior lights temperatures can decrease engine from turning on when a cab door is temperature and cause gummed pis- opened. ton rings, clogged injectors, and possi- ble engine damage from lack of lubri- cation. The normal torsional vibrations

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 73 CONTROLS - Configure Settings

shorter shutdown time, the Engine will fuel consumption and save you mon- shutdown at the shorter timer setting. CAUTION ey. Driver Profiles Prolonged periods of idling can result When active, the Shutdown Timer will keep This feature saves customizations made as in lower than optimal engine/transmis- the engine running for a period of time after a Driver Profile. Turning Driver Profiles ON sion operating temperatures which the ignition switch is placed in the OFF for the first time will load current 3 could cause increased rates of wear. position. This allows the driver to exit the customizations into Driver Profile 1 and Do not allow the engine to operate cab while sustaining power to the cab make it the active profile. The profile can at idle for extended periods at tem- interior. Normally, this would require the be changed in this menu. peratures at or below 160F/71C. To key to remain in the ignition, potentially The active Driver Profile can also be help prevent this from occuring on leaving the cab unlocked and accessible. changed after setting the park brake and When the timer reaches zero, the engine PACCAR engines, an idle shutdown then pressing Back. 2 Changes to Driver stops, removing power from certain feature can be programmed to shut Profile will be auto-saved while making electrical loads. The timer counts down in the engine down after a period of low customizations. They will not be lost when the Drive Summary. idle operation with no driver activity. A turning the feature off. flashing warning lamp will inform the The Shutdown Timer is enabled or driver of an impending shutdown. Fail- disabled in the Display menu and can be ure to comply may result in equipment set for up to 30 minutes. This setting can NOTE or property damage. be changed in the Settings Sub-menu or while counting down, in the Drive The last used active profile, including Summary, using the Scroll and Select (See any changes to that profile, will remain NOTE How to Set the Shutdown Timer on page the profile until a new one is selected. 140). The Shutdown Timer setting may be If you are required to idle your vehicle limited to less than 30 minutes (See for long periods of time, install an aux- Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration). Choosing the Active Driver Profile iliary heater or automatic idle control. If your truck has the Engine Idle Shutdown Press Back when the parking brake is set These auxiliary devices can reduce Timer (EIST) option and it is set for a to change the active Driver Profile.

2 The ignition key may need to be cycled back to OFF and then ON to access the Driver Profiles Settings.

74 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Configure Settings

Favorites Edit Your Favorites (Center of Screen) holding a gauge, which may be To disable Favorites, contact your replaced) and target that position. authorized dealer. Vehicles with Favorites If a position is not valid, the display will View enabled allow the operator to create read "Not Available." a customized arrangement of all but centrally located gauges. To change the Edit Your Favorites (Left-side of image) Favorites configuration, stop the truck, set the parking brake and 3 • Access Favorites via the Settings Sub-menu. OR • Scroll to Favorites (represented by a star in the View Indicator) and press Select.

Adding a Gauge to Favorites The truck must have the Parking Brake set to add a gauge. You must be in the Edit Your Favorites menu to perform this procedure. Adding a gauge requires that the gauge is not already assigned a location in Favorites View. If you want to move a gauge already assigned, you must first If the gauge you want to position is already 4. Select to Add or Replace the remove that gauge Removing a Gauge present in the Favorites View (either as a gauge. from Favorites on page 76. single or compound gauge) it will not appear as a menu option. Navigate and Select "Save Configuration" 1. Scroll the list until you locate the when all gauges have been arranged. The desired gauge or compound 2. Select to choose the gauge you Display will read "Your favorites gauge. want to position. 3. Scroll through the valid locations configuration has been saved." Press (this can include positions currently Back to exit Editing Favorites.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 75 CONTROLS - Configure Settings

Removing a Gauge from Favorites • Dual Speedometer – Shows a How to Enter the Passcode The Parking Brake must be set and at least compound Speedometer with both The ignition key and the current Passcode one gauge must be in the Favorites View Standard and Metric Values. . are required. to remove a gauge. • Favorites – Selects the Favorites The default passcode is set to 0000 at the The Speedometer/Tachometer, Fuel, and View on the Display. factory. Please see an authorized dealer if Air pressure gauges located at the Display • Metric Units – Switches all a custom passcode is needed. With the center cannot be removed. If the gauge measured units used on the anti-theft feature turned off, the operator 3 you want to remove is part of a multiple Display between Standard and will not need a passcode to start the gauge group, the whole group must be Metric. engine. removed. 1. Using the Scroll , scroll to the first 1. Select "Remove Gauge." Anti-Theft number in the code then press 2. Scroll to highlight the gauge to be Anti-Theft prevents starting the engine and Select. removed and Select. accessing the settings sub-menu. If Anti- Anti-theft first digit Navigate andSelect "Save Configuration" if Theft does not show in the settings sub- this is the last change you want to make to menu, see your authorized dealer to install Favorites View. The Display will read "Your Anti-Theft. favorites configuration has been saved." If Anti-Theft is enabled, turning the ignition Press Back to exit Editing Favorites. switch to START prompts the operator to enter the passcode. Once the correct Shortcuts passcode is entered, you have five minutes Use the Shortcuts option to assign one of to start the engine or the passcode must the following features to the Shortcut be re-entered.3 button. To enable or disable Anti-Theft, change • Dark Cabin – Toggles Dark Cabin Anti-Theft (ON/OFF) in the settings sub- On/Off. menu and enter the current passcode. • Digital RPM – Provides a numeric read-out of RPM within the speedometer. The next digit will be selected.

3 The five minute timer can be postponed in one minute intervals using any steering wheel switch.

76 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Drive Summary

2. Scroll to the number you want for • Transmission • Three customer-selected reports this digit and press Select. • GHG Vehicle Speed Limits (i.e. Idle Time, Fuel Economy) The next digit will be selected. • Remote Station Interlocks The Drive Summary collects information 3. Continue this process until all four • Predictive Cruise Control option since the last time the engine was off for at digits have been chosen. least two hours. When insufficient • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) information has been collected, Drive Anti-theft last digit option Summary will show dashes for the • Power Take Off (PTO) option monitored component or report. Customer- 3 Information specific to these categories will selected reports can be changed at your be shown in the Truck Information Sub- local dealership. menu.

Driver Rewards (option) Drive Summary If enabled, Driver Rewards raises or lowers The Drive Summary presents information the vehicle’s max-allowable speed based about the most recent leg of travel and is on whether a programmed, fuel economy shown when the ignition key is turned to goal is met. This goal is defined by the “off.” The Drive Summary consists of customer and can be based on fuel • Critical and Non-critical Issues (see consumption, engine idle time, or both fuel The display will read "Turn Key to Start Systems Check) consumption and idle time. The driver is Engine." • Shut Down Timer (if active) (see assigned a score based on how Shut Down Timer) successfully they meet or exceed this goal. Truck Information • TPMS (option) (see Tire Pressure Driver Rewards is only available for vehicles equipped with a PACCAR MX Truck information stores specifications and Monitoring System (TPMS) (option) engine. data about the vehicle. on page 37) The fuel consumption goal is met by • Chassis • Driver Rewards (option) (see Driver Rewards) reducing the amount of fuel used over a • Engine given distance. This is achieved by • Anti-lock Brake System • Driver Performance Assistant (option) (see DPA) • Driving slower

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 77 CONTROLS - Driver Performance Assistant (option)

• Minimize Speed Changes driving tips that can increase fuel economy Coasting and engine brake use, instead of • Accelerating gently and brake savings. These features also frequent, aggressive use of the service • Coasting in gear provide feedback in the Driver Summary brakes, can extend brake life and increase based on a driver’s specific driving habits. fuel economy. The DPA assigns the driver • Using the Cruise Control This advice if followed can improve future a score based on their braking habits and • Maintaining optimal tire pressure. Driver Rewards and DPA scores. provides suggestions on how to improve • Reducing the trailer gap Driver Rewards has three customer- these habits. The DPA feature is only 3 • Running a Warmer Cab. determined modes of activation: only when available for vehicles equipped with a • Turning off extra electrical loads CC is in use, when CC is not being used, PACCAR MX engine. The engine idle time goal is met by or at all times. The Driver Rewards goal The driver’s DPA score is determined by reducing the time the engine idles (running and the amount of penalty or bonus is also comparing their braking and coasting the engine when the vehicle is not in customer-determined and should be based habits against a customer-defined goal for motion). on reasonable expectations for a known braking use and coasting. A score that The Driver Rewards score is based on route of travel. The Driver Rewards goal meets or exceeds this goal will award driving habits. This score is compared to should be reconsidered if the manner of positive feedback in the Driver Summary. the goal and a max-speed bonus or vehicle use or the vehicle route changes During the Systems Check, the DPA and penalty is determined. The Driver Rewards significantly. Driver Rewards features offer general score is shown during a Systems Check To enable or disable Driver Rewards, or driving tips that can increase fuel economy and in the Driver Summary. When there is change the mode of activation, reward and brake savings. These features also a bonus or penalty, it appears below the amounts, or set a new Driver Rewards provide feedback in the Driver Summary Cruise Control (CC) indicator on the dash, goal, contact your dealership. based on a driver’s specific driving habits. and the max-allowed speed shows to the This advice if followed can improve future right of the CC indicator. Driving habits that DPA and Driver Rewards scores (see reduce fuel use will earn the operator a Driver Performance Driver Rewards). higher max speed; habits that consume To enable or disable the DPA or set a new more fuel will lower the max speed. Driver Assistant (option) DPA goal, contact your dealership. Rewards will never grant a bonus that exceeds programmed federal emission If enabled, the Driver Performance regulated or customer defined speed limits. Assistant (DPA) determines how skillfully During the Systems Check, the Driver the operator uses coasting and the engine Rewards and DPA features offer general brake when reducing vehicle speed.

78 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Bulb Check

Audible Alarm Bulb Check The audible alarm will sound in conjunction NOTE with most warning lights. These events When the ignition switch is turned ON include but are not limited to headlight on, Some optional lights may illuminate multiple warning icons will be displayed in fifth wheel, stop engine, primary/secondary even though your vehicle is not equip- a sequence to test each warning light air, and driver door open warnings. ped with that particular feature. indicator. The total sequence should take no more than 10 seconds to complete. Optional Icons 3 Have your instrumentation system checked Additional icons may be operational Physical Telltales by a qualified service technician if does not depending on individual vehicle successfully complete. specifications.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 79 CONTROLS - Bulb Check

3

These physical telltales will always appear most signify that the monitored component across the top of the display. requires operator attention.

Dedicated Telltales Dedicated Telltales always appear in the same location throughout the screen. Some are visible only when active, but

80 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Dynamic Telltales Popups Suppressable Popup Message

Popup: Red Oil Temp Engine Oil Temp High Reduce Engine Load or Check Engine Oil Temp High Oil Level 1/2 Reduce Engine Load or Check Oil Level 1/3 A Popup displays information from the 3 vehicle computer. Certain types of popups Guide to the Warning are indicated by the Warning Indicator in the display area. Symbols Mulitple Popups will appear in the display These dynamic telltales appear on the as a stack of messages. Suppressible The warning lamps and audible alarm may display in the rows indicated. A dynamic Popups are those that will move out of the indicate a system malfunction. Check the telltale communicates the status of a stack when driving. All are suppressible lamps frequently, and respond promptly as monitored component, which may require when the Parking Brake is set. soon as you see one go on. These lamps the operator to respond or take action. The Menu will not be accessible until all could save you from a serious accident. Popups have been Suppressed. Additionally, gauges may become visible, may change colors, or may change Active Warnings brightness to raise awareness to the Red or amber popups are counted and the Viewing and Suppressing Popups operator. total is displayed by the active warning A Popup can be read and Suppressed by When multiple warning symbols are shown indicator. In addition, these counts are also pressing the Scroll Wheel. Some situations on the instrument cluster, they will appear presented in may require pressing Back instead. For at first and then minimize. When minimized • Systems Check example, the following image is they will be represented in the active • The Notifications Sub-menu suppressed by pressing the Scroll Wheel warnings area of the display. A triangle (noted with the arrown down) OR by represents a warning registered and a • A Drive Summary pressing the Back(indicated with the X diamond represents a check message. The numbers may change without user mark below the roller). interaction if individual warnings are intermittent, time based, self correcting, or the situation is rectified.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 81 CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

message is appearing on the cluster. Some death or injury. Have the appropriate messages can be managed by the WARNING system checked immediately. operator while others may require an authorized dealer repair. In the following DO NOT ignore a warning lamp or au- Check messages are provided to give the table is a list of warning lamp/indicator dible alarm. These signals tell you operator additional information regarding symbols that appear in the instrument something is wrong with your vehicle. systems that require attention due to a cluster. Each symbol has a unique name, 3 It could be a failure in an important system malfunction and/or operating color when illuminated, and whether the system, such as the brakes, which conditions that may hinder safe and proper symbol is standard (STD) or optional could lead to an accident causing performance of the vehicle. The system will (OPT). emit a chime to alert the operator that a

Standard or Symbol Name Color Optional

ADAS Camera Fault on page 84 Yellow OPT Axle, Stability Control (Option) on page 84 Yellow STD Axle, Traction Control on page 85 Yellow STD Brakes, Antilock Brake System on page 86 Yellow STD Brakes, Low Air on page 86 Red STD Brake, Park Brake on page 86 Red STD Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake System on page 86 Yellow STD Cab, Door Ajar Amber STD Differential, Inter-Axle Lock on page 87 Yellow OPT Dump Truck, Body Up on page 87 Red OPT

82 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Standard or Symbol Name Color Optional

Dump Truck, Gate on page 87Dump Truck, Gate Yellow OPT Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Warning Light on page 88 Yellow STD Emissions, Derate Amber STD 3 Emissions, High Exhaust System Temperature on page 88 Yellow STD Emissions, Malfunction Indicator Light on page 88 Yellow STD Engine, Check Engine on page 89 Yellow STD Engine, Engine Block Heater on page 89 Yellow OPT Engine, Low Coolant Level on page 89 Yellow STD Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown on page 89 Red OPT Engine, Retarder (Brake) on page 89 Green OPT Engine, Stop Engine on page 89 Red STD Engine Wait-to-Start Light on page 89 Yellow OPT Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked on page 90 Red OPT Fifth Wheel Locked on page 90 Red OPT Fifth Wheel Unlocked on page 91 Red OPT Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 91 Yellow OPT Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Fault on page 91 Yellow OPT

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 83 CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Standard or Symbol Name Color Optional

Lights, High Beam on page 91 Blue STD Fast Idle Control on page 91 Yellow OPT 3 Refrigerator on page 91 Green OPT Seat Belt Fasten Red STD Suspension, Lift Axle White OPT Tire Inflation (TPMS) on page 91 Yellow OPT Transmission, Auxiliary on page 92 Yellow OPT Transmission, Check on page 92 Red OPT Turn Signal, Left on page 92 Green STD Turn Signal, Right on page 92 Green STD

optional LKA features are both dependent Axle, Stability Control (Option) ADAS Camera Fault on the ADAS camera, and both will be disabled when this warning occurs. In addition to issues internal to the camera, please read the topic Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page 150 for conditions This amber warning light appears when a which may limit camera performance, fault occurs with the camera used by the resulting in an ADAS Camera Fault. various Advanced Driver Assist (ADAS) features: Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Lane Keeping Assist (LKA), and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). The LDW and

84 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Calculates the driver’s intended path of may reduce engine power or apply brakes travel from wheel speed and steering angle of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- in an effort to regain traction. cating frame components, or modifying sensors, then compares calculations to the • Illuminates during the Bulb Check pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- actual direction of travel. The system uses when the ignition is turned ON. It nesses) the ESC must be evaluated individual wheel brakes to re-adjust the turns off after a few seconds if no by a qualified technician. If you have path of the vehicle. system problems are detected. If any questions, contact your authorized • The Stability Control Icon (ESC or an ATC problem is detected, the dealer. Failure to comply may result in Electronic Stability Control) ATC warning light will turn on and 3 property damage, personal injury, or illuminates during the Bulb Check stay on. death. when the ignition is turned ON. It • Illuminates when the ATC is turns off after a few seconds if no regulating wheel spin and turns off system problems are detected. If a NOTE after the traction control event has problem is detected, the ESC ended. Warning lamp will turn on and stay For more information about the stabili- • Flashes continuously when the on. ty control system installed on your ve- ATC/Deep Snow & Mud switch is • Illuminates when the ESC system hicle, please refer to additional materi- turned on, indicating that this is regulating individual wheel al supplied with this operator manual, feature is active. brakes to correct the vehicle’s included in your glove box information- direction of travel. (Refer to al packet. Advanced ABS with Stability Control for more information.) Axle, Traction Control WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and is modified (e.g. adding or removing an axle, converting from a truck to a Monitors wheel speed for poor traction. If a tractor, converting from a tractor to a wheel begins to slip due to poor traction, it truck, changing the body, lengthening

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 85 CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Brakes, Antilock Brake System Brakes, Low Air WARNING

If this chassis is equipped with an Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and Illuminates during the bulb check. Have the is modified (e.g. adding or removing ABS system checked by an authorized 3 an axle, converting from a truck to a dealer if the ABS Warning Lamp stays on tractor, converting from a tractor to a for more than 3 seconds. truck, changing the body, lengthening • Illuminates during normal operating of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- conditions to indicate a problem Illuminates when system air pressure falls cating frame components, or modifying with the ABS system. below 60 psi. pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- • Illuminates when a problem exists nesses) the ESC must be evaluated with Automatic Traction Control Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake by a qualified technician. If you have (ATC). System any questions, contact your authorized dealer. Failure to comply may result in property damage, personal injury, or Brake, Park Brake death.

NOTE Illuminates during the bulb check and the For more information about the stabili- Illuminates in the status indicator when parking brakes are applied. tractor/truck is connected with a ABS ty control system installed on your ve- equipped trailer. Illuminates during normal hicle, please refer to additional materi- operating conditions to indicate a problem al supplied with this operator manual, with the Trailer ABS System. This should included in your glove box information- be checked by an authorized dealer as al packet. soon as possible.

86 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

• Variable Road Speed Limiter (optional) NOTE NOTE When a Cruise Control function is enabled, a white indicator will appear. When a Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after Cruise Control function has been activated, 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an the indicator will change from white to In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per green. For more information on use of the U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose various Cruise Control functions, see 3 Power Line Communication (PLC) as Power Line Communication (PLC) as Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, the standard method to turn it on. On the standard method to turn it on. On Predictive Cruise Control, and Variable trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify Road Speed Limiter. trailer ABS system status via the re- trailer ABS system status via the re- quired external warning light mounted quired external warning light mounted on the trailer. The indicator light on the Differential, Inter-Axle Lock on the trailer. The indicator light on the trailer should be yellow and identified trailer should be yellow and identified with the letters ABS. with the letters ABS.

Cruise Control Illuminates when the inter-axle differential Dump Truck, Body Up switch is ON thus locking the inter-axle differential. This powers the forward rear and the rear rear differentials equally. When the switch is turned off (inter-axle Illuminates when Truck Dump Body is up. differential unlocked) the engine power is allowed to flow to any of the four drive tires This indicator shows the operator which Dump Truck, Gate Cruise Control function is currently enabled based on the differential effect (mostly to or active. This includes the forward rear differential). This feature is • Cruise Control standard on all tandem axles. • Adaptive Cruise Control (optional) Illuminates when Truck Dump gate is open. • Predictive Cruise Control (optional)

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 87 CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) ticular filter (DPF)/selective catalytic Warning Light WARNING reduction (SCR) device and surround- ing components including enclosures If this light is on, do not park in an area and steps becomes elevated during of combustible vapors or materials. engine operation or any regeneration You must keep combustibles at least 5 event and can cause serious burns to 3 ft. (1.5 m) away from the exhaust (out- the skin. Allow adequate cooling time This icon and related message will appear let) stream as it exits the tail pipe while before approaching, working on or when the DPF needs to be regenerated the HEST light is illuminated. Always near any part of the exhaust system or and then also during the regeneration park your vehicle outside. Failure to do surrounding components. cycle. This may also appear if the system so could ignite an explosion or harm is attempting to automatically regenerate bystanders which could result in seri- Illuminates when the exhaust gas while the vehicle is in Power Take Off ous injury. temperature and exhaust components operation mode. become extremely hot. Engine aftertreatment system includes a diesel particulate filter and DPF warning WARNING Emissions, Malfunction Indicator light. Light If this lamp is on, do not park in an Emissions, High Exhaust System area where people are close by. You Temperature must keep combustibles at least 5 ft. (1.5 m) away from the exhaust outlet while the HEST lamp is illuminated. Illuminates when an engine emissions Failure to do so could result in serious failure has occurred. The vehicle can be injury. safely driven but should be serviced to correct the problem. The situation should not be considered an emergency. In some WARNING cases, the Malfunction Indicator Light will activate in conjunction with the High If this lamp is on, temperature of the Exhaust Temperature, Diesel Particulate tailpipe, exhaust pipes, the diesel par- Filter (DPF), and Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning Lights.

88 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Engine, Check Engine Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown WARNING

If the Stop Engine warning light illumi- nates, it means you have a serious en- Illuminates when the Engine overspeed air Illuminates when a non emissions related gine system problem. This should be shutdown system is activated. problem exists, but the vehicle can still be considered an emergency. You should 3 safely driven. Vehicle should be serviced to stop the vehicle as safely as possible correct the problem but the situation should Engine, Retarder (Brake) and turn OFF the ignition. The vehicle not be considered an emergency. must be serviced and the problem cor- rected before driving again. Failure to Engine, Engine Block Heater comply may result in death, personal Illuminates when the engine retarder injury, equipment or property damage. (compression brake or exhaust brake) switch is turned on. Illuminates when the engine block heater is Engine Wait-to-Start Light turned on. Engine, Stop Engine This warning icon will appear when the system needs some time before attempting Engine, Low Coolant Level to start the engine. The light will illuminate at key ON, and will stay on for a period of up to 30 seconds.

Illuminates with an audible alarm indicating critically low coolant level. The vehicle must be serviced to correct the problem but the situation should not be considered Illuminates and an audible alarm tone will an emergency. sound when a major engine system problem exists.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 89 CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

lamp stops flashing, the starting motor in death, personal injury, equipment or NOTE will be allowed to function. property damage.

The length of time the 'Wait-To-Start' lamp remains illuminated depends on Emissions, Engine Derate NOTE the ambient temperature. The lower 3 the ambient temperature, the longer Vehicles having an air slide fifth wheel the lamp will be illuminated. have a fifth wheel slider lock controlled by a switch on the instrument panel. Once the Wait-to-Start light turns off, turn Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked By placing the switch in the unlock po- the key to the starting position to start the sition you can slide the fifth wheel to engine. various positions to adjust weight dis- You may see this appear if the system has tribution. detected a situation where the starter is too hot and needs to cool down. Alternatively, Illuminates when fifth wheel slide switch is you may see it when the engine grid heater activated. Indicates fifth wheel can move. Fifth Wheel Locked is on and needs some time to warm up. WARNING NOTE DO NOT move the fifth wheel while Some engines are equipped with an the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your engine starting motor protection fea- load could shift suddenly, causing you Illuminates when the fifth wheel is in the ture. If the starting motor is engaged to lose control of the vehicle. Never locked position. for 30 or more seconds, without the operate the vehicle with the switch in engine starting, the starter will be the UNLOCK position. Always inspect locked out from operating, allowing for the fifth wheel after you lock the switch proper cooling of the starting motor. to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is During this time, the 'Wait-To-Start' engaged. Failure to comply may result lamp will flash for 2 minutes. Once the

90 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Guide to the Warning Symbols

Fifth Wheel Unlocked Illuminates when LDW system is not able See Indicators around the speedometer on to track the vehicle's position within the page 135. lane. Refrigerator NOTE For vehicles equipped with Lane De- 3 Illuminates when the fifth wheel is in the parture Warning, please refer to Lane unlocked position. Indicates the king pin is Departure Warning Driver's Guide for Illuminates to indicate that the refrigerator disengaged. additional information. is on and ignition is off. Lights, High Beam Seat Belt Fasten Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Fault

Illuminates when the high beams are on. This icon will flash with audible alarm if the headlights are left ON when the door is Illuminates when the ignition key is turned opened and the key switch is OFF. on as a reminder to fasten your seat belt. In addition, this icon will flash, but without an audible alarm, if there is a problem with This amber warning light will appear when the low beam headlights or the low beam a fault occurs in the Lane Departure Tire Inflation (TPMS) headlight wiring. In such event, the high Warning (LDW) system. If this occurs, the beam headlights will turn on at 50% normal LDW feature will be disabled. brightness. Fast Idle Control Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Illuminates when tire pressures need to be The display will show the Fast Idle Control checked. (FIC) indicator when enabled or activated. The indicator shows the set RPM value.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 91 CONTROLS - Optional Gauges

Transmission, Auxiliary Turn Signal, Right of load you are carrying and the driving conditions you encounter. Maximum axle temperature may vary, depending upon the axle and type of lubricant. Very high temperatures signal a need to have your axle lubrication checked. Blinks when the right turn signal or the 3 hazard light function is operating. CAUTION

Driving with very hot temperatures in Illuminates to indicate auxiliary Optional Gauges your rear drive axles can cause seri- transmission is in neutral. For vehicles with a telematic navigation ous damage to axle bearings and screen, optional gauges will be part of the seals. Have your axle lubrication Transmission, Check screen functions. Please refer to the checked if you notice a sign of over- navigation system supplement for further heating. details about its functions and how it works. Some vehicles may have optional Depending on the vehicle configuration, analog gauges installed at the factory in there may be a single gauge for more than Illuminates when transmission has place of the navigation screen. just the forward and rear driver. The icon recorded a fault code. will have an "X" over the representative axle to indicate which axle's temperature is Drive Axle Temperature Gauge being displayed in the gauge. Turn Signal, Left (Forward and Rear) Manifold Pressure Gauge This gauge indicates the pressure in the intake manifold. The pressure in the manifold is directly related to the turbo Blinks when the left turn signal or the These gauges indicate the temperature of output and is related to the engine power hazard light function is operating. the lubricant in your vehicle's axle(s). output. These temperatures will vary with the kind

92 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

switches on the dash may require that the vehicle either be at a specific speed, have Dash Switches park brakes set, or another device to be on This custom vehicle will have a wide or off for the air device to operate. The If the pressure indicated by your manifold variety of switch-controlled equipment. instrument display will show information pressure gauge goes down, there may be However, this particular vehicle may not regarding what needs to change in order something wrong with your engine. Have it have every switch identified in this section for the air device to operate as expected. checked by a qualified service person. of the operator manual. Some air device The following table provides a complete list 3 of icons that may be found on the switch.

Title Standard or Optional

Axle, Differential Lock - Tridrive OPT Axle, Diff-Lock - Dual OPT Axle, Diff-Lock - Forward Rear OPT Axle, Diff-Lock - Rear Rear OPT Axle, Diff-Lock - Single Rear OPT Axle, Diff-Lock - Steer OPT Axle, Inter-Axle Differential Locked (Tandem) OPT Axle, Two Speed OPT Back Up Alarm Mute OPT Batteries, Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) STD Brakes, ABS Off-Road OPT Brakes, Parking Brake Valve STD

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 93 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Title Standard or Optional

Brake, Trailer Hand STD Cab Dimmer Switch STD Dump Truck Gate OPT 3 Electric Steer, Assist Effort OPT Engine, Fan Override OPT Engine, Heater OPT Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Test) OPT Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown (Manual) OPT Engine, Remote Throttle OPT Engine, Under Hood Air Intake OPT Exhaust, Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Regeneration STD Fifth Wheel Slide OPT Fuel Heater OPT Generic Air, Accessory OPT Generic, Spare OPT Ignition Key Switch STD Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable OPT Lights, Auto Headlamp STD

94 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Title Standard or Optional

Lights, Auxiliary OPT Lights, Beacon OPT Lights, Daytime Running (Override) OPT Lights, Dome STD 3 Lights, Exterior Lights Self Test STD Lights, Flood OPT Lights, Flood ISO 3732 Spare OPT Lights, Fog OPT Lights, Hazard STD Lights, Headlight and Parking Lights STD Lights, Marker/Clearance/Cab STD Lights, Marker/Clearance/Trailer OPT Lights, Park Light STD Lights, Spot OPT Mud and Snow Traction Control STD Pintle Hook OPT Power Take-off (PTO) OPT Power Take-off (PTO), Forward OPT

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 95 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Title Standard or Optional

Power Take-off (PTO), Rear OPT Suspension, Air Retention OPT Suspension, Axle, Pusher OPT 3 Suspension, Axle, Tag OPT Suspension, Dump OPT Suspension, Third Axle Lift OPT Trailer Air Supply STD Trailer, Axle (3rd Axle) Lift OPT Trailer, Axle Lift Forward OPT Trailer, Axle Lift Rear OPT Trailer, Belly Dump OPT Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Center OPT Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Front OPT Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Rear OPT Trailer, Dump Gate OPT Trailer, Hotline OPT Trailer, Suspension Air Dump OPT Transmission, Transfer Case OPT

96 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Title Standard or Optional

Transmission, Transfer Case Two-Speed OPT Winch Clutch OPT

Axle, Diff-Lock - Dual Turn switch on to engage Rear Rear Axle Axle, Differential Lock - Tridrive Diff Lock. 3 Axle, Diff-Lock - Single Rear

Turn switch on to engage Front and Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Forward Rear Turn switch on to engage Single Rear Axle Diff Lock.

Axle, Diff-Lock - Steer Tridrives will have these axle differential lock controls and are 2 separate switches. Turn switch on to engage Forward Rear FRONT will control the forward rear and Axle Diff Lock. REAR will control the center/rear-rear axle differential. In addition, a vehicle with Tridrive will have an interaxle differential Axle, Diff-Lock - Rear Rear Turn switch on to engage Front Axle Diff lock switch. Lock.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 97 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Axle, Inter-Axle Differential Locked Brakes, Parking Brake Valve (Tandem) NOTE

The mute function use is discouraged. Only use mute when legally required. Pull yellow knob to activate parking brakes.

3 Turn switch on to engage Inter-Axle Batteries, Low Voltage Disconnect Brake, Trailer Hand Differential Lock. (LVD)

Axle, Two Speed This dash mounted switch provides air pressure to apply the trailer brakes only. It operates independently of the foot treadle If your vehicle is equipped with a Low valve. Voltage Disconnect (LVD) feature, the LVD If equipped, the two speed axle switch is integrated into the main load center. Cab Dimmer Switch allows you to select axle high and low ranges. The low range (Off) provides Brakes, ABS Off-Road maximum torque for operating off-highway. The high range (On) is a faster ratio for highway speeds. This switch is used to alter the brightness Back Up Alarm Mute of the instrument panel lights. Turn switch on to engage ABS Off-Road mode.

Turn switch on to mute Back Up Alarm.

98 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Engine, Remote Throttle Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown NOTE (Test)

The Headlight Switch is an ON or OFF Turn switch on to activate Remote Throttle switch. The panel lights are on full in- Control. tensity during the day and dim when headlights are on. Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown Hold down switch and increase engine 3 (Manual) RPM to test that Engine Overspeed Air Dump Truck Gate Shutdown system functions correctly. A system reset will be required before restarting engine. See EOAS system manufacturer's instruction manual for Turn switch on to open Dump Truck Gate. details.

Engine, Fan Override Engine, Under Hood Air Intake This switch opens a door in the engine air filter housing so that the air is taken from Turn switch on to engage the Engine under the hood instead of outside air. This The optional engine fan switch allows you Overspeed Air Shutdown system. A switch can be useful when starting the to control the engine fan manually or system reset will be required before re- vehicle in cold weather conditions. automatically. starting engine. See EOAS system manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Engine, Heater

Turn switch on to activate the Engine Heater.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 99 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Turn switch on to unlock Fifth Wheel Slide Fuel Heater mechanism. The switch is guarded to CAUTION protect you from accidentally activating or releasing the lock. Only operate the under hood intake air switch when outside temperatures are below 32°F (0°C). Engaging the under WARNING Turn switch on to activate Fuel Heater. 3 hood air intake while temperatures are above freezing may result in engine DO NOT move the fifth wheel while damage. the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your Generic Air, Accessory load could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle. Never Exhaust, Diesel Particulate Filter operate the vehicle with the switch in Provides accessory air to the end of the (DPF) Regeneration the UNLOCK position. Always inspect frame connection when switch is turned on. the fifth wheel after you lock the switch to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is NOTE engaged. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or The generic air accessory switch is de- property damage. signed by the original equipment man- ufacturer to reset when the ignition Manually controls the diesel particulate power is turned off. When ignition is filter (DPF) regeneration process. Refer to NOTE turned off, this circuit will exhaust air Engine Aftertreatment Controls Operator's pressure. Manual for additional information. Vehicles having an air slide fifth wheel have a fifth wheel slider lock controlled by a switch on the instrument panel. Generic, Spare SPARE Fifth Wheel Slide By placing the switch in the unlock po- sition you can slide the fifth wheel to Turn switch on to power customer installed various positions to adjust weight dis- accessory. tribution.

100 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Ignition Key Switch • Marker Lamps Assist until the LDW system is re-ena- • Clearance lamps The ignition key switch located to the left of bled. the steering column has four positions: • Identification lamps ACC (Accessories), OFF, ON, and START. • License plate lamps. See also Ignition Key Switch on page 107. Lights, Automatic Lights, Auxiliary Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 3 Disable

The Automatic Light switch - when activated - will illuminate the exterior lights Turn switch on for Auxiliary Lights. of the vehicle when a low light condition is detected, and will extinguish the lights when the lighting conditions brighten. (Do Lights, Beacon The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) NOT confuse this feature with "automatic Disable switch disables both audible and high beam control"). visual Lane Departure Warning alerts for When Parked with the ignition switch in the 15 minutes (or until the next ignition key ON position and Auto Switch enabled, the cycle) after which time LDW will vehicle will turn on the following lights automatically re-enable. This switch will not when a low light condition is detected: Turn switch on for Beacon Light(s). affect any audible or visual alerts for the • Park Lamps Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) feature. • Tail Lamps Lights, Daytime Running (Override) This switch lights up green when active. • License plate lamps When Driving and Auto Switch enabled, NOTE the vehicle will turn on the following lights when a low light condition is detected: Disabling Lane Departure Warning • Low Beam Headlamps • Park Lamps (LDW) will also disable Lane Keeping This switch overrides the normal operation • Position Lamps of the Day Time Running Light (DRL) • Tail Lamps system. During normal operation, the DRL

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 101 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

will turn on lights when the headlights are Lights, Dome Lights, Flood (Spare) turned off, engine is on, and the park brakes are disengaged. The override switch will turn the DRL off in these instances. The DRL is also turned off when the headlights are turned ON. Turn switch on for trailer mounted Flood Lights. 3 Turn switch on for Cab Dome Lights. WARNING lights, Exterior lights Self Test Lights, Fog DO NOT use daytime running lights (DRL) during periods of darkness or reduced visibility. DO NOT use DRL as a substitute for headlights or other lights during operations that require Turn switch on for Fog Lights. lighting of your vehicle. Failure to com- This switch will begin a sequence of ply may result in personal injury, prop- turning on and off exterior lights so that the erty damage or death. operator can verify functionality. See NOTE Exterior Lighting Self-Test on page 107. If the headlight switch is turned OFF, the Across the U.S.A. and Canada, State/ DRL system engages automatically after Lights, Flood Provincial requirements vary as to the engine starts and you release the when high beams and fog lights can parking brake. If the headlight switch is and cannot be used together. Some ON, the DRL system is overridden, and states allow only four lights to be used headlights operate normally. Also, the DRL together, while some allow more. How is temporarily turned off during engine your lights are arranged will affect cranking. Turn switch on for cab mounted Flood whether you can operate headlights Lights. and fog lights concurrently always comply with the state or provincial re- quirements where you are driving.

102 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Lights, Hazard Lights, Headlight to heat up the lens of the headlights and remove any condensation. See Door Mounted Mirror Controls on page 113 for the mirror heat switch location.

Turn switch for park/marker lights and Lights, Marker/Clearance This switch operates the emergency headlights. When the headlights are ON, flashers. With the switch in the ON the dash lights, side, and tail lights are also 3 position, the emergency flasher makes all on. Headlights will turn on if the windshield four turn signals (front and rear) flash wipers are turned on. Manually turning the simultaneously. The flasher works headlights on and then off will override this independently of the ignition switch. You function until the next time the vehicle is Turn switch on to control Cab and Vehicle should always use the flasher if the vehicle turned on. Marker/Clearance lights. is disabled or parked under emergency conditions. CAUTION NOTE

WARNING If you have confirmed there is a prob- An interrupt switch for the trailer mark- lem in the low beam wiring circuit, pro- er lights is mounted on the end of the Use your Hazard Warning Light Sys- ceed with caution to the next available turn signal lever. tem any time you have to stop off the exit/turnoff and safely pull your vehicle road or on the side of the road, day or completely off the road and call for as- night. A hard-to-see vehicle can result sistance. Driving your vehicle with the Lights, Marker/Clearance/Trailer in an injury or accident. Another vehi- headlamps on high beam (at reduced cle could run into you if you do not set intensity) for a prolonged period could your flashers and follow the placement lead to an injury accident. Contact of emergency signals per FMCSR your nearest dealer to have the prob- 392.22. lem corrected as soon as possible. Turn switch on to control trailer marker/ If the vehicle has LED headlights, the clearance lights separately from the vehicle operator can turn on the mirror heat switch marker/clearance lights.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 103 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Lights, Park Light Pintle Hook NOTE

Actual PTO engagement/disengage- ment may be delayed momentarily since it is controlled by the air system Turn switch on for Park Lights. When the Turn switch on to remove the slack from and mechanical movement. 3 Park Lights are on the dash lights, side and the Tow Hook. tail lights are also on. Power Take-off (PTO) CAUTION Lights, Spot Increasing engine rpm before the PTO is actually engaged could prevent the PTO from engaging and/or cause PTO This vehicle may be equipped with a dash damage. mounted switch that controls PTO Turn switch on for Spot Light. engagement/disengagement. When the operator activates the switch for the PTO, Power Take-off (PTO), Forward Mud and Snow Traction Control the status indicator light (located on the switch) will immediately illuminate even though PTO engagement may not have occurred. If the PTO is engaged and the operator turns the switch OFF, the PTO Your vehicle may be equipped with a dash status indicator light (located on the switch) mounted switch that controls forward PTO will go out immediately even though PTO engagement/disengagement. Momentarily push switch in to engage disengagement may not have occurred. Traction Control (TC). Power Take-off (PTO), Rear

104 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Your vehicle may be equipped with a dash Turn switch on to deflate suspension air Suspension, Air Retention mounted switch that controls the rear PTO bags. The switch is guarded to protect you engagement/disengagement. from accidentally deflating the suspension.

Suspension, Axle, Pusher WARNING DO NOT operate the Air Suspension 3 Deflate Switch (Dump Valve) while Suspension, Third Axle Lift driving. Sudden deflation while your vehicle is moving can affect handling Turn switch on to lower Single or Forward and control and could lead to an acci- Pusher Axle. dent. Use this switch only when your vehicle is not moving. Turn switch on to raise Third Axle. Suspension, Axle, Tag Trailer Air Supply CAUTION

Operating a vehicle with air suspen- sion bags either overinflated or under- Turn switch on to lower tag axle. inflated may cause damage to drive- line components. If a vehicle must be The red octagonal knob controls the air supply to the trailer. Suspension, Dump operated under such conditions, do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Failure to comply may result in equipment dam- Trailer, Axle (3rd Axle) Lift age.

Turn switch ON to lift 3rd Trailer Axle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 105 CONTROLS - Dash Switches

Trailer, Axle Lift Forward Turn switch on to open Trailer Dump Gate. Trailer, Hotline

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Center Turn switch on to supply electrical power to trailer accessories. Turn switch on to lift Forward Trailer Axle. 3 Trailer, Suspension Air Dump Trailer, Axle Lift Rear Turn switch on to open Trailer Center Belly Dump Gate.

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Front Turn switch on to deflate trailer air Turn switch on to lift Rear Trailer Axle. suspension.

Trailer, Belly Dump Transmission, Transfer Case Turn switch on to open Trailer Front Belly Dump Gate.

Trailer, Belly Dump Gate Rear Turn switch on to open Trailer Belly Dump. Turn switch on to shift the transfer case.

Trailer, Dump Gate

Turn switch on to open Trailer Rear Belly Dump Gate.

106 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Ignition Key Switch

Transmission, Transfer Case Two- • instrument panel memory Speed settings

ACC With the key in this position you can (Accessory): play the radio, defrost mirrors (if equipped with mirror heat) or use other accessories. ON: In the ON position all circuits are 3 Turn switch on to shift the two-speed energized. Panel warning lights will transfer case. light and the buzzer will sound until (1) the engine is started, (2) normal oil operating pressure is reached, and Winch Clutch OFF: In this position all accessories are OFF (except (3) air brake system pressure is those listed below) and you can remove the above 65 psi (441 kPa). In this key. position, the ignition key cannot be The following lights and accessories removed.

have power when the key is in the START: Turn the key to this position to start OFF position: your engine. Release the key after • brake lights the engine has started. Turn switch on to engage winch clutch. • emergency hazard flasher • dome and courtesy lamps Ignition Key Switch (on doors) • electric horn Exterior Lighting Self-Test The ignition key switch located to the left of • cigarette lighter the steering column has four positions: When the feature is engaged, via a switch ACC (Accessories), OFF, ON, and START. • tail lights on the dash, it will illuminate the: • marker lamps • Park lights • headlights • Side marker lights • radio station memory • Hazard/turn signals • instrument lights • Low beam headlamps • auxiliary power • First set of fog/driving lights

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 107 CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

The test will turn those lights off and then 3. Press the momentary switch on the 2. Tilt/telescope lever illuminate the: dash to start the ELST. 3. Turn signal/wiper/lights • Park lights The turn signal lever is mounted on the left • Side marker lights side of the steering column. The lever • High beam headlamps controls several functions: turn signal, high • Stop/Brake lights beam, and windshield wiper control. The turn signal lever will only operate when the After turning these lights off, the system 3 key is in the ignition in the ACC position. will resume testing the first set of lights. The light test will eventually stop on its Tilt/Telescoping Steering Wheel own. The operator may interrupt the test by Steering Column Controls turning the vehicle off or pressing the Depending on your vehicle’s configuration, switch a second time while the test is 1 you may have either a tilt/telescoping running. The operator can verify light feature. functionality by visibly watching the lights • The tilt feature allows forward and from outside the vehicle or by observing rearward movement of the wheel. the instrument cluster for lighting-related 3 • The telescoping feature allows you warnings. The ELST will also start the to move the wheel up and down. Systems Check (Systems Check on page 37). WARNING

Test the Exterior Lights Make all adjustments to the steering To start the Exterior Light Self Test (ELST) mechanism while the vehicle is stop- feature: ped. Adjusting the Tilt Telescoping 1. Park the vehicle and set the Steering Wheel while the vehicle is in parking brakes. motion could cause loss of control. 2. Insert the key into the ignition and You would not be able to steer proper- turn the key to the ON position. 2 ly and could have an accident resulting Allow the vehicle to run through in death or personal injury. bulb check. 1. Engine brake (optional transmission shifter)

108 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

How to Spray Windshield Washer Operate the Windshield Wipers instrument cluster display. Go to Fluid This vehicle is equipped with a two speed, Settings > Wiper Interlock and turn this value to OFF. This vehicle is equipped with a function to intermittent windshield wiper system. The Avoid running the wiper blades over a dry wash the windshield and simultaneously windshield wiper system is integrated with windshield to prevent scratching the glass. engage the wipers. the exterior lights so that the low beam headlights will turn on when the windshield Spray on washer fluid first. A scratched wipers turn on. windshield will reduce visibility. CAUTION A seven-position rotary wiper switch 3 (located on the turn signal lever) operates If the electric pump is operated for a WARNING the windshield wipers and washer. If you long period (more than 15 seconds) need to use the windshield wipers: with a dry reservoir, the pump motor Clean blades regularly with a damp 1. Rotate the end of the turn signal may be damaged. cloth to remove road film and wax lever to change the wiper mode buildup. DO NOT drive with worn or from off to on. If you need to use the windshield washer: dirty wiper blades. They can reduce 2. Rotate the outer knob of the turn visibility, making driving hazardous 1. Push the Turn Signal Lever Outer stalk lever to adjust the wiper which may lead to an accident result- Knob in. speed. ing in death or personal injury.

CAUTION

DO NOT use antifreeze or engine coolant in the windshield washer res- • Press and hold will activate the • Four levels of intermittent ervoir, damage to seals and other washer fluid and wipers. speeds components will result. • Instant press and release will • Low wiper speed activate the washer fluid only. To override this function, turn the • High wiper speed headlights on and then off again. Permanently overriding this functionality is attainable via the Settings Menu in the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 109 CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

How to Flash Marker and Clearance high beams will flash. The high beams will The blue indicator light in the instrument Lights not remain on if the lever is still pressed. panel will turn ON when the high beams turn on. A button on the end of the Signal Turn stalk will momentarily flash the marker and NOTE clearance lights when pushed. How to Use the Turn Signal Continued pressing of the high beam The lever-action turn signal/high beam 3 flash will not keep the high beams on. switch is located on the left side of the steering column. The ignition key must be turned to ON for the signal/switch to How to Momentarily Flash High How to Turn on High Beams operate. Beams The high beam function is operated by the The "flash to pass" high beam function is same steering column lever for the turn NOTE operated by the same steering column signals. High beams will not turn on if the lever for the turn signals. The high beam headlights are turned off. If the vehicle turn signals and turn sig- flash to pass will work if the headlights are 1. Gently pull the Turn Signal lever nal indicators in the dash gauge clus- not on. toward the steering wheel until you ter ever begin flashing at an accelerat- 1. Gently push the turn signal lever, hear the switch click and the beam ed rate (115 cycles per minute) when away from the steering wheel. changes. the turn signal lever is in the OFF (center) position, or when a Right/Left turn has been selected, the problem may be related to a failed turn signal switch or turn signal module. In either case, the problem is not a failed bulb. Contact your nearest authorized deal- er to have the problem corrected as 2. The lever will automatically return 2. To return to previous beam, pull the soon as possible. when the lever is released. Turn Signal lever towards the The blue indicator light in the instrument steering wheel again. 1. Push the Signal stalk lever up to panel will momentarily turn ON and the engage the RIGHT turn signal and

110 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Steering Column Controls

down to engage the LEFT turn How to Adjust Tilt/Telescoping signal. Steering Column

WARNING

Make all adjustments to the steering mechanism while the vehicle is stop- 3 ped. Adjusting the Tilt Telescoping Steering Wheel while the vehicle is in 2. Release the signal stalk. motion could cause loss of control. You would not be able to steer proper- 3. The turn signal will cancel when ly and could have an accident resulting the turn is complete. Vehicles with a PACCAR in death or personal injury. An audible beep is associated with each Transmission time a turn indicator is activated. 1. Push and hold the Tilt This vehicle may be equipped with the Telescopinglever down fully. PACCAR Transmission. The lever on the WARNING 2. Push or pull the steering wheel to right hand side of the steering column will the desired height and angle. operate the transmission functions in addition to operating the engine brake. After you complete a turn, shut the 3. Push the Tilt Telescoping lever system off by returning the lever to the back into the locked position. "OFF" (center) position. Failure to shut off a turn signal could confuse other Controls on the Right Hand of the drivers and result in an accident. An indicator lamp in the instrument panel Steering Column will flash until the turn signal is turned The lever on the right hand side of the off. steering column will operate the engine brake for vehicles with manual transmissions and Allison Automatic transmissions.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 111 CONTROLS - Steering Wheel Controls

Steering Wheel Controls

CAUTION 1 2 Under no circumstances should you 3 attempt to service the steering wheel, clockspring, or any of the electrical wir- ing in the multiplex system, or any steering components (steering column, steering driveline or steering gear). Tampering with these components may result in an inoperable multiplex system. 1. Transmission D - N - R Function 1. Left switch pod The steering wheel contains controls for 2. Up (+) and Down (-) Shift and Low 2. Right switch pod commonly used functions so that the Mode Switches on the left side of the horn pad, operator does not have to take their hands 3. Engine Brake and Max Mode including the toggle switch, manage off of the steering wheel to operate. These vehicle speed functions, cruise control, and 4. Manual (M)/Automatic (A) Mode controls are also used to interface with the Button optional features such as the variable road display. speed limiter (VRSL), adaptive cruise control (ACC), and predictive cruise control (PCC). See Cruise Control on page 142. Switches on the right side control infotainment (see Cab Accessories on page 124) and navigate and configure the instrument cluster (see ) (see Peterbilt Digital Display Controls on page 62).

112 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Door Mounted Mirror Controls

City Horn 2. Mirror adjust 3. Left or right mirror adjust selector Depressing the horn pad in the center of NOTE the steering wheel activates the electric 4. Window controls horn. Look for this symbol on the center If your vehicle is equipped with digital 5. Door lock control pad of the steering wheel. side-view mirrors (option) refer to the Mirror Heat Switch To use the electric horn, press the button in PACCAR Digital Vision System with the center of the steering wheel, which is Mirrors operator's manual. Your vehicle may be equipped with 3 the standard location for electric horns. optional heated mirrors. Mirror heat is Your vehicle may be equipped with controlled by the mirror heat switch button. optional air horns. To operate, pull on the If the vehicle has optional hood-mounted lanyard extending from the overhead heated mirrors, this switch will also activate header panel. heat to those mirrors. If the vehicles has optional LED headlights, this switch will also activate heat to those headlights. Door Mounted Mirror Power Mirror Switch Controls If your vehicle is equipped with power If your vehicle is equipped with power mirrors, the directional controls for both mirrors, the mirror controls will be located mirrors are located near the top of the on the driver-side door pad. Mirrors can be driver-side door trim pad. adjusted in four directions. To provide good Power Door Lock Switch visibility, adjust the mirror so the side of your vehicle appears in the inboard part of Power door lock rocker switches are the mirror. located on the door pads. To lock or unlock both cab doors as well as a sleeper door, depress any door lock switch at the end that displays a closed or open padlock symbol, respectively, on the switch face.

1. Mirror heat

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 113 CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Power Window Switch unintentional adjustments to the mirrors. Power window rocker switches are located WARNING on the door pads. Depress the switch to open the window or pull up on the switch to Convex mirrors can distort images and close the window. Release the switch to make objects appear smaller and far- Heating and Air stop window movement. The driver-side ther away than they really are. You Conditioning 3 window has an express down feature. could have an accident if you are too Pushing on the switch all the way down close to another vehicle or other ob- This vehicle's heating and air conditioning until the switch bumps will activate the ject. Keep plenty of space between system operates in four distinct modes: express down feature. Release the button your vehicle and others when you turn manual, automatic, semi-automatic, and and the window will continue to open until it or change lanes. Remember that other maximum defrost. Each mode provides the is completely open. objects are closer than they may ap- driver with the greatest level of comfort and pear. convenience. How to Use Power Mirror The recommended mode for all conditions 1. Move the Mirror Selector switch Adjustment Switches that do not require windshield defrosting is (3) to the right or left from the the automatic mode. This mode is capable neutral center position to select the of maintaining cab comfort under various desired mirror for adjustment. WARNING driving conditions without driver interaction. 2. Depress the Mirror Directional The cab heater and air conditioner controls Adjusting the mirrors while driving may Control pad (2) in one of its four are located together in the center of the cause you to take your eyes off the arrow directions to adjust the mirror dash just to the right of the steering road, which could result in an accident. in/out or up/down. column. The sleeper heater and air Adjust all mirrors before driving. Fail- 3. To provide good visibility, adjust the conditioner controls are located in the ure to do so could lead to serious in- mirror so the side of your vehicle sleeper cabinet. jury or property damage. appears in the inboard part of the mirror. 4. After mirror adjustments have been completed, return the Mirror Selector switch back (3) to the center (neutral) position to prevent

114 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- longed periods of time is not recom- WARNING tain your vehicle could cause carbon mended. monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in DO NOT drive with visibility reduced death or personal injury. by fog, condensation, or frost on the NOTE windshield. Your view may be ob- scured, which may result in death, per- WARNING Keep the engine exhaust system and 3 sonal injury, equipment or property the vehicle's cab ventilation system damage. For clear visibility and safe Never idle your vehicle for prolonged properly maintained. It is recommend- driving it is extremely important for you periods of time if you sense that ex- ed that the vehicle's exhaust system to follow the instructions pertaining to haust fumes are entering the cab. In- and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- the function and use of the ventilation/ vestigate the cause of the fumes and tent technician every 15,000 miles heating and defogging/defrosting sys- correct it as soon as possible. If the (24,000 km) (2) Whenever a change is tem. If in doubt, consult your dealer. vehicle must be driven under these noticed in the sound of the exhaust Maximum heating output and fast de- conditions, drive only with the windows system (3) Whenever the exhaust sys- frosting can be obtained only after the open. Failure to repair the source of tem, underbody, or cab is damaged. engine has reached operating temper- the exhaust fumes may result in death, ature. personal injury, equipment or property damage. NOTE

WARNING If you are required to idle your vehicle CAUTION for long periods of time, install an aux- Exhaust fumes from the engine con- iliary heater or automatic idle control. tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and Do not stay in the vehicle with the en- These auxiliary devices can reduce odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- gine running or idling for more than 10 fuel consumption and save you mon- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, minutes with the vehicle's Heater and ey. damaged or corroded exhaust system A/C ventilation system in RECIRC or can allow carbon monoxide to enter at LOW FAN SPEED. Even with the the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into ventilation system on, running the en- the cab is also possible from other ve- gine while parked or stopped for pro-

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 115 CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

NOTE Air Conditioner Controls

If you are parked next to idling vehi- cles, move your vehicle or do not stay in your vehicle for prolonged periods of 3 time.

1 2 3 4 5 1. Fan control Dial 2. AUTO mode button 3. Temperature control dial 4. MAX defrost button 5. Air distribution dial 6. Sleeper override button (for vehicles with a sleeper) 7. Temperature sensor 8. Air conditioner button 9. Outside air/ Recirculation air button 9 8 7 6

116 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

Air Conditioning Functions Image Function Image Function Short Description: These symbols for the air conditioner operate various system The button inside the Defrost Vents (and Fresh functions. temperature control dial air intake) engages the A/C compressor. When Panel and Floor Vents activated the indicator on Symbols for the air conditioning the button will illuminate. Panel Vents 3 control panel During AUTO mode, the A/C button indicator will Image Function remain illuminated at all Floor and Defrost Vents times even though the (and Fresh air intake) The source of air entering compressor may be the cab can be set to cycling. either outside air or Max defrost function recirculation air using the button inside the fan speed control dial. How to Manually Control the Cab Recirculated air is Air Conditioner automatically selected in Power to the sleeper Temperature The cab temperature is set using the defrost modes. HVAC unit can be toggled Control Set temperature control dial. The using the button inside the Point operating range is 60°F (16°C) and The fan speed is adjusted air distribution dial. When 84°F (28°C). Adjustments are made by rotating the dial in two degree increments. activated, the indicator on clockwise to increase the button illuminates. The Air The button inside the temperature speed or counterclockwise sleeper HVAC unit will Conditioner control dial engages the A/C to decrease speed. compressor. When activated the function to the settings of indicator on the button will illuminate. Automatic air conditioner the sleeper control. During AUTO mode, the A/C button indicator will remain illuminated at all function Floor Vents times even though the compressor may be cycling.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 117 CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

4. To adjust the air distribution, turn button that enables automatic mode is the Air Distribution dial to labeled AUTO. NOTE distribute cab air as indicated by the dial graphics. Fan Control Dial must also be in the The system will remain in automatic mode 5. Press the Recirculation button to ON position for A/C to be on. A/C en- until the driver adjusts the dials on the use cab air instead of outside air. gages automatically in AUTO, defrost, control. Adjust the temperature knob and and floor/defrost. the system will respond to obtain the 3 selected comfort level as quickly as The air conditioner defaults to Manual The temperature of the air from the vents possible. mode when turned on. The fan speed, air will fluctuate as the vehicle works to temperature, and air outlets are selected achieve the chosen cab temperature. using the dials on the controller. When idling for short periods of time, keep 1. To adjust the fan speed, turn the the fan ON and turn OFF recirculation. Fan Control dial clockwise to For vehicles with a sleeper, the cab control increase speed or can be used to activate/deactivate the counterclockwise to decrease sleeper HVAC using the button inside the speed. mode dial. The cab temperature is set using the 2. To adjust the temperature setting, temperature control dial. The operating range is 60°F (16°C) and 84°F (28°C). turn the Temperature Control dial Auto Mode for the Air Conditioner to the desired temperature. The Adjustments are made in two degree The Auto Mode will manipulate the air system automatically adjusts the increments. distribution, air temperature, fan speed, outlet air temperature to achieve The AUTO function uses a sun light sensor A/C compressor, and cab air recirculation the desired cab temperature. to measure the amount of sunlight entering to achieve the comfort level selected on the cab. This sensor is located at the base 3. Push the Air Conditioner button if the temperature dial. Depending on the the air temperature needs to be of the windshield on the driver’s side of the specific environmental conditions, the air instrument panel. Do not block this sensor. colder, this button will manually temperature can be slightly higher or lower turn on the compressor than the set point. This is a normal function Semi-automatic Mode of the AUTO mode and is not to be During AUTO mode, the operator may mistaken for a malfunctioning system. The override any setting and operate in a semi-

118 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

automatic mode. This can be done via the How to Operate Automatic Cab Air dials and/or buttons on the HVAC control. Conditioner In Semi-automatic mode, the AUTO button Follow these steps to activate the Auto indicator will cease to be illuminated. Mode: Instead, the indicator of the adjusted The air temperature in MAX defrost mode setting will illuminate. For example, if the 1. Press the AUTO button. will be set to the warmest temperature driver adjusts the fan dial while in AUTO 2. Rotate theTemperature Control setting. This setting helps to clear the mode, the fan dial indicator will illuminate dial to the desired temperature. windshield of ice and fog more quickly. 3 and fan speed will adjust to the setting of The system will achieve the comfort level Outside air mode and the air conditioner the dial. However, the temperature and air associated with the temperature selected. compressor are also active to maximize outlet settings will continue to function Cab temperature can be slightly higher or performance. The A/C compressor and automatically. Similarly, if user adjusts the lower than the selected temperature, which recirculation switches are disabled in MAX air distribution setting while in AUTO mode, is a normal when in AUTO mode and Defrost. the air distribution dial indicator will should not be mistaken for a system illuminate and the distribution will adjust to malfunction. Sleeper Control Panel the setting of the dial. The fan and Vehicles with optional sleeper units will temperature settings will continue to MAX Defrost Mode have a control panel next to the bunk to function automatically. The heating and air conditioning system Economy Function provides for one touch windshield defrosting. Certain driving conditions will An economy function is also available in cause fog or ice to form on the windshield. Semi-automatic mode. In this mode, the By pressing the MAX defrost button, the system will operate in AUTO mode without system will automatically adjust the blower the use of the A/C compressor. The speed, recirculation, air temperature, and operator may select economy by initiating air outlet distribution to maximize clearing AUTO mode and then pressing the A/C of the windshield. The system will remain button to disengage the compressor. The in this mode until the driver presses the indicators for A/C compressor and AUTO button again or adjusts the dials. mode do not illuminate while operating in economy mode.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 119 CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

operate various functions from the comfort 4. 12V Power Port OR Cigarette Sleeper Heater and Air Conditioner of the sleeper bed. Lighter (Depending on options Controls (Option) selected) Sleeper Control Panel Unlike the cabin air temperature controls, 5. 12V Power Port the sleeper temperature control will alter 6. 12V Power Port OR USB Charging the air temperature based on the knob Port (Depending on options setting. selected) 1 10 3 7. Digital Alarm Clock OR Digital Alarm Clock with Sleeper Audio Controls (Depending on options selected)

2 9 8. Dome Light Switch 1 2 3 9. HVAC Controls 3 8 1. Air speed 10. SmartAir/Fuel Fired Heater 2. Compressor Controls (Depending on options selected) 3. Temperature adjustment The temperature control is not keyed to 4 7 Optional alert switch not shown. specific temperatures. Turning 5 Alert Switch counterclockwise means cooler than it is now. Clockwise means warmer than it is 6 Alert Switch now. Once the desired temperature is reached, the system will maintain it automatically. A separate switch on the 1. Inverter Control Module dash HVAC unit will send power to the (Depending on options selected) "bunk" or sleeper control unit. The button 2. Point Light Switch (Depending on The alert switch is an optional switch on the cab HVAC unit must be pressed and options selected) mounted in the sleeper control panel. The in the ON mode to use the sleeper 3. Cab Door Lock Switch truck's exterior lights will start flashing and controls. the city horn will sound when this switch is Power to the sleeper HVAC unit can be pressed. toggled using the button inside the air

120 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

distribution dial. When activated, the The manual defrost/defogging mode differs indicator on the button illuminates. The sensor. Avoid hanging items (shirt, from the MAX defrost mode by allowing the sleeper HVAC unit will function to the jacket, hat, etc.) which could block the driver to select an air temperature other settings of the sleeper control. airflow to the sensor. than full heat. This allows the driver to maintain a constant cab temperature while defrosting the windshield. However, note NOTE Air Conditioner Operating Tips that performance may be reduced. • Adjust the fan speed to high by 3 On the Cab Control Unit, the sleeper rotating the fan control dial enable switch must be pressed to turn CAUTION clockwise. ON power to the sleeper control unit. • Set the air distribution dial to the In addition, if air conditioning is re- During extreme cold weather, DO NOT defrost mode setting. This quested in the sleeper, the air condi- blow hot defroster air onto cold wind- automatically engages the outside tioner switch on the cab control unit shields. This could crack the glass. air and the air conditioner will be turned ON and fan in the cab Turn the Air Flow Control Dial to De- compressor. heater and air conditioning unit will be frost and adjust the fan speed accord- turn on low (if it was OFF) automatical- ingly while the engine warms. If the • Adjust the temperature dial to add ly. engine is already warm, move the heat as needed. Temperature Control Dial to "cool," For maximum performance, adjust the then gradually increase the tempera- temperature to maximum heat by rotating NOTE ture when you see that the windshield the temperature dial clockwise. The driver is starting to warm up. Failure to com- may also use the floor/defrost setting on The sensor is located on the sleeper ply may result in equipment damage. the air control HVAC control panel and measures the For Maximum Cooling sleeper air temperature at the panel. Defrosting and Defogging the There will be a time delay between Windshield • Adjust the fan speed to high by temperature control adjustment and rotating the fan control dial The cab windshield and side windows can sleeper air temperature change. Also, clockwise. be cleared of ice and fog in two ways. The be careful of any heat source which first is to use the MAX defrost mode. The • Set the air distribution dial to the could affect the air temperature by the second is to manually adjust the air panel setting. distribution dial to the defrost position.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 121 CONTROLS - Heating and Air Conditioning

• Adjust the air temperature to vents should remain open to allow AUTO maximum cool by rotating the sufficiently to provide required coolant mode to function properly. To maintain the temperature dial counterclockwise. temperatures. selected cab temperature, AUTO mode may provide an air temperature from the • Engage the air conditioner Air Dehumidification compressor by pressing the air vents that differs from the temperature set conditioner button. The air conditioner system can be used to point. To ensure proper operation, it is • Set the air source to recirculation reduce the humidity level of the cab and recommended that the driver redirects the 3 mode by pressing the outside air/ clear fog from the windshield. air instead of adjusting the temperature set recirculation air button. The button • Adjust fan speed to the desired point or closing the vent. The system may indicator light should be airflow setting. have difficulties in obtaining the desired cabin temperature if the temperature illuminated. • Engage the air conditioner setting is repeatedly changed. compressor by pressing the air For Maximum Heating The mode of air distribution inside the cab conditioner button. is set using the air distribution dial. Five • Adjust the fan speed to high by • Set the air source to outside air icons on the dial indicate the primary mode rotating the fan control dial mode by pressing the outside air/ options. The driver may also select a clockwise. recirculation air button. The button secondary mode in between the primary • Set the air distribution dial to the indicator light should NOT be modes indicated by points on the dial. floor setting. illuminated. Airflow is provided to the side windows in • Adjust the air temperature to all modes. maximum heat by rotating the NOTE temperature dial clockwise. Outside Air/Recirculation Air The A/C compressor may not engage Selecting air recirculation mode completely NOTE when the outside temperature is below isolates the cab interior from the outside 34ºF (1ºC). air. This mode is helpful in preventing dust, The engine must be at operating tem- pollen, and odors from entering the cab. perature for maximum heating. If oper- Cab Air Distribution Additionally, recirculation mode can reduce the amount of time needed to cool down ating in AUTO mode, heating airflow is Equal distribution of air is important in not allowed until the engine warms the vehicle while in maximum cool down. maintaining a constant cab interior Note that the mode may increase fogging temperature. For best performance, all on the windshield. A coarse air filter is

122 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Sleeper Alarm Clock

provided for recirculation air and is located 8. Time and Alarm value setting - 1. Press the MODE button until the under the IP. The outside air mode press to change time/date and or screen begins flashing. provides for 100% outside air into the cab. alarm setting 2. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to This mode is helpful with windshield 9. Active alarm icon - alarm is adjust the value. defogging. A pleated air filter located under activated when this icon appears 3. Press the SEL button to adjust the hood provides filtration for dust, pollen, and Turning the Alarm On/Off next setting and use the UP and debris. If equipped, your vehicle may also DOWN buttons to change the provide for ember filtration or fine Press the ALM button to turn the alarm on value. 3 particulate filtration. and off. The icon (9) will illuminate when 4. Repeat this for all settings. The the alarm is active. When time reaches the alarm clock will scroll in the set time the alarm will ring. If the SNZ following order each time you press Sleeper Alarm Clock button is not pressed, the alarm will the SEL button. continue ringing for 15 minutes then will • Year automatically stop. Pressing any other • Month button except SNZ (2) will turn the alarm off. • Day • Hours Snooze Operation • Minutes 1. Alarm - press to turn on the alarm When the alarm is ringing press the SNZ 5. Press the MODE button once you 2. Snooze - press to snooze the button (2) to silence the alarm for 9 have set the minutes which will exit alarm bell minutes. The small bell icon (9) will flash and save your settings. 3. Dimmer/brighter - press to make until the alarm is shut off. The SNZ button display brighter can be used as many times as desired. Set the Sleeper Clock Alarm 4. Dimmer/darker - press to make Dim Control Operation display less bright 1. Press the MODE button twice until the screen displays the AL icon. 5. Increase value of setting Press the DIM+ or DIM-buttons (3, 4) to 2. Use the UP and DOWN buttons to 6. Decrease value of setting change the brightness of the display. adjust the setting. 7. Select - press to choose the setting 3. Press the SEL button to adjust the being changed while adjusting the Set the Sleeper Alarm Clock Time next setting and use the UP and either the time or the alarm

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 123 CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

DOWN buttons to change the Right Switch Pod (Infotainment) Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray setting. (Option) 4. Repeat this for all areas. The alarm 5 6 1 clock will scroll in the following NOTE order each time you press the SEL button. The 12V accessory power port will op- • Hours erate with the ignition key in either the 3 • Minutes OFF, ACC (accessory), or ON position. 5. To exit and save your settings, press the MODE button once you This vehicle comes standard with two have set the minutes. cupholders and power ports located in the center of the dashboard. This vehicle may have the optional ashtray insert (for the cupholder) and the optional cigarette Cab Accessories lighter instead of a power port. To operate, push in on the knob end of the lighter. After Radio (Option) a few moments, the lighter will automatically pop out, glowing hot and Your vehicle has one of two stereo ready to use. After use, insert the lighter systems. An AM/FM stereo receiver is back into the socket without pushing all the standard equipment and may have a 4 3 2 way in. The socket of the cigarette lighter combination of CD, satellite radio, USB may be used to operate 12V, 15 amp media, or Bluetooth. A stereo system 1. Volume increase appliances, such as a hand spotlight or integrated with GPS navigation and 2. Mute small vacuum cleaner. telematics is also available (option). For 3. Volume decrease instructions on how to operate your particular radio, see the supplemental 4. Previous/cancel operating manual for those units. 5. Media source Controls for the infotainment system are 6. Next track located on the Right Switch Pod of the steering wheel.

124 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

using. Failure to comply may result in CAUTION death, personal injury, equipment or WARNING property damage. Do not attempt to operate a cigarette DO NOT carry loose objects in your lighter using the 12V power port recep- Glove Box cab, it can be dangerous. In a sudden stop, or even going over a bump in the tacle. A cigarette lighter inserted into A glove box is provided to store important road, they could fly through the air and the 12V power port will heat up and be documents, the vehicle literature set 3 strike you or a passenger. You could expelled into the cab, potentially caus- (including this Operator's Manual), and be injured or even killed. Secure all ing personal injury, fire, and property other related materials. You can choose loose objects in the cab before moving damage. from a variety of other interior storage the vehicle. Carry any heavy objects options to store your personal supplies or such as luggage in the exterior storage small tools: WARNING compartment and close it securely. • center console DO NOT place paper or other combus- • map pocket on the door Appliances • overhead storage compartments tible substances in an ashtray, it could If your vehicle is equipped with a television, cause a fire. Keep all burnable materi- or other appliance, be sure they are als, besides smoking materials, out of WARNING compatible with your vehicle's electrical the ashtray. Failure to comply may re- system. Secure them in the cab so they sult in death, personal injury, equip- DO NOT drive with the glove box cannot come loose in a sudden stop. ment or property damage. open, it can be dangerous. In an acci- dent or sudden stop, you or a passen- WARNING ger could be thrown against the cover and be injured. To reduce the risk of personal injury during an accident or DO NOT exceed the voltage/amper- sudden stop, keep the glove box age capacity of the accessory power closed when the vehicle is in motion. port. It could result in a fire. Follow all warnings and instructions in the opera- tor's manual for the appliance you are

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 125 CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

strictions could result in a traffic infrac- responsibility to operate the vehicle in WARNING tion. a safe and legal manner. Failure to comply may result in death, personal In a sudden stop or collision a heavy injury, equipment or property damage. object in your cab could strike you or WARNING anyone with you. You could be injured 3 or even killed. Secure any appliance Only glance at the system monitor WARNING (such as a radio, or TV) you add to while driving. Prolonged periods of your sleeper or cab. viewing while driving could result in an Ensure the volume level of all audio accident involving death or personal devices is set to a level that still allows Vehicle Telematic System injury. you to hear outside traffic and emer- gency vehicles. Failure to comply may Your vehicle may be equipped with an result in death, personal injury, equip- onboard telematics system. This system is WARNING ment or property damage. a Global Positioning Satellite (GPS)-linked computer. It receives input from multiple DO NOT program the telematic sys- sources to locate your vehicle. Read and tem while driving. Always stop your ve- understand the Supplemental Telematics CAUTION hicle when programming or changing and Navigation System Owner’s Manual the settings on the telematic system. DO NOT rely on the telematic system and observe the Warnings, Cautions, and Programming the system while driving to route you to the closest emergency Notes that follow before using the system. can cause you to take your eyes off services. Not all emergency services the road, which could result in an acci- are in the database. WARNING dent involving death, personal injury or equipment damage. Verify legal weight and height restric- tions for the route suggested by the telematic system. Failure to verify WARNING height restrictions could lead to caus- ing death, personal injury or property Regardless of how and where the nav- damage. Failure to verify weight re- igation system directs you, it is your

126 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

WARNING NOTE Warning/Informational Screen The map database is the most current available at the time of production. The WARNING DO NOT let this device distract database is designed to provide you you while driving. Always with route suggestions and does not concentrate on your driving. 3 take into account the relative safety of Distractions could cause an a suggested route or of factors that accident resulting in injuries to DO NOT let this device distract may affect the time required to reach you or others. your destination. See the Supplemen- you while driving. Always tal Navigation System Owner’s Manual concentrate on your driving. operate when the truck is for more information. Distractions could cause an moving. accident resulting in injuries to you or others.

Using the Telematic System IMPORTANT Warning/Informational Screen: DO NOT let this device distract you Screen Display On/Off Disclaimer: Map data may be while driving. Always concentrate 1. Press and hold the Power/ inaccurate and navigation routes on you driving. Distractions could Lightbutton for approximately 1 may not be available for larger cause an accident resulting in second. size vehicles. Regardless of how injuries to you or others. 2. After the display has been turned and where the navigation system 3. After reading the information, touch on, the following Warning/ directs you, it is your the T in the upper right corner of Informational screen will appear. responsibility to operate the the screen with your finger vehicle in a safe and legal indicating you acknowledge and manner. Note: Before using this understand the information. The system, read the Owner's Manual menu screen will automatically and learn how it operates. Some appear next. functions of this system will not

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 127 CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

4. To turn the system off, press and desired view. Tighten the screws when the hold the Power/Light button for 3 position is correct. seconds. Disclaimer: The vehicle manufacturer is not responsible for erroneous map data, incorrect routing or any downtime or other 3 damages associated with or arising out of the use of the Navigation System.

Passenger Side 'Down' Mirror A mirror is located above the passenger door that provides a quick view of the blind NOTE spot created by the passenger door.

If your vehicle is equipped with digital side-view mirrors (option) refer to the PACCAR Digital Vision System with Mirrors operator's manual.

Loosen the screws on the top of the mirror to rotate the mirror up or down to get the

128 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) CONTROLS - Cab Accessories

3

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 129 DRIVING -

Chapter 4 | DRIVING

Starting and Operating...... 131 Starting and Warming Up...... 131 Engine Operations...... 135 4 Driver Assistance...... 141 Transmission...... 153 Brakes...... 159 Axle and Suspension...... 170 Trailer Operations...... 177 Driving Tips and Techniques...... 181 What to Consider when using a Sleeper Bunk...... 184 Stopping the Vehicle...... 185

130 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Starting and Operating

Anti-theft Starting and Operating When enabled, the engine cannot be Starting and Warming Up started until the correct passcode has been Since each vehicle is custom-equipped, all entered. engine operation instructions in this How to Start Vehicle in Normal manual are general. You will want to Weather consult the manual for your engine to find NOTE out details about your specific engine’s needs. You may need to use a slightly Be aware that enabling Anti-theft will CAUTION different procedure from the one outlined require drivers that share this vehicle here. to enter a passcode prior to starting Never operate the starter motor while 4 the Engine, entering the Settings sub- the engine is running. The starter and menu (where Anti-theft can be disa- flywheel gears could clash or jam, se- Systems Check Summary bled), or altering the Favorites View. verely damaging them. System Check Display with TPMS If after five minutes the engine hasn’t been started, the passcode must be reentered – NOTE this precaution can be postponed in one 105 84 105 105 105 96 105 105 minute intervals by using any steering Some starters are equipped with over- 1 2 3 4 5 wheel switch. If Anti-theft is disabled and crank protection. Check the Engine 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 then re-enabled in Settings, the passcode Operation and Maintenance Manual used prior to being disabled is still the for details. Once the Systems Check has completed, passcode. Anti-theft allows for only one the results will display in a summary. A passcode per vehicle. When the outside temperature is above detailed explanation of this summary can 50°F (10°C), you can use the following be viewed by accessing the Menu after a procedure. If Anti-Theft is enabled, the first Systems Check has completed. time you turn the ignition switch to START, you will need to enter the Passcode. 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Put your main transmission in Neutral.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 131 DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

3. Disengage (depress) the clutch 7. Slowly engage (release) the clutch DO NOT start the engine with the heater (with manual transmission). after the engine has started. plugged in. 4. Turn the ignition switch to START. 8. Wait for the oil pressure gauge to reach normal operating pressure WARNING before operating the vehicle or NOTE idling faster than 1,000 rpm. Engine block heaters can cause fires If Anti-Theft is enabled, you will need which may result in property damage, to enter the Passcode in order to start Tips to Remember When Starting personal injury, or death if not properly the engine (see Anti-Theft). Vehicle in Cold Weather maintained and operated. Regularly in- spect the engine block heater wiring 4 5. If the engine does not start within If you follow a few simple guidelines, you will extend the service life of your engine: and connector for damaged or frayed 30 seconds, release the ignition wires. DO NOT use the heater if there • Keep the electrical system in top switch. To avoid overtaxing the are any signs of problems. Contact condition. starter motor or the batteries, don’t your authorized dealer or the manufac- use the starter for more than 30 • Use the best quality fuel of the turer of the heater if you are in need of seconds. Let the starter motor cool recommended grade. repairs or information. and the batteries recover for two • Use recommended engine minutes before trying again. If the lubricating oil. engine still won’t start after a • For manual transmissions and CAUTION couple of tries, check the fuel lines auxiliary transmissions, leave the for possible fuel starvation or air transmission in neutral and allow Always unplug heater before starting leaks. Starting failure may mean the transmission lubricating oil to the engine. Damage to the cooling fuel is not reaching the injectors. warm up (approximately 3-5 system could occur if the heater is not 6. As soon as the engine starts, begin minutes) before operating vehicle. turned OFF (unplugged). to watch the oil pressure gauge. Check your engine manufacturer’s Engine Block Heater (Option) Depending on engine make, when the manual for the right pressure for To preheat the engine before starting, plug temperature falls below -10°F (-24°C), the your engine. If the oil pressure the optional engine block heater into a block heater is required. doesn’t rise within a few seconds, properly grounded AC electrical source. stop the engine. Find out what is wrong before restarting the engine.

132 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

Engine, Under Hood Air Intake 1. After you’ve started your engine, 3. Continue the engine warm-up until This switch opens a door in the engine air idle it at approximately 600 rpm the coolant temperature reaches at filter housing so that the air is taken from while you check: least 130°F (54°C). At this under the hood instead of outside air. This • Oil pressure temperature, you can use partial switch can be useful when starting the throttle. Wait until the coolant • Air pressure vehicle in cold weather conditions. temperature is at least 160°F • Alternator output (71°C) before operating at full 2. After a few minutes of idling at 600 throttle. rpm, increase your idle speed to 900 or 1,000 rpm. Continue your warm-up. This procedure allows oil NOTE 4 to warm and flow freely while pistons, liners, shafts, and bearings Under most circumstances, idling your CAUTION expand slowly and evenly. In engine for long periods merely wastes extremely cold temperatures, you fuel. In severe arctic weather condi- Only operate the under hood intake air may have to increase idle speed. tions, however, you may need longer switch when outside temperatures are idling to be sure all parts of your en- gine are fully lubricated. below 32°F (0°C). Engaging the under NOTE hood air intake while temperatures are above freezing may result in engine In colder climates where the tempera- damage. ture is often below freezing, the warm- up for turbocharged engines is espe- cially important. Chilled external oil Engine Warm Up lines leading to the turbocharger will Engine warm-up allows oil film to be slow the oil flow until the oil warms, re- established between pistons and liners, ducing oil available for the bearings. shafts and bearings while your engine Watch the engine oil temperature or gradually reaches operating temperature. pressure gauge for a warming trend before increasing engine idle speed (rpm).

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 133 DRIVING - Starting and Warming Up

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

Exhaust fumes from the engine con- To reduce the chance of personal in- DO NOT allow your engine to idle, at tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and jury, vehicle damage, and/or death low rpm (400-600 rpm), longer than odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- from overheated engines, which can five minutes. Long periods of idling af- gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, result in a fire, never leave the engine ter the engine has reached operating damaged, or corroded exhaust system idling without an alert driver present. If temperatures can decrease engine can allow carbon monoxide to enter the engine does overheat, as indicated temperature and cause gummed pis- the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into by the engine coolant temperature ton rings, clogged injectors, and possi- 4 the cab is also possible from other ve- lamp, immediate action is required to ble engine damage from lack of lubri- hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- correct the condition. Continued unat- cation. The normal torsional vibrations tain your vehicle could cause carbon tended operation of the engine, even generated can also cause transmis- monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in for a short time, may result in serious sion wear. personal injury or death. engine damage or a fire. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage. NOTE WARNING Keep the engine exhaust system and Never idle your vehicle for prolonged CAUTION the vehicle's cab ventilation system periods of time if you sense that ex- properly maintained. It is recommend- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- The use of a winterfront can result in ed that the vehicle's exhaust system vestigate the cause of the fumes and excessive coolant, engine oil, and in- and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- correct it as soon as possible. If the take air temperatures, which may lead tent technician every 15,000 miles vehicle must be driven under these to overheating and possible engine (24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change conditions, drive only with the windows damage. is noticed in the sound of the exhaust open. Failure to repair the source of system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust the exhaust fumes may result in death, system, underbody, or cab is dam- personal injury, equipment or property aged. damage.

134 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Engine Operations

b. Put the auxiliary transmission NOTE in Neutral. This will allow the transmission countershaft to Engine Operations If you are parked next to idling vehi- turn, agitating the oil and cles, move your vehicle or do not stay warming it. Indicators around the speedometer in your vehicle for prolonged periods of Indicators around the Speedometer time.

How to Warm Up the Transmission In cold weather (below 32°F (0°C), you 4 may find shifting sluggish when you first M start up. Transmission warm-up is A X especially important at this time, but it is always a good idea to warm-up your transmission before starting out on the road. To warm-up the transmission lubricating oil during engine warm-up, with a single transmission (manual and automatic): 1. Put the transmission in Neutral. 2. Release the clutch pedal (manual only) and operate the transmission in neutral for 3 to 5 minutes prior to operating the transmission in either forward or reverse range. 1. Engine Brake 3. If you have a two-transmission 2. Speed Limit (Option – see Lane combination: Departure) a. Put the main transmission in 3. Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise gear. (Option), Predictive Cruise (Option)

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 135 DRIVING - Engine Operations

4. Power Take Off Position Amount of Engine Brake Engine Brake Operation Position Amount of Engine 2 66% Brake 3 100% Off 0%

1 33% Engine Brake Operation for a Vehicle with Automated 2 66% Transmission 4 3 100%

4* 100% AND will engage transmission low Moving the lever clockwise will engage the gear engine brake. Increase the amount of engine brake by moving the lever further *This position is momentary and will clockwise. Each position has a revert back to position 3 when the lever is corresponding level of engine brake. released.

The corresponding engine brake level (or MAX mode) will be illuminated in the Position Amount of Engine instrument cluster. Brake

Off 0%

1 33%

136 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Engine Operations

Engine Brake Operation for a Position Amount of Engine Brake shifter to move back up to the Vehicle with Automated previous location Transmission 2 66% MAX mode is now active and the instrument display will show the indicator in 3 100% the view. 4* 100% AND will engage transmission low gear How to Deactivate MAX Mode Vehicles with automated transmissions will * This position is momentary have the engine brake function integrated and will revert back to position with the transmission controls. Follow 3 when the lever is released. 4 these steps to deactivate MAX engine brake mode. The corresponding engine brake level (or 1. Accelerate with the throttle pedal. MAX mode) will be illuminated in the 2. Upshift,Up or Down Shifting on instrument cluster. page 157 see . Related tasks 3. Wait for the transmission coast down gear to engage. How to Activate MAX Mode 4. Reduce engine brake level. Moving the lever clockwise will engage the Vehicles with PACCAR automated or engine brake. Increase the amount of Eaton Endurant transmsission have a MAX 5. Re-initiate MAX mode. engine brake by moving the lever further mode. Use this operation when the 6. Select Neutral N, see Drive Neutral clockwise. Each position has a situation requires 100% eninge brake and Reverse Selector on page 158. corresponding level of engine brake. additional resistance from using the low 7. Select LOW mode. gear of the transmission. Position Amount of Engine Brake 1. Move the Transmission Shifter to the 3rd position, representing Off 0 % 100% engine brake. 2. Pull the Transmission Shifter 1 33% down once more and allow the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 137 DRIVING - Engine Operations

Engine Brake Indicator 1. Press the Cruise Control ON/OFF. following information below provides the The white FIC indicator will appear basic process of enabling and activating Engine Brake Icon (1 bar) near the Speedometer/ PTO engine speed control, and what the Tachometer, indicating the FIC is operator should observe during this

M enabled. process. A X 2. To set the FIC speed Engine Brake Icon (3 bar+MAX) • Press RES – to resume last NOTE used FIC speed, or • Use the Accelerator to increase M Actual PTO engagement/disengage- A RPM, then press SET +, or 4 X ment may be delayed momentarily The vertical bars represent the amount of • Press and hold SET + to since it is controlled by the air system engine brake, up to and including MAX increase and set the new FIC and mechanical movement. mode. When Engine Braking is active, the speed, or indicator will change from white to green. • Press and hold RES – to reduce FIC speed, then press CAUTION How to change Fast Idle Control SET +. (FIC) Speed Increasing engine rpm before the PTO The FIC indicator will turn green, is actually engaged could prevent the The truck must be stationary, the signifying that the FIC is activated. PTO from engaging and/or cause PTO transmission in Neutral, and the Park damage. Brake set. How to Start the PTO PTO Mode can be activated in a number of 1. Toggle the PTO ON/OFF switch, or CAUTION different ways. If your vehicle is equipped the Dash PTO Mode Control with the MX engine, PTO Mode is typically Switch, to the ON position. Text indicating PTO engagement and/or Do not let the engine RPM operate be- activated by engaging a PTO, or by using PTO Mode control location will yond the maximum governed RPM. the Dash PTO Mode Control Switch. For appear inside the speedometer. Operating the engine above the maxi- the Cummins engine, PTO Mode is (Vehicles equipped with a PACCAR mum governed RPM may result in En- typically activated by engaging a PTO, or or Eaton automated transmission gine damage. by setting the Cruise Control Switch to ON but while the vehicle is stationary. The will display the letters AN in the

138 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Engine Operations

transmission gear indicator when display a green PTO indicator with operation is controlled by the engine the PTO is engaged). a target PTO engine speed. computer. 2. Press the Cruise Control (CC) 5. To increase or decrease PTO ON/OFF switch to enable PTO engine speed use a combination of WARNING speed control operations. A white short and long presses of the SET speed control enabled icon will + and RES - buttons located on the DO NOT work on or near the fan with appear. steering wheel (the cruise control the engine running. Anyone near the buttons when the vehicle is 3. Optional: If your PTO has engine fan when it turns on could be moving). designated PTO presets located on injured. If it is set at MANUAL, the fan the dash: Vehicles powered with PACCAR MX will turn on any time the ignition key 4 • If you have dash mounted PTO Engines will display the PTO engine speed switch is turned to the ON position. In preset switches, toggle the above the PTO indicator. AUTO, it could engage suddenly with- desired PTO Preset switch, or PTO Active Gauge out warning. Before turning on the igni- • Using the dash mounted tion or switching from AUTO to MAN- PRESET Increment and UAL, be sure no workers are near the Decrement switch, cycle fan. Failure to comply may result in through the PTO presets to death or personal injury. select the desired preset. PTO Speed Control is now active. Vehicles with an MX engine will CAUTION display a green PTO indicator with a target PTO engine speed. DO NOT operate the engine fan in the 4. Optional: If you don't have dash MANUAL position for extended peri- mounted PTO preset switches, Engine Fan Control ods of time. The fan hub was designed press the SET + and RES – The engine fan switch on the dash has a for intermittent operation. Sustained buttons located on the steering manual and an automatic mode. In the operation will shorten the fan hub’s wheel to command a desired manual mode, the engine fan will engage service life as well as reduce fuel engine speed. until the switch is back into automatic economy. PTO Speed Control is now active. mode. In automatic mode, the engine fan Vehicles with an MX engine will

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 139 DRIVING - Engine Operations

as the ambient temp reaches 41°F CAUTION (5°C). The use of a winterfront above WARNING 40°F (4°C) can result in excessive The fan or equipment near it could be coolant, engine oil, and intake air tem- Never idle your vehicle for prolonged damaged if the fan turns on suddenly peratures, which may lead to over- periods of time if you sense that ex- when you do not expect it. Keep all heating and possible engine or coolant haust fumes are entering the cab. In- tools and equipment away from the module damage and emissions non- vestigate the cause of the fumes and fan. compliance. correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these 4 The winterfront is designed to minimize the conditions, drive only with the windows Using a Winterfront temperature differences across the radiator open. Failure to repair the source of and reduce the possibility of cooling the exhaust fumes may result in death, module damage. Aftermarket winterfronts personal injury, equipment or property CAUTION may not provide the proper airflow damage. distribution and could cause cooling The use of a winterfront can result in module damage. excessive coolant, engine oil, and in- CAUTION take air temperatures, which may lead How to Set the Shutdown Timer DO NOT idle the engine for excessive- to overheating and possible engine The Shut Down Timer must first be ly long periods. Long periods of idling, damage. enabled. Enabling the shutdown timer is more than 10 minutes, can cause poor located in the Settings Sub-menu. engine performance. Follow these steps to turn on the engine CAUTION idle shutdown timer. The shutdown timer 1. Using the Scroll Wheel, target the will default to 5 minutes (or the last value number of minutes and press A winterfront should only be used at used) and can be set up to 30 minutes Select. temperatures below 40°F (4°C). Use unless limited by the Engine Shutdown of a winterfront above 40°F (4°C) can System (Clean Idle on page 314) 2. Back to return to the Settings decrease life of cooling module com- menu. ponents. Remove winterfront as soon

140 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Engine Aftertreatment System headlamps. The operator can resolve and vehicle for more detailed description of reset the alert by performing a parked functionality and warnings. regeneration. Alternatively, the notification can be dismissed by pressing the clutch or the service brake. Dismissing the alert does not reset it, the next alert will occur at Driver Assistance the next higher soot level if a parked Driver Assistance (or Advanced Driver- regeneration is never performed. assistance Systems (ADAS)) defines a Engine Aftertreatment System Detail variety of electronic features which assist the operator while driving. These features use automated technology to improve 4 3 operator and vehicle safety by alerting the This vehicle has an Engine Aftertreatment operator (and in some cases taking System (EAS), to control vehicle exhaust 2 actions) to the driving environment. The emissions. The Engine Aftertreatment 1 Driver Assistance features use electronic system consist of a Diesel Particulate Filter and hardware improvements in order to (DPF), Selective Catalyst Reduction accomplish this task: cameras, radar, (SCR), DPF Switch and warning lights. The sensors, driving automation, and in-cab DPF will trap soot from the engine exhaust notifications. gases. The SCR uses Diesel Exhaust Fluid The features described in this section to reduce the levels of NOx in the engine 4 should supplement the explanations, exhaust. The EAS will periodically clean warnings, and preventative maintenance information located in the ADAS OEM (regenerate) the DPF. 1. Hydrocarbon doser from turbo Your vehicle may be equipped with an operator’s manuals for the equipment 2. Aftertreatment unit (DPF, DEF additional feature designed to alert a particular to the vehicle. It is important that doser and SCR) remote operator that the aftertreatment the operator familiarize themselves with system requires a regeneration. When the 3. Filtered/treated exhaust the OEM manuals associated with their EAS detects a heavily loaded DPF it will 4. Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank ADAS equipment prior to driving the sound the city horn for 10 seconds while Please refer to the Engine Aftertreatment vehicle. continuously flashing the vehicle System Supplement provided with the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 141 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Product Feature engine manual included with your vehicle. ZF WABCO™ Advanced Driver- This vehicle's electronic system will assistance Systems (ADAS) Speed Limit perform a ‘rationality check’ every time the Recognition vehicle is started. This check is to ensure that the service brakes are working before Product Feature Highway Departure allowing cruise control to function. This Braking safety feature is designed to ensure that a ™ Lane Departure ZF WABCO driver is able to cancel the cruise set speed Warning (LDW) Lane Departure OnLane ALERT by using the service brake pedal. The Warning (LDW) ZF WABCO™ Adaptive Cruise system will not allow cruise control 4 OnGuard ACTIVE Control (ACC) operation if it does not pass the ‘rationality check.’ The display will prompt you to Collision Mitigation press the service brake pedal if it has not Cruise Control been pressed since the vehicle has been started. In vehicles with Eaton transmissions, the cruise control switches WARNING may be located on the shift control knob. Bendix™ Advanced Driver- assistance Systems (ADAS) DO NOT operate the cruise control when operating on road surfaces with Product Feature poor traction (wet, icy, or snow cov- ered roads) or in heavy traffic. Acceler- Bendix™ Wingman Adaptive Cruise ations caused by the normal operation Advanced Control (ACC) of the cruise control could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting Collision Mitigation in an injury accident. ™ Adaptive Cruise Bendix Wingman Cruise control functions and features may Control (ACC) Fusion vary depending upon which engine you Collision Mitigation have. For a specific explanation of your cruise control, see the cruise control or

142 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

The left switch pod on the steering wheel 4. Cruise Control (CC) SET+ and The indicator will appear white when the contain buttons for the cruise control. RES- system is on and it will appear green when

Left Switch Pod 5. Toggle the cruise control set speed is active. For The switches on the left side of horn pad more information see Cruise Control on manage vehicle speed functions like cruise page 142. control and variable road speed limiter How to Use Set Cruise Control (option). If the vehicle has adaptive cruise Speed When Driving 4 5 1 2 control (option), predictive cruise control These instructions DO NOT apply to (option), etc., the toggle switch is also used Adaptive Cruise Control. While the buttons to operate that system. are also used to control PTO operations, these instructions are specifically for 4 Cruise Control Indicator vehicle speed. The vehicle speed must be greater than 19 mph (30 kph) for PACCAR powered vehicles or 30 mph (49 kph) for Cummins powered vehicles and the engine speed must be over 1,100 rpm for the cruise set speed to work. This indicator shows the operator which To Set the Cruise Speed Cruise Control function is currently enabled 1. Turn the cruise function on by or active. This includes: using the ON/OFF button • Cruise Control The cruise icon will appear in the • Adaptive Cruise Control (optional) display. • Predictive Cruise Control (optional)

3 NOTE

1. Trip PCC not offered on 1.9m mod- 2. Accelerate the vehicle via 2. Variable Road Speed Limiter els. accelerator pedal to the desired (VRSL) LIM+ and LIM- cruise speed. 3. Cruise Control ON/OFF

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 143 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

3. Press the "SET +" button to set the Canceling and Resuming Cruise braking methods to enforce the limit cruise speed. Control including ignoring further input from the There are four ways to cancel the set accelerator pedal, but will only use engine speed in cruise control: braking if available and enabled. NOTE 1. Tap the brake pedal VRSL replaces the Cruise Control indicator 2. Tap the clutch pedal when active and will show the VRSL limit Cruise Control may not hold the set to the right of the indicator. This limit is speed going down hills. If the speed 3. Turn the cruise control system OFF (ON/OFF button on steering wheel) shown in gray but turns white when increases going down a hill, use the actively limiting vehicle speed. MX 4. Press the Variable Road Speed brakes to slow down. This will cancel engines, additionally, show "LIMITED" on Limit buttons 4 Cruise Control. the speedometer. Using the brake or clutch pedal to cancel When active, the VRSL speed limit can be The cruise set speed will appear in set speed allows the operator to use the changed using the LIM+ and LIM- buttons the display. RESUME feature. Pressing the "- RES" in the right, steering wheel switch pod. See button will resume the vehicle speed How to Set the Variable Road Speed How to Change Cruise Set Speed previously set. The vehicle cruise control must be ON and Limiter. Enabling VRSL will disable Cruise Pressing ON/OFF once will deactivate the cruise speed engaged. Control. cruise control, and pressing it twice will VRSL can be canceled by 1. To increase vehicle speed turn off the system. When turning the • A long press of the Cruise Control • Press or long press SET + until system OFF, the previous set speed is ON/OFF. you reach the desired speed, or removed from memory. The operator will • Use the Accelerator Pedal to have to manually reset the vehicle's cruise • Stopping then parking the vehicle. reach the desired speed, and speed. • Activating the PTO (option) (MX then press the Set + engine only). 2. To decrease vehicle speed, press Variable Road Speed Limiter or long press RES – until you (option) How to Set the Variable Road achieve the desired speed, and Speed Limiter The Variable Road Speed Limiter (VRSL) then press SET +. The Variable Road Speed Limiter (VRSL) prevents the vehicle from exceeding a cannot establish a limit while the parking The new cruise speed can be seen next to chosen vehicle speed limit. This limit is brake is set or the PTO is in operation. The the Cruise Control Indicator. selected by the operator and can be minimum VRSL setting is 25 mph (40 kph). changed while driving. VRSL uses various

144 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Enabling VRSL will disable Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control (Option) if Cruise Control is active. WARNING 1. Press the Cruise Control ON/OFF button in the left, steering wheel WARNING Driver Assistance features respond dif- switch pod. The driver must remain alert, react ap- ferently to specific road, weather, and propriately, and use safe driving practi- traffic conditions. The operator must ces while using this Driver Assistance read the ADAS operator’s manual as- feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe sociated with this feature and under- operation of the vehicle remains with stand how it responds to these specific Indicates that the VRSL feature is the driver at all times. Failure to do so conditions prior to driving the vehicle. 4 awaiting input. may result in death, personal injury, or Failure to do so may result in death, personal injury, or property damage. 2. Press, or press and hold, LIM+ or property damage. LIM- to incrementally, or Following Distance Five Bars continuously, raise or lower the VRSL limit. WARNING The green VRSL indicator will The driver must remain visually aware replace the Cruise Control of the roadway and traffic and not rely indicator, indicating that VRSL is solely on Drivers Assistance features enabled. VRSL (like Cruise to identify and respond to the variety of Control) will use the current vehicle When Cruise Control is active, ACC will vehicles or objects sharing the road. speed as the VRSL limit until accelerate and slow the truck to maintain a The driver must read the ADAS opera- changed. chosen distance from a detected forward tor’s manual associated with this fea- Pressing either LIM+ or LIM- will adjust the vehicle. Collision Mitigation will attempt to ture and understand its limitations prior VRSL limit while this feature is active. prevent a forward collision when advancing to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so at speeds greater than 15 mph (24 kph). may result in death, personal injury, or Please review the ACC section of this property damage. manual, and the manufacturer’s manual, prior to driving this vehicle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 145 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Adaptive Cruise Display Following Distance One Bar The display area for Active Cruise will Following Distance Alerts contain dynamic visuals related to whether The display will be white when the tracked a tracked vehicle is in front and the amount vehicle in front is at a proper following of following distance set for Active Cruise. distance. If the following distance It will show an outline of a car in the display decreases (less than 1.5 seconds), the area when the radar is tracking a vehicle. following distance bars will turn amber. Once it locks on to a tracked vehicle, it will Five bars represents a farther distance. When the following distance decrease display horizontal bars to represent the Following Distance Five Bars more (0.5 seconds), the following distance amount of following distance from the bars will turn red. 4 tracked vehicle. Once it locks and tracks a target vehicle, the system will adjust the Object Detected Alert speed to accommodate the speed of the When Collision Mitigation instrumentation tracked vehicle in front of it. detects a roadway object not recognized

No Tracked Vehicle as a vehicle, the following graphic will See Set ACC Following Distance on page show in the Driver Assistance area of the 146. Digital Display:

Adaptive Cruise - Object Detected Set ACC Following Distance Follow these steps to adjust the following The operator can set the amount of distance for Adaptive Cruise Control: following distance from the tracked vehicle. 1. Press the Toggle until the following There are five preset distances to choose distance bars illuminate in the view. from, represented by horizontal bars between the hood and the forward car. If the vehicle has Predictive Cruise Control, Because ACC doesn't classify the forward One bar represents the nearest following you may have to press multiple times to object as a vehicle, Collision Mitigation distance. cycle through the other settings for PCC. braking will not occur (see Collision 2. Rotate the Toggle up or down to Mitigation); instead, this graphic is choose the amount of following accompanied by an audible alert, allowing distance. the operator to decide how to best respond 3. Push the Toggle again to set the to the detected object. following distance.

146 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

For more information on the characteristics Mitigation will apply the service brakes and of the Adaptive Cruise Control feature, may result in death, personal injury, or present the following warning in the Driver please read the ADAS OEM Operator’s property damage. Assistance area of the display (see Manual specific for your vehicle. Minimized View with Driver Assistance) along with an audible warning: WARNING Collision Mitigation BRAKE Driver Assistance features respond dif- WARNING ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must The driver must remain alert, react ap- read the ADAS operator’s manual as- Additionally, this popup will appear 4 propriately, and use safe driving practi- sociated with this feature and under- instructing the operator to take control: ces while using this Driver Assistance stand how it responds to these specific feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe conditions prior to driving the vehicle. operation of the vehicle remains with Failure to do so may result in death, the driver at all times. Failure to do so personal injury, or property damage. may result in death, personal injury, or property damage. Collision Mitigation (also Automated Collision Mitigation should not be used to Emergency Braking) will attempt to prevent stop or slow the vehicle without operator or lessen the impact of a forward collision intervention. A Collision Mitigation braking WARNING where Collision Mitigation has determined event will temporarily disable both ACC impact with a vehicle is likely. Although the and standard Cruise Control, requiring The driver must remain visually aware Driver Assistance instrumentation can these features to be reactivated by the of the roadway and traffic and not rely detect a non-vehicular, forward object, only operator. solely on Drivers Assistance features a recognized vehicle can trigger Collision Collision Mitigation will continue to slow the to identify and respond to the variety of Mitigation. vehicle until the potential for a collision has vehicles or objects sharing the road. Unlike Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), been averted, whether the potential The driver must read the ADAS opera- Collision Mitigation is always on (at speeds collision be the vehicle that triggered the tor’s manual associated with this fea- greater than 15mph) and does not depend braking event or another forward vehicle ture and understand its limitations prior on Cruise Control being active. When the system has determined may likely to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so Collision Mitigation determines that a result in an impact. The operator can forward vehicular impact is likely, Collision cancel the braking event by using either

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 147 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

the accelerator pedal or the service brake. This lets Collision Mitigation know that the traffic in front of the ACC equipped triggering event has been acknowledged. NOTE truck. To prevent abuse of this emergency feature, after three Collision Mitigation There are many other factors that may braking events, ACC and Collision influence the overall fuel economy of PCC Behavior Mitigation will be disabled until the next your vehicle (i.e., head wind and slope As the vehicle approaches the top of a hill, time the ignition switch is cycled. This is to terrain, etc.). PCC will decrease the vehicle speed (up to prevent using Collision Mitigation 8%below the set speed) to prevent the irresponsibly or in a manner for which it Predictive Cruise Control operates similarly vehicle from exceeding the set speed while 4 was not intended. Please read the ADAS to standard cruise control. With PCC, traveling downhill. This will result in a operator’s manual specific for your vehicle vehicle speed is maintained without smoother, more fuel efficient ride as the to become familiar with the limitations of holding down the accelerator and can be vehicle approaches the crest of the hill. Collision Mitigation (Automated Emergency used at 19 mph (30 km/h) or more. Once over the crest, momentum takes over Braking). PCC will also actively recalculate and and the system allows a predetermined change the target cruising speed for best amount of speed over the set speed. fuel economy rather than maintaing a PCC can also activate Neutral Coast (NC) Predictive Cruise Control (Option) constant set speed. The range of the PCC mode. NC mode disengages the vehicle's target cruise speed is defined by an driveline, reducing fuel consumption while overshoot and undershoot speed values. maintaining overall vehicle speed. Once These values are adjustable by the the vehicle can no longer maintain speed operator. while coasting, NC is deactivated and the Predictive Cruise Control (PCC) uses driveline re-engages. satellite technology and GPS maps to look If the driver has activated one of the at upcoming roads to dynamically calculate NOTE vehicle's retarder systems (Engine, optimal fuel-efficient speed over a given transmission, or driveline), the vehicle terrain. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has the speed may increase until it reaches the ability to override Eco cruise. This is cruise control set speed plus the retarder because ACC is designed to deceler- offset. For more information about engine ate the vehicle to match the speed of retarders, see your vehicle Operator's Manual.

148 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

If the vehicle drops outside the speed When this happens, the vehicle will revert Fuel Economy Savings Not range, PCC will accelerate the vehicle to standard cruise control. This CC state Achieved back to the minimum PCC speed. will be standard cruise control which will Certain conditions may cause the optimal As the vehicle reaches flat ground after the maintain the same cruise speed that was vehicle speed, calculated by PCC, to be hill, PCC will maintain the set-speed until selected for PCC. overruled. For example, PCC will be the crest of the next hill. Once the system regains GPS signal and overruled in the following scenarios: If the vehicle is equipped with Adaptive road data, PCC will resume. • Greenhouse Gas functionality Cruise Control (ACC) and senses traffic • Adaptive Cruise Control Following slowing, it will overrule PCC and slow the Event (if equipped) vehicle. This event will cancel PCC only if NOTE the service brakes are required to slow the • Adaptive Cruise Control Error State 4 vehicle. If the service brakes are not used PCC Map coverage will include most (if equipped) by ACC to maintain a safe following interstate and state highways. If you distance, PCC will remain engaged and happen to leave a supported roadway, Disabling Predictive Cruise Control resume automatically after the ACC event. the PCC will deactivate. Standard To disable PCC and enable standard cruise control will automatically step in cruise control, the truck must be taken to to maintain the vehicle speed. an authorized dealer. NOTE Software Information PCC was calibrated using a loaded ve- Troubleshooting The PCC ECU Software version and Map hicle. Your results may vary, depend- The display will show a message if it Data Version number can be found in the ing on your vehicle's configuration. detects an error with the PCC system. Menu Truck Information on page 77. . It PCC faults may result from the may take up to two minutes for this unavailability of map, slope, vehicle information to be displayed after the truck PCC Interrupt position, etc. To effectively diagnose and has been keyed-on. There are three conditions that will clear the fault codes, the truck must be automatically deactivate PCC: taken to your local dealership. • If there is no data for the current PCC Controls road. PCC uses the same buttons as Cruise • If the GPS signal is lost. Control. See Cruise Control on page 142. • If the PCC system detects a fault.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 149 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

PCC Undershoot operation of the vehicle remains with Failure to do so may result in death, Follow these steps to adjust the the driver at all times. Failure to do so personal injury, or property damage. undershoot value for Predictive Cruise may result in death, personal injury, or Control: property damage. Using a windshield-mounted, forward 1. Press the Toggle twice. facing camera, the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) feature monitors the road + WARNING for lane markings and alerts the driver when the vehicle departs its lane without The driver must remain visually aware the use of the turn signal. Lane departure 4 of the roadway and traffic and not rely warning is only active at speeds greater solely on Drivers Assistance features than 37 MPH (60 km/h). - to identify and respond to the variety of The bottom value below the set vehicles or objects sharing the road. speed will illuminate. The driver must read the ADAS opera- 2. Rotate the Toggle up or down to tor’s manual associated with this fea- set the value. ture and understand its limitations prior 3. Push the Toggle again to confirm to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so the value. may result in death, personal injury, or If you want to set the Overshoot value, see property damage. Predictive Cruise Overshoot on page 72.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) WARNING Driver Assistance features respond dif- WARNING ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must LDW is not available when the system The driver must remain alert, react ap- read the ADAS operator’s manual as- cannot accurately detect lane markings; propriately, and use safe driving practi- sociated with this feature and under- therefore, the camera should be clear of ces while using this Driver Assistance stand how it responds to these specific potential obstructions for the LDW feature feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe conditions prior to driving the vehicle. to operate properly.

150 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driver Assistance

The following lists some conditions that • Black lines mean that the LDW Highway Departure Braking can limit the performance of the features feature is disabled. (option) that use the camera: • A yellow line indicates an active • Buildup of dirt, mud, water, snow, lane departure event. WARNING ice, bugs, etc. on the windshield. A lane departure event occurs when the These should be able to be vehicle tire crosses a lane marking without The driver must remain alert, react ap- resolved with proper use of the the use of the turn signal. A lane departure propriately, and use safe driving practi- windshield washer/wiper system as event is accompanied by an audible alert. the camera is intentionally installed ces while using this Driver Assistance Lane Departure Active Warning Left in the wiper path. feature. Ultimate responsibility for safe operation of the vehicle remains with • Windshield damage directly in front 4 the driver at all times. Failure to do so of the camera. This should be fixed may result in death, personal injury, or as soon as possible. property damage. • Items on the windshield like stickers, paint, window tint, etc. The LDW feature provides audible and These should not be placed in front visual alerts only and does not attempt to WARNING of the camera. correct the vehicle’s position in the lane. The operator can temporarily disable LDW • Items on the exterior of the truck The driver must remain visually aware (disabling audible and visual alerts) by such as aftermarket visors, wind of the roadway and traffic and not rely using the dash mounted Lane Departure deflectors, hood ornaments, car solely on Drivers Assistance features Warning Disable switch (See Lane racks, crane booms / hooks / to identify and respond to the variety of Departure Warning Disable). buckets, snowplows, mirrors, etc. vehicles or objects sharing the road. For more information on Lane Departure The Driver Assistance area of the Digital The driver must read the ADAS opera- Warning, see the ADAS OEM operator’s Display indicates if the LDW system tor’s manual associated with this fea- manual specific for your vehicle. recognizes lane markings as follows: ture and understand its limitations prior • White lines indicate detected lanes. to driving the vehicle. Failure to do so • Gray lines indicate where the road may result in death, personal injury, or is monitored for lane markings, but property damage. none are detected.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 151 DRIVING - Driver Assistance

Assistance area accompanied by an which it was not intended. Please read the audible alert: ADAS OEM operator’s manual specific for WARNING your vehicle for more information about Highway Departure Braking. Driver Assistance features respond dif- ferently to specific road, weather, and traffic conditions. The operator must Speed Limit Recognition read the ADAS operator’s manual as- Using the forward camera of your Driver sociated with this feature and under- HDB works along with Lane Departure Assistance instrumentation, your vehicle stand how it responds to these specific Warning (LDW). LDW can warn of a can read most North American speed limit 4 conditions prior to driving the vehicle. highway departure prior to the braking signs. The detected, posted speed limit is Failure to do so may result in death, action taken during a HDB event (see Lane presented on the display using a road sign personal injury, or property damage. Departure Warning). located in the Driver Assistance area (see The operator can acknowledge and cancel Minimized View with Driver Assistance): Highway Departure Braking (HDB) will a Highway Departure Braking (HDB) event slow the vehicle when the feature by determines the vehicle has unintentionally • Applying the service brake and left the roadway. HDB is only active at braking more than that applied by When vehicle speed exceeds the posted speeds above 37 mph (60 kph). HDB. speed limit by 5 mph (8 kph) or more, the When the midpoint of the vehicle crosses • Pressing the accelerator pedal and operator is notified using alternating red the solid white, outside lane line (also pressing more than 90% of the and blue “cop” lights, indicating above the called the Fog Line) without use of the turn pedal range. sign on the display. This is accompanied signal or hazards, HDB presumes an • Activating the turn signal. by an audible alert. unplanned road departure and applies the • Activating the hazards. Please read the ADAS OEM operator’s service brakes. HDB will not bring the • Steering the vehicle back into the manual specific for your vehicle for more vehicle to a stop on its own (however, see lane. information about Speed Limit Recognition. Collision Mitigation), but is capable of reducing vehicle speed by up to 30 mph To prevent abuse of this feature, after six (48 kph). Highway Departure Braking events, HDB The digital display will notify the operator of will be disabled until the next time the a Highway Departure Braking event with a ignition switch is cycled. This is to prevent popup and show this graphic in the Driver using HDB irresponsibly or in a manner for

152 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Transmission

• Never slam or jerk the shift lever to other parts and systems are in proper Transmission complete gear engagement. working condition: • Never coast with the transmission 1. For vehicles with a clutch pedal, in neutral and the clutch locate the clutch pedal and engage Transmission Tips disengaged. To provide smooth the clutch brake. gear engagements while shifting, 2. Shift into a low gear. Riding the Clutch use proper coordination between The clutch is not a footrest. DO NOT drive shift lever and clutch. with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It • Double clutching is a very effective CAUTION will allow your clutch to slip, causing means to increase the service life excessive heat and wear, damage could of your transmission. Double Always use first gear or a low speed 4 result. clutching refers to a technique range to start the vehicle in motion. where the clutch pedal is used The use of a higher gear or speed Release Bearing Wear twice per shift instead of once. It range forces undue strain on the en- When you must idle your engine for any also requires that you adjust the gine, clutch, and other transmission period of time, shift your transmission to engine rpm in the middle of the components, and may cause damage. neutral and disengage the clutch (take your shift which ultimately synchronizes 3. Evaluate the road surface foot OFF of the pedal). This helps prevent the gears during shifting. conditions and terrain your vehicle unnecessary wear to your clutch release Synchronizing reduces wear on the is on. Select a gear low enough to bearing, and is less tiring for you, too. gears. let your vehicle start forward with the throttle at idle. More Tips Operating Manual Transmissions 4. Push the parking brake valve • Always use the clutch when The transmission shift pattern for your handle (yellow) against the dash making upshifts or downshifts. vehicle may be located on the shift control panel to release the brakes. • Always select a starting gear that knob. In addition to understanding the shift 5. Release the clutch pedal (manual will provide sufficient gear pattern and its location, you should read only), then gradually accelerate to reduction for the load and terrain. the transmission manufacturer’s manual permit smooth starting. • Never downshift when the vehicle provided with your vehicle before operating 6. DO NOT allow your vehicle to roll is moving too fast. the vehicle. After making sure the vehicle's (even a little) in the opposite oil and air pressure are correct and all direction during clutch

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 153 DRIVING - Transmission

engagement. If you need to start Avoid gear clashing, by closely following up on an incline, apply your service these procedures. When you are operating purpose of the clutch brake is to stop brakes before you release the a new vehicle or one that has been the transmission so that you can shift parking brake. Then release your exposed to cold weather, you want the into a starting gear without grinding service brakes as you engage the transmission lubricant (fluid) to circulate gears. Applying the clutch brake when clutch and apply throttle. and coat the contacting surfaces of the the vehicle is moving causes a braking effect on the drivetrain and shortens For further instructions on operating your gears. Metal contacting metal in moving the service life of the clutch brake. transmission, see the transmission parts may seriously damage your manufacturer's Driver/Operator's transmission, do not drive in one gear for Instruction Manual. long periods of time until the transmission 4 If you want to shift directly into any gear lubricant has a chance to coat all CAUTION other than first or reverse, depress the contacting surfaces. clutch pedal only far enough to release the • Always select a starting gear that DO NOT push the clutch pedal com- clutch. Fully depressing the pedal applies will provide sufficient gear pletely to the floor when shifting while the clutch brake and could cause gear reduction for the load and terrain. the vehicle is in motion. using the clutch brake while shifting a vehicle in hang-up. • Never downshift when the vehicle motion will damage the clutch brake. A If you have a misaligned gear condition in is moving too fast. your vehicle's transmission and cannot non functioning clutch brake will make • Never slam or jerk the shift lever to shifting very difficult when the vehicle start, gradually release the clutch, allowing complete gear engagement. the drive gear teeth to line up properly. is stationary. • Never coast with the transmission Then the drive gear can roll enough to in neutral and the clutch allow the teeth to line up properly and 1. Depress the clutch pedal past the disengaged. complete the shift. The best engine first 1/2 in. (13 mm) for performance and maximum economy is approximately 5 1/2 in. (139.7 mm) obtained if gears are properly selected. How to Use the Hydraulic Clutch of total pedal travel. This efficiency is achieved by always 2. Depress the clutch pedal another 1/2 in. (13 mm) to engage the selecting gears within optimum engine CAUTION rpm, which is where maximum torque and clutch brake. power are obtained. Be careful not to apply the clutch The clutch brake is used for stopping Shift carefully in a new vehicle. The brake while the vehicle is moving. The transmission gears, allowing you to easily transmission may be a little stiff at first. shift into first gear or reverse without

154 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Transmission

grinding gears. The clutch brake is not proper coordination between shift 4. Now quickly press the pedal to necessary when shifting into other gears lever and clutch. disengage the clutch and move the while in motion. gear shift lever to the next gear If the clutch pedal is pressed completely to How to Shift Using Double Clutch speed position. the floor and the transmission is not Method 5. Release the pedal to engage the shifting, then it is time to have the clutch Double clutching is easier on the clutch. adjusted or serviced. transmission and on the engine, helping match your vehicle's engine speed with If the transmission has a butt-tooth Automated Transmissions condition and you cannot engage a gear, driveline speed to achieve clash-free shifts. gradually release the clutch. Then the drive The manual transmission in your vehicle is This vehicle may have a PACCAR or Eaton gear can roll enough to allow the teeth to not equipped with gear synchronizers. automated transmission. It remains 4 line up properly and complete the shift. Whether you are upshifting or important to completely understand how to The clutch is not a footrest. Do not drive downshifting, it is best to double clutch. operate the transmission to optimize its with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. It To double clutch: efficiency. Please read the manual for the will allow your clutch to slip, causing 1. Push the clutch pedal down to automated transmission included with your excessive heat and wear, damage could disengage the clutch. vehicle. Not all automated transmissions have a result. 2. Move the gear shift lever to neutral. When you must idle your engine for any "park" position, so you will need to apply 3. Release the pedal to engage the the parking brake before leaving the cab. period of time, shift your transmission to clutch. This lets you control the rpm neutral and disengage the clutch (take your of the transmission mainshaft foot OFF of the pedal). This helps prevent gears, allowing you to match the unnecessary wear to your clutch release rpm of the mainshaft gears to those bearing, and it is less tiring for you, too. of the output shaft. • Always use the clutch when • Upshifts: let the engine and making upshifts or downshifts. gears slow down to the rpm • Never coast with the transmission required for the next gear. in neutral and the clutch • Downshifts: press accelerator, disengaged. increase engine and gear • To provide smooth gear speed to the rpm required in the engagements while shifting, use lower gear.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 155 DRIVING - Transmission

Hill Hold • Max mode WARNING • Low gear mode • Manual Mode If your vehicle has an automated • Neutral Coast transmission, be aware that it can roll The hill hold feature is available as an • Driver Shift Aid backwards when stopped on a hill or option with certain automated • Configuration 2 grade, or when starting from a stop on transmissions. This feature holds the Inside the gear icon, the indicator normally a hill or grade. Failure to comply may vehicle while on a hill to allow the operator show the current gear number and may at result in death, personal injury, equip- to release the service brakes and press the times show: ment or property damage. Observe the 4 accelerator. This feature will hold the • AN - Auto Neutral following guidelines: (1) When stopped vehicle if the vehicle is attempting to go up • CA - Clutch Abuse on a hill or grade, press the brake ped- a hill from a stop in either drive or reverse. al. (2) When starting from a stop on a • GI - Grease Service Interval hill or grade, quickly remove your foot Shift Configuration • ! - Error State from the brake pedal and firmly press Some transmissions are equipped with Gear Display Icon (Error State) on the accelerator pedal. more than one shifting configuration to match various operating conditions. Please read the automated transmission manual WARNING included with your vehicle for instructions This icon indicates an error in the on how to change shift configurations. transmission.. Attempt to reset the DO NOT leave the cab of your vehicle transmission by turning off the vehicle. without applying the parking brake. Transmission Gear Display After two minutes, restart the engine and The truck could roll and cause an acci- see if the same icon appears in the display. dent resulting in death or personal in- Gear Display Icon (gear number) Please contact your nearest Authorized jury. Always apply the parking brake dealership if the condition persists. before you leave the cab. This indicator will show the transmission Controls for Vehicles with an Eaton Automated or a PACCAR mode and current gear.. This does not Transmission apply to vehicles with Allison Automatic This vehicle may be equipped with either transmissions. an Eaton Automated or a PACCAR

156 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Transmission

Transmission. The Automated or PACCAR page 65 and Peterbilt Digital Display on Some vehicles may have a feature that Transmission controls are located on the page 63. prompts the operator to shift for optimal right hand side of the steering column. Gear Display Icon (Gear shift assist) fuel economy. If the prompt appears in the instrument Using the Manual - Automatic cluster, use the manual gear selector lever Button to change gears. Gear Display Icon (Gear shift assist) Up or Down Shifting

The instrument cluster will illuminate with 4 the corresponding gear.

Gear Display Icon (gear number)

This button will put the transmission into manual mode. Manual mode will allow the operator to select the gear. See Up or When in the Manual mode, the Down Shifting on page 157. transmission gears can be manually To activate, put the gear selector in the D selected by pushing or pulling on the lever. (drive) mode and then depress the M/A Pushing the lever forward will down shift. button. The instrument cluster will display Pushing and holding the lever forward will the corresponding selection in the engage the LOW gear range. Pulling the transmission mode area of the display. See lever towards the driver will upshift the Drive, Neutral, and Reverse Indicator on transmission.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 157 DRIVING - Transmission

Drive Neutral Reverse Selector Auto Neutral select when it is necessary to engage a gear. Gear Display Icon (Auto Neutral) • The transmission will exit Neutral Coast Mode and reengage an AN appropriate gear under any of the The Auto Neutral feature will automatically following conditions: shift to Neutral if the vehicle is left in forward or reverse mode and the parking • Vehicle brake is applied brake is set. The driver must then select the desired forward or reverse mode with • Driver depresses accelerator 4 the service brake applied. pedal Neutral Coast Mode Neutral Coast Mode allows the • Cruise control is canceled transmission to disengage the driveline by pulling out of gear on slight downhill • A mode other than Drive is Transmission mode is selected by rotating grades, where little to no engine power is selected the lever outer knob. There is a position for required, when the vehicle is in cruise Drive (D), Neutral (N), and Reverse (R). control and the transmission is in Drive • Driver performs upshift/ The Digital Display will indicate the mode. downshift requests corresponding mode. See Drive, Neutral, • When Neutral Coast Mode is and Reverse Indicator on page 65 and active, the engine will drop to idle • Cruise high or low set speeds Peterbilt Digital Display on page 63. speed and the transmission will are exceeded disengage. NOTE • The gear display may flash a gear number or indicate Neutral when • Maximum vehicle grade is Neutral Coast Mode is active. exceeded Selector (the transmission) must be in Neutral (N) to start the truck. • If a flashing number is indicated in the gear display, this represents the • Request by an adaptive cruise gear that the transmission will system

158 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

Clutch Abuse Protection Automatic Transmissions The clutch can overheat and slip with An automatic transmission makes shifting Brakes improper use.Select the lowest possible much easier. It remains important to start gear for the application. completely understand how to operate the • If moving slowly is required, select transmission to optimize its efficiency. Air Brake System 1st or R1. Please read the manual for your automatic • Use the Service Brake and let Hill transmission included with your vehicle. WARNING Start Aid assist you when launching on an incline. WARNING DO NOT drive through water deep • Do NOT use the throttle to hold the enough to wet brake components, as it 4 vehicle on an incline. (Use Service DO NOT leave the cab of your vehicle may cause the brakes to work less ef- Brake). without applying the parking brake. ficiently than normal. The vehicle's • Do NOT use the throttle to stop roll The truck could roll and cause an acci- stopping distance may be longer than back on an incline after Hill Start dent resulting in death or personal in- expected, and the vehicle may pull to Aid disengages. (Use Service jury. Always apply the parking brake the left or right when brakes are ap- Brake and then relaunch). before you leave the cab. plied, which could contribute to an ac- Gear Display Icon (Clutch Abuse) cident involving death or personal in- jury. Auxiliary Transmission Compressed air is delivered to the brake If the clutch does start to overheat, the If you have an auxiliary transmission, see system through the valve at the brake display will show “CA” along with a warning your transmission manufacturer’s manual pedal and is controlled with various valves tone. Full clutch actuation must be for its proper operation. and braking circuits. The brake system is completed quickly. If not, the system will designed with separate front, rear, and either open the clutch if not on the throttle (when applicable) trailer circuits so that if or close the clutch if on the throttle. If the one circuit is compromised and loses air, abuse continues, the system will open the the other circuits will not be affected. clutch and take away throttle control for a Safety valves in each circuit will protect the short period of time to allow the clutch to other circuits in the event that a circuit cool down. loses air.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 159 DRIVING - Brakes

The air compressor on the engine will Parking Brake circuit has a leak and loses air. In such a typically provide 100-130 psi (690-896 scenario, the parking brakes will apply. kPa) to the air tanks. The vehicle is also The vehicle’s parking brake controls are designed with an air dryer, which removes the yellow diamond shaped knob on your moisture from the compressed air in order dash board. If the vehicle is equipped to 1 to protect all components in the air system. tow a trailer, then there will be an additional The brake system may be further red octagon shaped knob for the trailer enhanced by additional devices such as parking brakes. Parking brakes will be brake proportioning valves, antilock engaged when either of these knobs are braking systems, or sensors designed to pulled OUT. (If one knob is pulled out, the 4 let you know if your brake pads need to be 2 other knob will automatically pop out.) serviced. Certain conditions may result in Pushing IN a knob will disengage the the brake surfaces getting wet. Brake respective parking brakes. If you push in surfaces that are wet do not perform as the yellow knob only, you will disengage well as when they are dry. There may be the vehicle’s parking brakes but will not situations where wet brake surfaces cannot 3 disengage the trailer parking brakes (if be avoided. In such situations, apply the applicable). Either knob will pop back out if brakes while in motion, to dry the brake the system pressure is not above 60 psi surfaces. (414 kPa). The instrument panel display Certain conditions may result in your brake 1. Normal run position will provide a message any time the surfaces becoming overheated (above parking brakes (vehicle or the trailer) are 2. Trailer park with vehicle released 800°F or 427°C). Overheated brakes will set and the vehicle is put into motion. damage linings and drum surfaces, 3. System park or trailer charge with ultimately decreasing brake performance. vehicle parked Refer to Retarders and Descending a Parking brakes work in reverse action of grade to avoid overheating the brakes. the regular brakes. When the parking brakes are engaged, air is exhausted from the spring chambers, which allows the spring to engage the brakes. This design also provides a safety function if a brake

160 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

Engage Trailer Hand Brakes speed should be reduced to eliminate wheel spin and prevent excessive having any suspected problems imme- application of the ATC system. Except for diately checked by an authorized deal- checking for proper illumination of the ABS er. Failure to properly maintain your and traction control warning lamps when brake system can lead to serious acci- first starting the vehicle, and for monitoring dents. Failure to comply may result in- these lamps while driving, no special property damage, personal injury, or operating procedures are required. For death. detailed system description, see literature for your specific ABS that was provided WARNING with your vehicle. 4 DO NOT rely on an antilock brake sys- Press the lever down to engage the Trailer Antilock Brake Systems (ABS) tem that is functioning improperly. You Hand Brakes. Push the lever back up to This vehicle may be equipped with an could lose control of the vehicle result- release the Trailer Hand Brakes. ABS, which reduces the possibility of ing in a severe accident, causing per- wheel lock-up. If a wheel is about to lock sonal injury or death. If your ABS lamp Automatic Traction Control during braking, the ABS will automatically goes on while you are driving or stays adjust air pressure to the brake chambers on after the self-check, your anti-lock on the appropriate wheel(s) to prevent system might not be working. The ABS wheel lock-up. The ABS is automatically may not function in an emergency. You turned on when the ignition switch is turned will still have conventional brakes, but on. not antilock brakes. If the lamp indi- Your truck/tractor ABS is equipped with an cates a problem, have the ABS checked. automatic traction control (ATC) feature. WARNING This feature is controlled by a switch on the dash. Do not allow the traction control lamp Vehicles without ABS are typically The antilock brake system is a critical equipped with a bobtail brake proportioning to remain on continuously for an extended vehicle safety system. For the safety length of time. Extended continuous use of system. When a trailer is not connected, of you and others around you, have the drive axle brake application pressure the ATC can cause overheating of the drive the vehicle submitted for periodic pre- wheel brakes. Engine torque or vehicle will automatically be limited by the ventive maintenance checks as well as proportioning system. When driven in a

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 161 DRIVING - Brakes

bobtail mode, these tractors will require ABS system, which may affect its greater brake pedal application to provide operation. the equivalent braking to a bobtail tractor NOTE not equipped with a proportioning system. Tractors/Trucks and trailers built after CAUTION Trailer ABS Power Line 03/01/2001 must be able to turn on an Communication (PLC) In-Cab Trailer ABS Warning Light (per The center pin of the 7-way trailer light U.S. FMVSS121). The industry chose North American on-highway vehicles are line may be constantly powered for Power Line Communication (PLC) as equipped with a separate electrical circuit ABS. Make sure it will not accidentally the standard method to turn it on. On to power the ABS on towed vehicle(s). In turn on trailer equipment. trailers built prior to 03/01/2001 verify 4 most cases, the ABS power will be trailer ABS system status via the re- supplied through the Auxiliary circuit on the Special Trailer ABS Without PLC quired external warning light mounted primary 7-way trailer light line connector. If (Option) on the trailer. The indicator light on the the vehicle was manufactured with a trailer should be yellow and identified If a trailer does not have PLC, but it does switchable Auxiliary circuit for trailer with the letters ABS. have ABS that is powered through an accessories, an additional 7-way connector optional second trailer connector (ISO would have been provided for trailer ABS For doubles or triples, the lamp does not 3731) and that trailer ABS is designed to power. In either case, the ABS power line distinguish between trailers. An ABS control the Trailer ABS Warning Lamp in on the vehicle will be PLC equipped. problem in any of the trailers will activate the cab and the vehicle has been ordered the Trailer ABS Warning Lamp. with the option to turn on this lamp for these types of trailers, then this lamp will CAUTION If you change the intended service in any way (e.g., number of axles, multiple turn on when that trailer ABS has a system problem. This should be checked by a DO NOT splice into the non-switchable trailers, add switchable trailer accessories, etc.) from the date the vehicle was dealer as soon as possible. The Trailer Auxiliary circuit on the primary 7-way ABS Warning Lamp will not turn on for the trailer light line. Doing so may cause manufactured, you should contact your trailer manufacturer and/or trailer antilock power-on test when connected to these the trailer ABS to malfunction. This cir- types of trailers. cuit is dedicated for trailer ABS power. brake manufacturer to determine if the To add a switchable auxiliary circuit, power available at the 7-way trailer light contact a dealership. line is adequate. Failure to do so might result in insufficient power to the trailer

162 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

A Real World Example of How the NOTE System Operates Excessive speed for road conditions creates forces that exceed the threshold at Very few trailers built before which a vehicle is likely to roll over on a 03/01/2001 have this option. Trailers higher-friction surface. The system built after 03/01/2001 are built with automatically reduces engine torque and PLC technology. applies the service brakes (based on the projected rollover risk) to reduce the Electronic Stability Control may reduce the vehicle speed, thereby reducing the Advanced ABS with Stability vehicle speed automatically. To minimize tendency to roll over. 4 Control unexpected deceleration and reduce the Advanced ABS with Stability Control is a risk of a collision the operator must: Roll Stability Example feature that reduces the risk of rollovers • Avoid aggressive driving and other loss of control situations. For maneuvers, such as sharp turns or vehicles towing trailers, the feature can abrupt lane changes at high reduce the risk of a trailer jackknifing. speeds, which might trigger the During operation, the system constantly stability system. compares performance models to the • Always operate the vehicle safely, vehicle’s actual movement, using the drive defensively, anticipate wheel speed sensors of the ABS system, obstacles and pay attention to as well as lateral, yaw, and steering angle road, weather, and traffic sensors. If the vehicle shows a tendency to conditions. ABS, ATC, and ESC leave an appropriate travel path, or if stability systems are no substitute critical threshold values are approached, for prudent, careful driving. the system will intervene to assist the driver. Roll Stability Yaw Stability Yaw stability counteracts the tendency of a vehicle to spin about its vertical axis.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 163 DRIVING - Brakes

During operation, if the friction between the appropriate path of travel. For example, in Automatic Traction Control road surface and the tires is not sufficient an over-steer situation, the system applies to oppose lateral (side) forces, one or more the "outside" front brake; while in an under- of the tires can slide, causing the truck/ steer condition, the "inside" rear brake is tractor to spin. These yaw events are applied. referred to as either "under-steer" (where there is a lack of vehicle response to A Real World Example of How Yaw Your truck/tractor ABS has an automatic steering input due to tire slide on the steer Control Operates traction control (ATC) feature. This feature is controlled by a switch. This feature is axle) or "over-steer" (where the tractor's Excessive speed exceeds the threshold, monitored by a warning lamp located on rear end slides out due to tire slide on the creating a situation where a vehicle is likely the switch. The Traction Control warning 4 rear axle) situation. Generally, shorter to spin and, where applicable, jackknife. lamp will briefly illuminate and then go out wheelbase vehicles (tractors, for instance) The system reduces engine throttle and when the ignition switch is first turned on. have less natural yaw stability, while longer selectively applies brakes to reduce the The traction control warning lamp will wheelbase vehicles (straight trucks, for vehicle speed, thereby reducing the illuminate whenever the ATC system instance) have greater natural yaw stability. tendency to jackknife. Factors that influence yaw stability are: detects drive wheel spin. The lamp will remain illuminated as long as wheel spin is wheelbase, suspension, steering geometry, Yaw Control Example weight distribution front to rear, and vehicle detected and the ATC system is applying track width. the drive wheel brakes or reducing engine torque. Engine torque or vehicle speed Yaw Control should be reduced to eliminate wheel spin Yaw Control responds to a wide range of and prevent excessive application of the low- to high-friction surface scenarios ATC system. including rollover, jackknife and loss of Except for checking for proper illumination control. In the case of vehicle slide (over- of the ABS and traction control warning steer or understeer situations), the system lamps when first starting the vehicle, and will reduce the throttle and then brake one for monitoring these lamps while driving, or more of the "four corners" of the vehicle no special operating procedures are (in addition to potentially applying the required. For detailed system description, trailer brakes), thus applying a counter- see literature for your specific ABS that force to better align the vehicle with an was provided with your vehicle.

164 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

This feature helps improve traction when spin. When this function is in use, the ATC vehicles are on slippery surfaces or Warning Lamp blinks continuously. surfaces with poor traction (i.e. mud or WARNING snow) by reducing drive wheel overspin. Off-Road ABS Function Switch Automatic traction control works (Optional) While the off road mode can improve automatically in two different ways: Your vehicle may be equipped with a vehicle control and shorten stopping distances, some steering ability may • If a drive wheel starts to spin, ATC separate switch to activate an Off-Road be reduced on certain surfaces result- applies air pressure to brake the ABS function. This function is NOT to be ing from the momentarily sliding tires. wheel. This transfers engine torque used for On-Highway driving but is Always operate your vehicle at safe to the wheels with better traction. intended to be used to improve stopping operating speeds. Failure to do so • If all drive wheels spin, ATC performance in Off-Highway conditions 4 (e.g., loose gravel and mud). The Off-Road may cause you to lose control of the reduces engine torque to provide vehicle and could result in an accident improved traction. ABS function is accomplished by allowing a "wedge" of material to build-up in front of or personal injury. ATC turns itself on and off, you do not have momentarily locked wheels. to select this feature. If drive wheels spin • Changes the ABS control limits to during acceleration, the ATC Warning CAUTION Lamp comes on, indicating wheel spin allow for a more aggressive ABS function while off-road. control is active. Do not allow the ATC Never drive your vehicle on improved • Improves vehicle control and helps Warning Lamp to remain on continuously roads/highways with the Off-Road reduce stopping distances in off- for an extended length of time. Extended, ABS function turned on. When you road conditions or on poor traction continuous use of the ATC can cause drive your vehicle onto an improved surfaces such as loose gravel, overheating of the drive wheel brakes. road surface or highway, immediately sand, and dirt. turn off the Off-Road ABS switch. Fail- Deep Snow and Mud Switch • Allows retarders to function ure to do so will cause the ABS sys- A deep snow and mud switch is included independently of the ABS function. tem to not function properly in an ABS with Automatic Traction Control (ATC). The • If your vehicle does not have an event under 25 mph (40 km/h) and Deep Snow and Mud feature is helpful engine retarder, the Off- Road ABS could result in an accident or personal during acceleration. This function switch will function the same. injury. increases available traction on extra soft surfaces like snow, mud, or gravel, by slightly increasing the permissible wheel

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 165 DRIVING - Brakes

The ABS lamp flashes slowly during off- • If very rapidly winding steering road mode engagement. This is done to inputs are inputted at high speeds. WARNING alert you of a modification to the ABS • There are mechanical problems control software. At speeds above 25 mph with suspension leveling of the Exercise extreme care when towing (40 km/h), the ABS controller operates in tractor or trailer resulting in uneven doubles or triples with a vehicle equip- the normal on-highway mode. At speeds loads. between 10 and 25 mph (16 and 40 km/h), ped with Electronic Stability Program. Excessive speed and aggressive ma- • The vehicle is maneuvering on a the ABS control software is modified to high banked road creating either allow short periods (0.25 seconds) of neuvers, such as sharp turns, sudden steering inputs or abrupt lane changes additional side forces due to the locked-wheel cycles. At speeds below 10 weight (mass) of the vehicle or a 4 mph (16 km/h), the ABS control software is should be avoided because these ma- neuvers could cause loss of vehicle deviation between expected and turned off to allow locked wheels. When actual yaw rates. the Off-Road ABS function is enabled, the control possibly resulting in an acci- • Gusty winds are strong enough to Retarder Disable output is turned off. That dent involving death or personal injury. cause significant side forces on the is, the engine retarders are left to function vehicle and any towed vehicles. without ABS intervention. For additional Additionally, the ESC stability system’s information, see the Off-Road ABS effectiveness may be greatly reduced if: To maximize the effectiveness of ESC: pamphlet in your vehicle’s glove box. • The load shifts due to improper • Loads must be properly secured retention, accident damage or the and evenly distributed at all times. Effectiveness and Limitations inherently mobile nature of some • Drivers need to exercise extreme ESC is designed and optimized for trucks loads (for example, hanging meat, caution at all times, and avoid and for tractors that tow single trailers. If a live animals or partially laden sharp turns, sudden steering inputs tractor equipped with ESC is used to power tankers). or abrupt lane changes at high multiple trailer combinations (known as • The vehicle has an unusually high speeds, particularly if: "doubles" or "triples") the effectiveness of or offset center of gravity (CG). • The vehicle hauls loads that the ESC system may be greatly reduced. • One side of the vehicle drops off could shift the pavement at an angle that is • The vehicle or load has a high too large to be counteracted by a or offset center of gravity (CG) reduction in speed. when loaded • The vehicle is used to haul double • The vehicle tows doubles or or triple trailer combinations. triples

166 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

The ESC system was specifically "doubles" or "triples") the effectiveness of calibrated and validated only for your control possibly resulting in an acci- the ESC system may be greatly reduced. vehicle’s original factory-built configuration. dent involving death or personal injury. If your vehicle’s chassis components are altered (for example; a wheelbase Whenever maintenance or repair work is WARNING extension or reduction, tag axle addition or performed to the steering mechanism, removal, tractor to truck conversion or linkage, gear, adjustment of the wheel Exercise extreme care when towing steering system component change) the track, or if the steering angle sensor is doubles or triples with a vehicle equip- ESC system must be disabled immediately replaced or the steering wheel is changed ped with Electronic Stability Program. by a qualified mechanic. or re-centered, the Steering Angle Sensor Excessive speed and aggressive ma- must be re-calibrated. neuvers, such as sharp turns, sudden 4 steering inputs or abrupt lane changes WARNING should be avoided because these ma- WARNING neuvers could cause loss of vehicle Failure to disable ESC "Electronic Sta- control possibly resulting in an acci- bility Control" when modifying a vehi- If the Steering Angle Sensor is not re- dent involving death or personal injury. cle could result in a loss of vehicle calibrated, the Yaw Control system will control possibly resulting in an acci- not function properly. An uncalibrated Additionally, the ESC stability system’s dent involving death or personal injury. sensor could result in a loss of control effectiveness may be greatly reduced if: of your vehicle which can lead to an • The load shifts due to improper accident involving death or personal retention, accident damage or the injury. WARNING inherently mobile nature of some loads (for example, hanging meat, For vehicles equipped with ESC (Elec- live animals or partially laden tronic Stability Control) do not replace Towing Doubles Or Triples May tankers). the vehicle’s steering wheel with an af- Reduce The Effectiveness Of • The vehicle has an unusually high termarket or different part number than Stability Systems or offset center of gravity (CG). originally supplied. Using a different ESC is designed and optimized for trucks • One side of the vehicle drops off steering wheel could cause ESC to and for tractors that tow single trailers. If a the pavement at an angle that is malfunction causing a loss of vehicle tractor equipped with ESC is used to power too large to be counteracted by a multiple trailer combinations (known as reduction in speed.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 167 DRIVING - Brakes

• The vehicle is used to haul double • The vehicle tows doubles or or triple trailer combinations. triples steering wheel could cause ESC to malfunction causing a loss of vehicle • If very rapidly winding steering The ESC system was specifically control possibly resulting in an acci- inputs are inputted at high speeds. calibrated and validated only for your dent involving death or personal injury. • There are mechanical problems vehicle’s original factory-built configuration. If your vehicle’s chassis components are with suspension leveling of the Whenever maintenance or repair work is altered (for example; a wheelbase tractor or trailer resulting in uneven performed to the steering mechanism, extension or reduction, tag axle addition or loads. linkage, gear, adjustment of the wheel removal, tractor to truck conversion or • The vehicle is maneuvering on a track, or if the steering angle sensor is steering system component change) the high banked road creating either replaced or the steering wheel is changed 4 ESC system must be disabled immediately additional side forces due to the or re-centered, the Steering Angle Sensor by a qualified mechanic. weight (mass) of the vehicle or a must be re-calibrated. deviation between expected and actual yaw rates. WARNING • Gusty winds are strong enough to WARNING cause significant side forces on the Failure to disable ESC "Electronic Sta- If the Steering Angle Sensor is not re- vehicle and any towed vehicles. bility Control" when modifying a vehi- calibrated, the Yaw Control system will To maximize the effectiveness of ESC: cle could result in a loss of vehicle not function properly. An uncalibrated control possibly resulting in an acci- • Loads must be properly secured sensor could result in a loss of control dent involving death or personal injury. and evenly distributed at all times. of your vehicle which can lead to an • Drivers need to exercise extreme accident involving death or personal caution at all times, and avoid injury. sharp turns, sudden steering inputs WARNING or abrupt lane changes at high speeds, particularly if: For vehicles equipped with ESC" Elec- tronic Stability Control" do not replace Retarders • The vehicle hauls loads that the vehicle’s steering wheel with an af- Various retarders are available, which could shift termarket or different part number than function against the engine, driveline, or • The vehicle or load has a high originally supplied. Using a different transmission. These are devices that use or offset center of gravity (CG) your engine’s power to slow down your when loaded

168 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Brakes

vehicle. They reduce brake wear and tear and the need for continuous brake use, accident. Failure to comply may result when you are driving bobtail or with an which can lead to your service brakes in death, personal injury, equipment or unloaded trailer. overheating. Ideally, you should always property damage. slow your vehicle with your retarder (where This vehicle may have a transmission permitted by law) and use your service The retarder is NOT intended as the retarder. Take your foot off the throttle and brakes only for stopping completely. primary brake for the vehicle, nor is it an operate the retarder switch. When you do Operating this way will greatly prolong the emergency brake. The retarder only helps not need full retarder effect, you can apply life of your brakes. the service brakes by using pressure to it intermittently (off and on) to cause slow the drivetrain. Use the service brakes gradual or partial slowing. Continuous for quick stops. Do not use the retarder application of your retarder will cause your 4 WARNING when operating on road surfaces with poor hydraulic fluid to get hotter. Intermittent traction (such as wet, icy, or snow covered application will help prevent overheating. DO NOT use the vehicle’s engine roads or gravel). Retarders can cause the compression brake or exhaust brake in wheels to skid on a slippery surface. any situation that requires an immedi- We recommend that you do not use your ate stop and/or in situations of poor engine retarder to slow down when you are traction (such as wet, icy, or snow cov- bobtailing or pulling an empty trailer. ered roads). Trying to use the engine compression brake or exhaust brake WARNING instead of the service brakes may WARNING cause a loss of vehicle control, which DO NOT rely on your automatic trans- may result in an accident involving Using an engine retarder can cause a mission hydraulic retarder to stop your death or personal injury. wheel lockup. The trailer is not loading vehicle. If your engine shuts down, the the tires enough to give the traction vehicle’s retarder will cease to operate you may need. When you are bobtail which may lead to an accident involv- WARNING or unloaded, you can have a serious ing death or personal injury. Always be accident if your wheels lock suddenly ready to suddenly apply the service The service brakes must be used in an during braking. You could be killed or brakes. emergency. The retarder alone might injured. DO NOT use your retarder not stop you fast enough to prevent an

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 169 DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

sand, mud or uneven surfaces. Look Your vehicle may be equipped with a two- ahead and predict when the differential speed or dual range axle (option). The low Axle and Suspension needs to be locked. Stop the vehicle and range provides maximum torque for lock the differentials before approaching. hauling heavy loads or traveling over rough Differential Lock While using the differential in the locked terrain. The high range is a faster ratio for position, do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). highway speeds and general over-the-road When disengaging the differential lock, conditions. A switch on the accessory reduce the throttle to prevent drivetrain switch panel controls the dual range rear damage. axle. You will notice that the switch has a guard to protect you from activating it The vehicle may be equipped with 4 accidentally. Always park your vehicle with switches to lock the either of the rear axle WARNING the range selector in LOW. differentials. Depending on how the vehicle Important tips on operating a dual range is specified, a combination of individual DO NOT put the differential lock in the axle with inter-axle differential: switches may be available that can lock the LOCK position while the wheels are • Shift the axle with the inter-axle interaxle driveline and/or any combination spinning freely (slipping), you could differential in the unlocked position of the forward rear or rear-rear driving lose control of the vehicle or cause only. axles. The interaxle differential switch axle damage. Switch to LOCK only allows each axle to turn independently. In when the wheels are not spinning. • When you are driving with poor certain situations, engaging the interaxle Failure to comply may result in death, traction, lock the differential. When differential lock relieves stress on the rear personal injury, equipment or property you have the differential locked, axles and reduces tire wear. Engaging this damage. drive with the axle in LOW range switch will also provide better traction in only. slippery or loose gravel conditions. • When you are driving on a surface In the LOCK position, continuous operation Dual Range (Two-Speed) Rear Axle with good traction, keep the inter- on paved, dry surfaces, put stress on the axle differential unlocked. You can axles, and can possibly damage the drive with the axle in the LOW or internal gears. The switch has a guard to HIGH range. prevent accidental operation of the switch. • Always UNLOCK the inter-axle Locking the differentials is typically used differential before shifting the axle during ice or snow conditions and without speed range. tire chains, unpaved roads that have loose

170 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

axle, and wheels adjust, allowing for proper 1. Be sure the differential is gear engagement. UNLOCKED. WARNING When going downhill the wheels will not 2. Maintain your vehicle speed slow down, but will tend to speed up, which (accelerator depressed) and move Never shift the axle when moving makes gear synchronization almost the Range Selector lever to HIGH. downhill. Engine driveline disengage- impossible. As a result, the axle is neither 3. Keep driving with the accelerator ment may occur, eliminating engine re- in HIGH nor LOW range and all engine/ tardation and allowing the wheels to depressed until you want the axle driveline retardation is lost. Without engine to shift. spin faster than the current speed of retardation it is more difficult to slow the 4. To make the axle shift, release the the engine. This may require severe vehicle down and greater stress is put on accelerator until the axle shifts. You braking to slow the vehicle down and the brake system. 4 can result in an accident. Failure to are now in the HIGH axle range for comply may result in death, personal highway speeds. Shift the injury, equipment or property damage. CAUTION transmission normally to reach your desired cruising speed. To avoid damaging your vehicle shift CAUTION the axle at slower travel speeds until How to Operate Two-Speed Axle - you are used to driving with a dual High to Low If you shift the axle range with the in- range axle. These steps should be used if operating a ter-axle differential in LOCK, you could two-speed axle in HIGH range on improved seriously damage the axles. Never roads and preparing to drive on rough shift the axle range with the differential How to Operate Two-Speed Axle - terrain. locked. Low to High When you go from highway driving to These steps should be used if operating a rough terrain, shift the axle to the LOW Proper shifting of the axle depends on the two-speed axle in LOW range on rough range following this procedure: synchronization of engine/driveline and terrain and preparing to drive on an 1. Maintain vehicle speed (accelerator wheel speed. When you shift the axle, the improved surface. depressed) and move the Range connection between the engine and wheels When you go from rough terrain to highway Selector lever to LOW. is momentarily disengaged while the driving, shift the axle to the HIGH range 2. Keep driving with the accelerator gearing is synchronized. Normally when following this procedure: depressed until you want the axle the axle is shifted the speed of the engine, to downshift.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 171 DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

3. To make the axle downshift, calibration of its controls. Operating the • Liftable/steerable (axle lift release and depress the auxiliary axles will also require a firm calibration required) accelerator quickly to increase the understanding of the Gross Axle Weight • Liftable/non-steerable (axle lift engine rpm. The axle will shift to Rating (GAWR) and the load that is being calibration required) LOW range. carried. • Non-liftable (some suspensions 4. You are now in the LOW axle range The vehicle will have switches on the dash require dump valve calibration) for rough terrain and heavy loads. to control the position of the auxiliary axles. Shift the transmission normally to In certain situations, however, the system maintain the desired speed. will override the controls to protect the axle WARNING system. For Self Steering Lift Axles, the 4 axle will raise when the park brakes are DO NOT operate or park the vehicle Auxiliary Axle applied or if the vehicle is placed in with auxiliary axles in the down/loaded reverse. For Non-Steer Lift Axles, the axle position when vehicle is unladen, or is will only automatically raise if the park being unloaded. Raise or dump air into brakes are applied and there are no park driver controlled auxiliary axle(s) prior brakes on the lift axle. Non-Steer Lift Axles to unloading vehicle. Failure to do so do not automatically raise when the vehicle can result in loss of vehicle control or Adjustable auxiliary axles (commonly is placed in reverse. roll-away that may result in personal known as Pusher or Tag axles) can add to Operating the auxiliary liftable axles must injury, property damage or death. the productivity of the vehicle by increasing be performed in a manner that does not the load capabilities of the vehicle when exceed the axle creep rating. Axle creep they are in the deployed (down) position. ratings are weight and speed limits that are Auxiliary Axle Pressure Regulator There are different configurations of axles allowed while the vehicle is fully loaded (in Vehicles with liftable auxiliary axles will with different functionality (liftable versus excess of the vehicle’s standard GAWR) have knobs available to adjust the steerable). Without the extra axle, the and the axle is in its up position. Axle creep pressure in the auxiliary axle suspension. excessive weight can reduce the service ratings are assigned by the axle These knobs are in addition to the tag and life of vehicle components such as, but not manufacturer and are based on axle model pusher axle switches that control the axle limited to, the frame rail, axles, suspension and intended service of the vehicle. position. and brakes. Contact an authorized dealership if you are Adding more pressure to the auxiliary axle Operation of the auxiliary axles includes unable to identify the axle creep rating of will increase the pressure the auxiliary axle the proper maintenance of the system and this vehicle. pushes down. Increasing pressure will

172 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

decrease load on the drive axles and will them to unload them when empty. Air decrease traction. Decreasing pressure will pressure is controlled via an adjustable sary to carry the load, as determined transfer more weight to the drive axles and regulator. These axles need to be by the calibration procedure described. will result in more traction from the drive calibrated for load. Failure to do so can result in loss of axles. Contact your authorized dealer or axle/ traction and stability at the steer and/or Deflate the auxiliary axle suspension suspension manufacturer for dump valve drive axles and can result in increased before coupling or uncoupling a trailer. calibration procedures. braking distance, which could cause After the trailer is coupled or uncoupled, loss of vehicle control resulting in an then increase pressure to balance traction Axle Creep Rating accident. Failure to comply may result and axle load requirements. Inflate air Vehicles outfitted with auxiliary axles and in death, personal injury, equipment or springs of the auxiliary axles to the desired full truck configuration will have an axle property damage. 4 pressure after coupling to a loaded trailer creep rating which defines how much load while still maintaining proper traction of the is allowed when the vehicle has a full load drive axles. and maneuvering the vehicle, at very slow NOTE Adjust the pressure regulator control knob speeds, with auxiliary axles in the up to a lower pressure until desired traction is position. In these situations, the load Axle Creep ratings MUST NOT be ex- obtained. By reducing air pressure at exceeds the gross axle weight rating of the ceeded. pusher or tag axle, load will be transferred axles. to drive axles. Do not overload drive axles. Operator's using vehicles equipped with Always deflate air springs of the auxiliary liftable auxiliary axles must consider creep CAUTION axles before attempting to unload vehicle. ratings when any liftable axle is unloaded This allows maximum traction of the drive or in the raised position. Liftable auxiliary Always lower the axles as soon as axles to control the vehicle. axles should only be raised (or unloaded) possible after receiving a load. Never Depending on the suspension, various to improve maneuverability in an off-road exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving calibrations may be required. Contact your use or when vehicle is unloaded. with a load with the auxiliary axle(s) authorized dealer or axle/suspension raised/unloaded. Failure to lower the manufacturer for specific calibration axle(s) can overload the frame and re- procedures. WARNING maining axles, and could cause equip- Some suspensions require dump valve ment damage. calibration. For example, some dead axles NEVER operate the vehicle with more do not lift, but the air can be dumped out of pressure in the lift axles than is neces-

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 173 DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

• Maximum tire static loaded radius Setting the To obtain the desired axle load (SLR) per axle manufacturers Pressure-to- distribution, you must correlate the CAUTION specifications Load Ratio suspension air gauge pressure to the actual axle load by scaling the axle weight(s) and adjusting the pressure to DO NOT modify the air system and/or Pusher or Tag Suspension obtain the desired load. Once the control functionality on a factory instal- desired load or load range is achieved, Calibration document the pressure-to-load ratio or led auxiliary axle(s). Modifying the fac- Perform this procedure at or near a weight setting for future use. tory operation of the pusher and/or tag scale. Procedure can be performed while axle(s) will void your warranty, and can parked on the weight scale if scale is These instructions are general in nature. cause equipment damage. available. To obtain the desired axle load For more specific instructions, review the 4 distribution, you must correlate the pusher or tag suspension manufacturers suspension air gauge pressure to the maintenance manual or contact the CAUTION actual axle load by scaling the axle nearest authorized dealer. weight(s) and adjusting the pressure to 1. Park the loaded vehicle on a level A change in tire size on either the aux- obtain the desired load. Once the desired surface with the wheels blocked. iliary axles or the drive/steer axles can load or load range is achieved, document 2. Release vehicles spring brakes. change the calibration of the auxiliary the pressure-to-load ratio or setting for (Do not release for Liftable/Non- axles. If tires are installed with a differ- future use. Steerable pusher or tag axles) ent loaded radius, the calibration pro- 3. Lower the pusher/tag axles with the cedure must be repeated. Failure to do Axle Lift Control flip valve. (For so can cause equipment damage. NOTE some non-liftable axles, inflate air suspension) Contact your dealer or axle manufacturer This procedure must be performed pri- to determine what the creep rating is for or to placing the vehicle into service. 4. Adjust the amount of load on each your particular axle(s) and configuration. axle by turning the Pressure Creep ratings are generally limited to the Add: Perform this procedure at or near a Regulator clockwise to increase following: weight scale. Procedure can be performed the load, or counterclockwise to decrease the load. (The • Tandem rear axles only while parked on the weight scale if scale is available. suspension manufacturer may • Straight trucks only publish pre-established Pressure- • Maximum spring mount centers per to-Load Ratio Pressure Settings to axle manufacturers specifications

174 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

assist you in achieving an height may result in improper interaxle U- 2. Locate the air suspension ride estimated ground load). joint working angles. This can result in height valve. 5. After setting the pressure to obtain premature driveline wear and driveline the desired axle load, verify proper vibration. ground loading with the weight If it becomes necessary to reset the ride scale. height, you may temporarily set it by following the next procedure. Proper ride height measurement and values are shown NOTE in the illustration and table below. Exceeding local, state, or federal 4 weight limits may result in citations. CAUTION Contact your local commercial weight enforcement office for limits in your Completing this procedure will enable area. you to safely reach the nearest author- 3. Ensure that the tractor is fully laden ized dealer or repair facility to have during this procedure. Do not use ride height and pinion angle reset us- these procedures on a vehicle that NOTE ing the proper equipment and techni- is not laden (bobtail). que. Do this as soon as possible to 4. Ensure the air supply and delivery Steerable-pusher and/or tag axle(s) avoid potential driveline damage. plumbing of the height control valve will raise when the transmission is is consistent with the following shifted into reverse or when the park- illustrations. ing brakes are applied. NOTE 5. Loosen the fasteners mounting the height control valve to its bracket. Suitable wheel chocks are at a mini- Air Suspension Ride Height mum an 18-inch (46 cm) long 4x4. Vehicles equipped with rear or front air 1. Park the vehicle, engage the suspensions have their ride height and parking brakes and clock the axle (pinion) angle(s) preset at the factory. wheels. These are precision settings and should not be altered. Incorrectly adjusted ride

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 175 DRIVING - Axle and Suspension

6. Rotate the valve either clockwise or 8. Torque the mounting fasteners to Single Axle Unladen Ride Height -in. counterclockwise until air pressure 55-75 lb-in. (6.2-8.5 N·m). (mm) in the air springs provides the ride 9. Remove the alignment pin or height specified for that dowel. Air Trac 11.39 (289) suspension. Measure the ride 10. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 above Low Air Leaf 6.75 (171) height from the bottom of the frame for the right-hand valve on vehicles rail to the approximate centerline of with a dual-valve system. the rearmost drive axle hub: Tandem Axle Laden Ride Height - • For tandem axles, make the Air Ride Height Data in. (mm) vertical measurement at the These are factory settings for ride height of 4 centerline of the suspension. the rear air suspension. Air Leaf 11.70 (297) • For a single axle, make the measurement in front of the Air Trac 11.00 (279) axle, in the area forward of the Low Air Leaf 8.50 (216) tires but not past the suspension bracket. Low Low Air Leaf 6.50 (165) 7. When at the correct ride height, ensure that the height control valve FLEX Air 8.50 (216) lever is in the neutral position, then 1. Ride height install either the built-in alignment Tandem Axle Unladen Ride pin or a 1/8 in. (3 mm) dowel. 2. Centerline of suspension Height -in. (mm) Single Axle Laden Ride Height -in. Air Leaf 12.0 (305) (mm) Air Trac 11.38 (289) Air Trac 11.00 (279) Low Air Leaf 8.75 (222) Low Air Leaf 6.50 (165) Low Low Air Leaf 6.75 (171)

FLEX Air 8.75 (222)

176 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Trailer Operations

in the suspension to be exhausted from a switch on the dash. The normal purpose of What to do if an Air Spring CAUTION Ruptures this feature is to allow you to lower the vehicle for loading. A guard on the switch If an air spring has ruptured, drive the Operating a vehicle with air suspen- prevents you from accidentally deflating vehicle to a safe stop off the highway to sion bags either overinflated or under- the suspension. investigate the problem. inflated may cause damage to drive- The Suspension Air Pressure gauge line components. If a vehicle must be (optional) indicates the amount of air operated under such conditions, do WARNING pressure in the air suspension springs in not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h). Failure to pounds per square inch (psi). Air pressure comply may result in equipment dam- DO NOT continue to drive with rup- in the spring is related to the rear axle load. 4 age. tured air springs. The air loss can The greater the rear axle load, the greater cause the spring brakes to apply al- the air pressure in the air bags. Therefore, You can get to a repair facility by removing lowing your brakes to drag and burn the air pressure displayed will vary, the height control link connected to the up the linings, which could lead to an depending upon the rear axle load. axle and to the suspension air valve control accident causing death or personal in- arm. This will cause the air valve control jury. DO NOT continue to operate the arm to center in the closed position. vehicle in this condition. Removing the link will allow the air system Trailer Operations of the truck to operate normally so that the vehicle can be driven to a service center. WARNING How to Lock the Kingpin Ensure that the fifth wheel lock is in the DO NOT drive the vehicle if the air Suspension Air Pressure Gauge & unlocked position. pressure is less than 100 psi (690 Switch kPa). Driving the vehicle with less than 100 psi (690 kPa) could make the brakes unsafe to use which could cause an accident involving death or personal injury. Your vehicle may have an air suspension and a deflation switch which allows the air

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 177 DRIVING - Trailer Operations

4. Set the tractor parking brake. unlock symbol on the Kingpin Release switch will illuminate. WARNING 5. Connect the tractor brake air and electric lines to the trailer. The popup will inform the operator when to release the switch. Always inspect the fifth wheel for prop- Conduct a pre-trip inspection prior to er locking after coupling the tractor to releasing the brakes, raising the landing JOST Fifth Wheel Indication a trailer. Failure to properly couple the gear, and driving the vehicle. tractor to a trailer (the kingpin is en- gaged in a closed lock jaw with the How to Release the Kingpin lock jaw secured by a closed plunger) Remotely (option) 4 may cause trailer separation which could result in an accident involving death or personal injury. CAUTION If equipped with JOST Fifth Wheel

To lock the fifth wheel around the kingpin: Do not deflate the rear suspension be- 1. Ensure trailer brakes are locked fore unlocking the fifth wheel. Deflating NOTE and the landing gear is down. the rear suspension before unlocking 2. Back the tractor fifth wheel into the the fifth wheel could cause difficulty The fifth wheel will not unlock unless trailer kingpin to engage and lock. during uncoupling and result in dam- the vehicle is stopped and the parking age to the fifth wheel and kingpin. brake is set. In this situation, a red-col- JOST Fifth Wheel Indication ored popup appears, informing the op- 1. Set both the vehicle and trailer erator that kingpin release is not avail- parking brakes. able and to set the parking brake. This 2. Lower the landing gear. will require restarting this procedure. 3. Disconnect the tractor brake air 5. Release the switch. and electric lines from the trailer. The unlock symbol on the Kingpin 4. Flip up cover, then press and hold Release switch will turn off. If equipped with JOST fifth wheel the Kingpin Release switch for 3 6. Ease tractor forward enough for the 3. Pull the tractor forward to ensure seconds. A countdown timer popup kingpin to clear the fifth wheel the kingpin has been locked in will appear on the display, and the (about 12 to 18 inches). place.

178 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Trailer Operations

How to Release the Kingpin 4. Disconnect brake air and electric NOTE Manually lines from trailer, and secure lines. 5. Unlock the fifth wheel release Do not drive tractor free of trailer. handle if necessary, then unlock CAUTION 7. If the tractor has a rear air the fifth wheel. suspension, deflate (dump) the Do not deflate the rear suspension be- rear suspension enough so that the fore unlocking the fifth wheel. Deflating NOTE fifth wheel will smoothly separate the rear suspension before unlocking from the trailer. the fifth wheel could cause difficulty Operating the release handle and un- Suspension Dump Symbol during uncoupling and result in dam- locking the fifth wheel will depend on 4 age to the fifth wheel and kingpin. the fifth wheel manufacturer. 6. Return to cab and release tractor parking brake. NOTE 7. Ease tractor forward enough for the kingpin to clear the fifth wheel The specific method required to oper- (about 12 to 18 inches). 8. Ease tractor forward, clearing the ate the fifth wheel release handle will trailer. depend on the fifth wheel manufactur- 9. If the rear suspension was er and model. The operator should be NOTE deflated, return rear suspension to familiar with this method prior to at- its normal height. tempting this procedure. Do not drive tractor free of trailer.

To release the kingpin and separate tractor 8. If the tractor has a rear air from trailer suspension, deflate (dump) the rear suspension enough so that the 1. Position the tractor and trailer in a straight line on firm, level ground. 2. Set both the tractor and trailer parking brakes. 3. Exit cab and lower the trailer landing gear.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 179 DRIVING - Trailer Operations

fifth wheel will smoothly separate to protect you against accidentally from the trailer. activating or releasing the lock. to be sure the fifth wheel slide lock is engaged. Failure to comply may result Suspension Dump Symbol in death, personal injury, equipment or WARNING property damage.

Do not move the fifth wheel while the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your load WARNING could shift suddenly, causing you to lose control of the vehicle, which can Do not attempt to slide the fifth wheel 4 9. Ease tractor forward, clearing the result in an accident. Never operate until all persons and obstacles are trailer. the vehicle with the switch in the UN- clear of the vehicle. 10. If the rear suspension was LOCK position. Always inspect the deflated, return rear suspension to fifth wheel after you lock the switch to its normal height. be sure the fifth wheel lock is engag- NOTE ed. Failure to comply may result in Air-Controlled Sliding Fifth Wheel property damage, personal injury, or This procedure assumes a connected death. trailer. The trailer kingpin must be (option) locked within the fifth wheel when changing slide positions. How to Slide the Fifth Wheel 1. Position the tractor and trailer in a Vehicles that have an air-controlled sliding straight line on firm, level ground. fifth wheel have a fifth wheel slider lock WARNING controlled by a switch on the accessory 2. Place the tractor in neutral, and set switch panel. To operate this type of lock, DO NOT move the fifth wheel while the tractor and trailer parking move the switch to the appropriate the tractor-trailer is in motion. Your brakes. position. By placing the switch in the load could shift suddenly, causing you 3. Unlock the slide by repositioning UNLOCK position, you can slide the fifth to lose control of the vehicle. Never the Fifth Wheel Slide switch. wheel to various positions to adjust weight operate the vehicle with the switch in distribution. There is a guard on this switch the UNLOCK position. Always inspect the fifth wheel after you lock the switch

180 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

Suspension Dump Symbol fully inserted into the fifth CAUTION wheel slide track. Operating the vehicle while the plungers Ensure the tractor and trailer brakes are not fully inserted could are engaged prior to sliding the fifth lead to the slide moving unex- wheel. Failure to engage the brakes pectedly, resulting in a loss of could result in uncontrolled sliding of vehicle control and potentially the fifth wheel and possibly damage 5. Release the tractor parking brake, causing property damage, seri- components on the tractor or trailer. but keep the trailer brakes ous injury, or death. engaged. 9. If the landing gear was lowered, Fifth Wheel Slide Symbol 6. Slowly ease tractor forward or raise the landing gear. 4 backward, and stop at the desired position. 10. If the rear suspension was deflated, return rear suspension to 7. Lock the slide by returning the Fifth its normal height. Wheel Slide switch to its previous position. 4. Inspect and verify that locking 8. Inspect and verify that the locking plungers have fully withdrawn from plungers are fully inserted into the Driving Tips and the fifth wheel slide tracks. fifth wheel slide tracks. Techniques a. If locking plungers did not fully a. If the locking plungers are not withdraw, move tractor slightly fully inserted in the track, This section covers additional driving tips to reposition plungers and move the tractor slightly to and techniques on how to drive your reinspect. reposition plungers and vehicle more efficiently. b. If plungers are still not fully reinspect. withdrawn, lower the landing gear and deflate the rear WARNING suspension (if available) to lessen pressure on the slide. Do not operate the vehicle un- less the locking plungers are

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 181 DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

Coasting Descending a Grade NOTE WARNING WARNING Often these recommendations are DO NOT coast with the transmission in DO NOT hold the brake pedal down secondary to maintaining an adequate neutral or with the clutch pedal de- too long or too often while going down and safe speed relative to the sur- pressed, it is a dangerous practice. a steep or long grade. This could rounding traffic and road conditions. Coasting in neutral may result in dam- cause the brakes to overheat and re- age to your drivetrain when you try to duce their effectiveness. As a result, Operate the engine within the optimum 4 re-engage the transmission. You could the vehicle will not slow down at the engine rpm range and do not allow the rpm lose control of the vehicle which can usual rate. To reduce the risk of an ac- to exceed the maximum governed speed. lead to an accident involving death or cident which could cause death or per- See your Engine Operation and personal injury. sonal injury, before going down a Maintenance manual for information steep or long grade, reduce speed and regarding engine rpm. When the engine is Do not coast with the transmission in shift the transmission into a lower gear used as a brake to control vehicle speed neutral or with the clutch pedal depressed. to help control your vehicle speed. (e.g., while driving down a grade), do not Besides being illegal and dangerous, Failure to follow procedures for proper allow the engine rpm to exceed maximum coasting is also expensive. It causes downhill operation could result in loss governed speed. Under normal load and premature failure or damage to the clutch of vehicle control. road conditions operate the engine in the and transmission and overloads the brake lower end of the range. system. Coasting with the transmission in Engine Overspeed The tachometer is an instrument that aids neutral also prevents proper transmission in obtaining the best performance of the component lubrication. During coasting the engine and manual transmission, serving transmission is driven by the rear wheels, CAUTION as a guide for shifting gears. Refer to the and the countershaft gear (which lubricates Engine Operation and Maintenance the transmission components by oil splash) To avoid engine damage, do not let the manual for optimum engine rpm. engine rpm go beyond the maximum will only be turning at idle speed. • If the engine rpm moves beyond governed rpm. Engine damage may the maximum governed speed, result if overspeed conditions occur. indicating an overspeed condition, apply the service brake or shift to a

182 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Driving Tips and Techniques

higher gear to bring engine rpm use. The driver must perform the daily and within the optimum speed range. weekly checks of the vehicle. WARNING • When driving downhill: shift to a Maintenance factors affecting fuel lower gear, use the engine brake (if consumption: DO NOT look at the Instrument Cluster so equipped), and use the service • Air and/or fuel filters partially Display for prolonged periods while the brake, keeping the engine speed clogged vehicle is moving. Only glance at the below 2,100 rpm. monitor briefly while driving. Failure to • Engine valves out of adjustment When the engine speed reaches its do so can result in the driver not being • Injection pump improperly maximum governed speed, the injection attentive to the vehicle’s road position synchronized pump governor cuts off fuel to the engine. or situation, which could lead to an ac- • Injection nozzles defective or 4 However, the governor has no control over cident and possible death, personal in- uncalibrated the engine rpm when it is being driven by jury, or equipment damage. • Improperly inflated tires the vehicle's transmission, for example, on steep downgrades. Apply service brakes or • Wheel bearings improperly The Instrument cluster display provides adjusted shift to a higher gear. Fuel economy and information to help the driver optimize • Clutch improperly adjusted or worn engine performance are also directly vehicle efficiency. See Optimal Engine (slipping) related to driving habits: Speed Indicator on page 184 for more • The best results in trip time and information. A driver will find the section • Fuel leaks fuel economy are obtained while describing Trip Information and the rpm Wrong driving habits must be corrected driving the vehicle at a steady detail useful. and the recommendations on economic speed. driving should be followed. Driving factors • Shift into higher or lower gears (or Fuel Consumption affecting fuel consumption: apply the service brake) to keep The vehicle's fuel consumption is • Excessive speed and unnecessary engine rpm near the lower end of connected to five important factors: fast acceleration the optimum operating range. maintenance, driving habits, general • Long periods of idling • Avoid rapid acceleration and condition of the road, traffic conditions, and • Driving with foot resting on the braking. vehicle load. (manual transmission) clutch pedal Proper maintenance will keep the vehicle running like new even after long periods of

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 183 DRIVING - What to Consider when using a Sleeper Bunk

General Condition Other factors affecting fuel consumption What to Consider when WARNING are related to loads and the type of roads on which the vehicle operates. It is not using a Sleeper Bunk Be sure the latch that holds the upper always possible to choose the most If your vehicle has an upper and lower bunk in the folded position is working adequate road, but the ideal road is the bunk, the upper bunk can be folded up out properly so the bunk will not fall down. one that allows a steady speed in high of the way to provide you with more If the bunk falls, you could be injured. gear, without requiring frequent braking dressing area in the sleeper cab. The lower and acceleration. The following general bunk has storage underneath it to stow 4 conditions can affect fuel consumption: your luggage and other belongings. WARNING • Overload The upper bunk weight limit is 320 lb (145 • Unbalanced load kg). Any loose items on the upper or lower bunk should be moved to a secured • Very high load place before driving the vehicle. Fail- • Inadequate roads WARNING ure to comply may result in death, per- • Traffic conditions sonal injury, equipment or property Always keep the lower bunk in its damage. Optimal Engine Speed Indicator down (latched) position while the vehi- cle is moving. If left open, stored items The tachometer displays a green bar just could become loose during an acci- WARNING below the most efficient engine speed for dent and strike you. Before you move the vehicle. the vehicle, check to be sure the lower Be sure the restraint system is used The placement and size of this bar is bunk is latched securely. Failure to when anyone is occupying the sleeper dependent on the engine as installed at the comply may result in death or personal while the vehicle is moving. In an acci- factory. The driver’s general goal should be injury. dent, an unrestrained person lying in a to select a gear that keeps the tachometer sleeper bunk could be seriously in- needle positioned over the green light as jured. He or she could be thrown from much as possible during steady state the bunk. Failure to comply may result driving. In addition to proper maintenance in death, personal injury, equipment or and good driving habits, this visual cue can property damage. help minimize the fuel consumption.

184 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

This will free it from the anchored Turbocharger position and allow you to lower the bunk. WARNING This cooling-down practice is especially To Raise Fold the upper bunk up and push it important on a turbocharged engine. The Upper against the retaining latch until you hear Be sure no one ever rides in the upper Bunk a click. Pull on the bunk to be sure it is turbocharger contains bearings and seals bunk. That person could be thrown out latched securely. that are subjected to hot exhaust gases. in an accident and could be very seri- While the engine is operating, heat is ously injured. The upper bunk is not carried away by circulating oil. If you stop equipped with a restraint system. DO Upper Bunk Ladder Considerations the engine suddenly, the temperature of NOT use the upper bunk while you are If your vehicle is equipped with the upper the turbocharger could rise as much as moving. Failure to comply may result bunk ladder, ensure that you follow the 100°F (55°C) above the temperature 4 in death, personal injury, equipment or safety tips as detailed in How to Access reached during operation. A sudden rise in property damage. the Upper Bunk on page 14. temperature like this could cause the bearings to seize or the oil seals to loosen. The sleeper restraint is stored in a compartment on the rear sleeper cab wall. Refueling Sleeper Bunks and Restraints on page 30, Stopping the Vehicle Air space in your fuel tanks allows water to for more information on cab/seat restraint condense there. To prevent this A hot engine stores a great amount of systems. condensation while you are stopped, fill heat. It doesn’t cool down immediately your tanks to 95 percent of capacity. When after you shut it off. Always cool your refueling, add approximately the same WARNING engine down before shutting it off. You will amount to each fuel tank on vehicles with greatly increase its service life. more than one tank. Failure to properly use the sleeper re- Idle the engine at 1,000 rpm for five straint when an individual is located in minutes. Then low idle for 30 seconds the sleeper bunk and the vehicle is before shutdown. This will allow circulating moving can result in death or personal coolant and lubricating oil to carry away injury. heat from the cylinder head, valves, pistons, cylinder liners, turbocharger, and To Lower Pull on the lanyard in the upper left bearings. This way you can prevent Upper corner of the bunk to release the bunk. serious engine damage that may result Bunk from uneven cooling.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 185 DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

gine manufacturers. If you need further al injury. Always set the parking WARNING information on fuel specifications, con- brakes. Never rely on the trailer hand sult the Engine Operation and Mainte- brake or truck air brakes to hold a DO NOT carry additional fuel contain- nance Manual. parked vehicle. ers in your vehicle. Fuel containers, ei- ther full or empty, may leak, explode, If your vehicle is equipped with fuel shut off and cause or feed a fire. Failure to valves for the take-off and return lines, they WARNING comply may result in death or personal are located on the fuel lines entering the injury. top of the fuel tank. Fuel shut off valves for Lift axles that are not equipped with 4 the fuel crossover line are on the bottom of parking brakes should be fully raised the fuel tank, at the crossover line when parking the vehicle. Lift axles, WARNING connection. that are not equipped with parking brakes, left in the down position while Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- Final Stopping Procedures parked, in certain cases, could cause tion source could cause an explosion. the parked vehicle to roll, causing an A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with Your vehicle will be easier to start driving accident involving death or personal diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- when you are ready, and it will be safer for injury. sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap anyone who might be around it. Please near an open flame. Use only the fuel remember, too, that in some states it is 1. Set the parking brake before and/or additives recommended for illegal to leave the engine running and the leaving the driver’s seat. To hold your engine. Failure to comply may re- vehicle unattended. your vehicle while it is parked, DO sult in death, personal injury, equip- NOT rely on: ment or property damage. WARNING • Air Brakes • Hand Control Valve for Trailer Using the trailer hand brake or air Brakes CAUTION brakes to hold a parked vehicle is dan- • Engine Compression gerous. Because they work with air 2. If you are parked on a steep grade, Use only Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel pressure, these brakes could come block the wheels. (ULSD) Fuel, as recommended by en- loose. Your vehicle could roll, causing an accident involving death or person-

186 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) DRIVING - Stopping the Vehicle

4

4. Secure the vehicle. Close all the windows and lock all the doors. 3. Drain water from the air reservoirs. While the engine and air supply system are still warm, drain moisture from the air reservoirs. Open the reservoir drains just enough to drain the moisture. Don’t deplete the entire air supply. Be sure to close the drains before leaving the vehicle.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 187 MAINTENANCE -

Chapter 5 | MAINTENANCE

New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule...... 191 First Day...... 191 First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km...... 192 First 500 mi / 800 km...... 192 First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km...... 192 5 First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km...... 193 Maintenance Schedule...... 194 At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM...... 195 Component Specific Intervals...... 199 Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly...... 203 Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months...... 208 Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km...... 209 Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months...... 213 Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually...... 222 Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km...... 227 Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years...... 228

188 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE -

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years...... 229 Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years...... 229 Lubricants...... 230 Checking Oil Level...... 231 Air System...... 232 Dual Air System Function Test...... 234 Air Dryer Maintenance...... 234 Air Tanks...... 236 5 Air Gauges and Air Leaks...... 236 Air Compressor...... 238 Brake System...... 239 Cab Maintenance...... 241 Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods...... 247 Safety Restraint System - Inspection...... 247 Cooling System Maintenance...... 250 Electrical System...... 254 Engine Maintenance...... 264 Frame...... 271 Fuel System...... 273

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 189 MAINTENANCE -

Front Axle and Suspension...... 273 Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance...... 276 Noise and Emission Control...... 279 Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps...... 282 Rear Axle and Suspension...... 282 Steering System...... 288 Driveline...... 290 5 Tires...... 290 Wheels...... 294 Windshield Wiper/Washer...... 297 Transmission Maintenance...... 297 Hydraulic Clutch...... 298 Specification Reference Charts...... 299

190 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule

New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule First Day

First Day

Perform a total vehicle alignment once a body is installed on the truck chassis.

Steering U-joint Pinch Bolt • Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance instructions.

Front Suspension - U-bolts • Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U-bolts using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified 5 torque value. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Shock Absorbers • Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Spring Pins and Shackles • Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Ride Height • Inspect that ride height is within specifications. (Refer to Air Suspension Ride Height for maintenance instructions)

Front Axle - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts • Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. Tighten the fasteners using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified torque value. (Refer to the Hendrickson operator’s manual for torque specifications.)

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 191 MAINTENANCE - First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km

First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km

First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km4

Wheel Mounting • Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.

First 500 mi / 800 km 5 First 500 mi / 800 km5

Front Axle U-Bolt Torque • Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.

Charge Air Cooler and Air Intake Pipe Clamps • Retorque fasteners. Refer to Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values on page 266 for maintenance instructions.

First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km

4 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. 5 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

192 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km

First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km6

Rear Suspension Fasteners • Refer to Rear Axle and Suspension on page 282 for maintenance instructions.

First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4,800-8,000 km 7 5 Transmission Lubrication • For Fuller transmission, refer to Fuller Transmission Lubrication on page 297 for maintenance instructions. • For Allison transmission, refer to Allison Transmission Lubrication on page 298 for maintenance instructions.

Axle Lubrication. • For Meritor axle, refer to Meritor Axle Lubrication on page 286 for maintenance instructions. • For Eaton/Dana axle, refer to Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication on page 285 for maintenance instructions.

6 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. 7 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 193 MAINTENANCE - Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Schedule WARNING WARNING

Preventive maintenance program begins If the engine must be operating to in- Always support the vehicle with appro- with the daily and weekly routine checks spect, be alert and cautious around priate safety stands if it is necessary to Daily Checks on page 35. Routine vehicle the engine at all times. Failure to com- work underneath the vehicle. A jack is checks can help avoid many large, ply may result in death, personal in- not adequate for this purpose. Failure expensive, and time consuming repairs. jury, equipment or property damage. to comply may result in death, person- The vehicle will operate better, be safer, al injury, equipment or property dam- and last longer. Neglect of recommended age. maintenance can void your vehicle’s WARNING warranty. Some maintenance operations 5 demand skills and equipment you may not If work has to be done with the engine WARNING have. For such situations, please take your running, always (1) set the parking vehicle to an authorized Service Center. brake, (2) block the wheels, and (3) When working underneath the vehicle ensure that the shift lever or selector is without appropriate safety stands but WARNING in Neutral. Failure to comply may re- with the wheels on the ground (not sult in death, personal injury, equip- supported), make sure that (1) the ve- Before attempting any procedures in ment or property damage. hicle is on hard level ground, (2) the the engine compartment, stop the en- parking brake is applied, (3) all wheels gine and let it cool down. Hot compo- are blocked (front and rear) and (4) re- nents can burn skin on contact. Failure WARNING move the ignition key so that the en- to comply may result in death, person- gine cannot be started. Failure to com- al injury, equipment or property dam- Exercise extreme caution to prevent ply may result in death, personal in- age. neckties, jewelry, long hair or loose jury, equipment or property damage. clothing from getting caught in the fan blades or another moving engine parts. Failure to comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage.

194 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

the vehicle application. These tasks will be procedures consult your vehicle shown as separate tasks and will have the maintenance manual. WARNING words “ON HIGHWAY”, “CITY DELIVERY” • The initial fill of drive axle lubricant or “OFF-HIGHWAY” after the description. must be changed before the end of NEVER start or let the engine run in These tasks are differentiated because the first scheduled maintenance an enclosed, unventilated area. Ex- they are dependent on the vehicle’s interval. See the axle haust fumes from the engine contain operating environment. On highway is manufacturer's operator's manual carbon monoxide, a colorless and defined for applications where the vehicle for recommended lubrication odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can is NOT used off of a paved road during specifications and service intervals. be fatal if inhaled. Failure to comply normal operation. City Delivery is defined • The initial fill of lubricant in manual may result in property damage, per- for applications where frequent start and sonal injury, or death. transmissions must be changed stopping is required during normal before the end of the first operation and the highway is used maintenance interval. See the infrequently and for short periods of time. 5 WARNING transmission manufacturer's Off highway is defined for applications operator's manual for where the vehicle may be driven off the Disconnect the battery ground cable recommended lubrication pavement on a regular basis, even if it is specifications and service intervals. whenever you work on the fuel system an infrequent basis and/or for a brief time • If your vehicle is equipped with an or the electrical system. When you period. Please contact an authorized automatic transmission, consult the work around fuel, do not smoke or service dealership if there are questions owner’s manual for it that came work near heaters or other fire haz- regarding which interval to follow. Consult with your vehicle to obtain lubricant ards. Keep an approved fire extin- the supplier for specific recommendations check and change intervals. guisher near to you. Failure to comply where discrepancies develop between may result in death, personal injury, these recommendations in this table and equipment or property damage. component supplier recommendations. • Engine lubricating oil change The following pages contain a table of At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 intervals aren’t listed here. Refer to maintenance tasks with the related your engine’s operating manual for km or at first PM intervals for each task on the right side of recommendations. For specific the table. The top of the table displays a information on maintenance guide to a maintenance interval and its schedule. Some tasks are dependent on

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 195 MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Front Suspension U-bolts • (ON HIGHWAY) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as required; (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.) • (VOCATIONAL) Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U- bolts after the first day or two of operation. Then tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as required; (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (SISU) - Axle Housing • Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 • Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287 5 • Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287

Rear Suspension - U-bolts • Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required.(Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Rear Suspension - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners • Check the condition and the fastener torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required; (Refer to Rear Axle and Suspension on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case • Inspect for visible damage, signs of overheating, and leaks. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

196 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (OFF HIGHWAY) • Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD • Initial oil change: Drain oil while warm: flush case with gear oil-compatible fluid, clean magnetic drain plug, and refill. Do not flush the case with any solvent.

Cooling - Hoses • Check the radiator and heater hoses for leaks. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance 5 instructions.)

Cooling - Fan Clutch • Check for air leaks. Check the fan drive bearings (turn the sheave in both directions to check for worn hub bearings.)(Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Solenoid Valve • Check the fan drive for proper engagement and disengagement. (Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir (ON HIGHWAY) • Drain, replace the filter, and refill; (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 197 MAINTENANCE - At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Power Steering - Reservoir (OFF HIGHWAY) • Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link Tube Clamp and Ball Socket • Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt and Nut • Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft • Check the torque on the pinch bolt and nut. (Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (ON HIGHWAY) • Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325°F (-23 to 163°C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) • Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325°F (-23 to 163°C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (ON HIGHWAY, OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) • Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

198 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM8

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Straps • Check the strap tightness: tighten to proper torque value as required; aluminum tank - 30 lb-ft (41 N·m) cylindrical steel tank - 8 lb-ft (11 N·m.) (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 Slip Member and U-joints • Lubricate*

Driveshafts - Models SPL- 140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD Slip Members and U- joints (OFF HIGHWAY) • Lubricate*

Electrical and Lights - Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Sending Unit • Check the mounting screws and electrical connections for worn or damaged wires and connectors. (Refer to Diesel Exhaust 5 Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Component Specific Intervals

These maintenance tasks should be reviewed at each maintenance interval. They are not specific to one interval.

8 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. * Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 199 MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

Component Specific Intervals9

Drive Axle (Dana) - Axle Housing Drive Axle - Dana on page 285

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Kingpin Bushings, Thrust Bearings, and Tie Rod Ball Ends (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Lubricate with approved grease. Weekly regardless of mileage. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steering Knuckle Spindles, Thrust Bearings, Kingpins, Drawkeys, Tie Rod Ends, Steering Stops, 5 and Bushings (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Inspect for wear and damage and for endplay. Shim or replace as required. Weekly regardless of mileage. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission (Only) - Lubrication (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Perform maintenance on the air dryer - 360,000 miles/576,000 km (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.) • • Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Air Intake - Air filter • Replace the engine intake air filter element. Every 12 months or when required by air restriction indicator or required by the engine manufacturers operator manual. (Refer to Air Intake System on page 268 for maintenance instructions.)

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

200 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

Component Specific Intervals9

Clutch - Clutch Hydraulic Fluid • Replace fluid and bleed system. 240,000 mi (384,000 km) or 2 years, whichever occurs first. (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page 298 for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Tires • Check inflation pressure. Weekly "cold" using calibrated gauge. (Refer to Tires on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 slip member and U-joints • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-100 slip member and U-joints • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance. 5

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/250XL slip members and U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY) • Lubricate. 350,000 mi (560,000 km) 1st interval and then every 100,000 mi (160,00 km) after that.

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/250XL slip members and U-joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. * Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 201 MAINTENANCE - Component Specific Intervals

Component Specific Intervals9

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/170XL/ 250XL slip members and U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY and CITY) • Inspect. U-joint inspections should be performed every time a vehicle comes in for scheduled maintenance.

Aftertreatment System - Diesel particulate filter • Clean filter. Refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Aftertreatment System - Diesel exhaust fluid supply module • Replace filter. Refer to the Engine Maintenance Manual.

Air - Air dryer (ON HIGHWAY) 5 • 360,000 miles/576,000 km (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.) Air - Air Dryer (Oil- Coalescing Desiccant Cartridge) • Annually regardless of mileage. (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Engine - Basic Engine Maintenance and service interval recommendations are detailed in the engine manufacturer’s Operations and Maintenance Manual included with the vehicle. The engine manufacturer’s recommendations vary depending engine model. Information is also available from authorized dealers, the engine manufacturer’s authorized service centers, and the engine manufacturer’s web site.

Safety - Three-point Safety Belt System • Inspect. 20,000 miles/32,000km If the vehicle is exposed to severe environmental or working conditions, more frequent inspections may be necessary. (Refer to Safety Restraint System - Inspection on page 247 for maintenance instructions.)

9 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

202 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Frame - Fifth Wheel • Check the kingpin lock and plate for wear and function: lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.) (Refer to Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance on page 272 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Kingpin Bearings (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) • Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 5 Front Suspension - Spring Pins • Check for proper function. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - U-bolts (OFF HIGHWAY) • Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U- bolts after the first day or two of operation. Then tighten the nuts to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Leaf Spring Bushing Threaded (optional) (LINE HAUL, CITY DELIVERY and OFF HIGHWAY) • EP Chassis Grease NLGI Grade 2

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 203 MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Check oil level • Visually inspect for damage or leaks.

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Breather • Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace.

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Axle Housing • Check the "cold" fill level at the differential carrier plug for a pinion angle of less than 7 degrees, or at the axle bowl plug for a pinion angle of greater than 7 degrees. Tighten the plug to 35-50 lb-ft (47-68 N·m.) (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.) 5 • Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Breather • Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Slack Adjusters • Check the push rod travel and check the control arm for cracks. Adjust at reline. (Refer to Auto Slack Adjuster on page 240 for maintenance instructions.) • Lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Air System • Check air lines and fittings for leaks. Adjust routing as required to prevent chafing. Check tank mounting and condition. (Refer to How to Check the Compressed Air System for Leaks on page 237 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

204 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubcaps • Clean the sight window. Check the center plug, mounting flange, and fill plug for leaks and for proper installation. Replace broken or damaged parts. Check the lubricant level and add as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case • Inspect for visible damage, signs of overheating, and leaks. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 • Inspect: Check oil level, inspect for leaks and any visible damage. 5

Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD • Replace/clean the air filter pre-cleaner, if equipped.

Air Intake - Pre-Cleaner • Inspect for cuts, irregular wear, missing lugs, sidewall damage, etc. (Refer to Air Intake System on page 268 for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Tires • Inspect the wheel disc for any cracks or surface irregularities. Inspect the rim edge and bead seat area for damage. Replace any damaged wheels - DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REPAIR. (Refer to Tires on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 205 MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Tires and Wheels - Disc Wheels • Inspect the mounting ring, rim gutter, side ring, and lock ring for damage: replace as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Demountable Rims • Check the tightness of the fasteners and tighten the fasteners to the specified torque as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Tires and Wheels - Wheel Nuts and Studs • Inspect for damaged hex corners, stripped or damaged threads, and excessive corrosion: clean or replace as required. (Refer to 5 Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.) Power Steering - Reservoir • Check the fluid level. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Power Assist Cylinder • Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) • Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, HD grease.). (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Steps • Check for snug fit of side plates against tank and tank straps. Check for damaged or broken steps, missing bolts, and missing grommet between tank and side plate. Replace missing or damaged parts and adjust for fit as required. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

206 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Driveshafts - Models SPL-90, 1710 and 1810 Slip Member and U-joints • Lubricate

Driveshafts - Model SPL-100 Slip Member and U-joints • Check the condition of the cables, cushion clamps, nylon tie straps, and routing. Replace a cushion clamp if the rubber has deteriorated. Repair or tighten terminals, and secure cables to prevent chafing. Replace damaged cables (cuts, cracks, or excessive wear.) (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Cables Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Batteries (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Check for cracks and damage, electrolyte level, condition of terminals, and tightness of hold downs. (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Box and Tray (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Check the box integrity. Clean the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box. (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Cable Fasteners • Check battery cable fasteners and tighten as necessary to 10-15 lb-ft (13.6-20.3 N·m) as specified on the battery label. (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Warning Lights in Light Bar • Check at the ignition start position to verify bulb check and systems check function. (Refer to Bulb Check on page 79 for maintenance instructions.)

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. * Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 207 MAINTENANCE - Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly10

Electrical and Lights - Turn, Stop, Reverse Lights and Signals • Visual check. (Refer to Daily Checks on page 35).

Electrical and Lights - Power Supply Harnesses (engine, Transmission, etc.) • Check for worn or damaged insulation, corroded terminals, frayed wires, and oil or fluid leaks on the connectors or wiring. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Air Conditioner • Operate the system. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Cabin Fresh Air Filter (ON HIGHWAY) 5 • Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Cabin Fresh Air Filter (OFF-HIGHWAY) • Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.)

Aftertreatment System - System • Check for leaks and proper support. (Refer to Noise and Emission Control on page 279 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

10 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

208 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Every 25,000 mi / 40,000 km / 6 Months

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Kingpin Joint Grease/Tie Rod Ends • Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Based: #1 or #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Shock Absorbers • Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - Spring Pins and Shackles • Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Front Suspension - SOFTEK NXT (Hendrickson) - U-bolts • Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts • Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. (Refer to the Hendrickson operator’s manual for torque specifications.)

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 209 MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Front Suspension - Spring Pins • Lubricate with approved grease. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Check oil level and inspect for leaks. • Visually inspect for damage or leaks.

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Breather • Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace. 5 Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Drain and replace MINERAL BASE lubricant. Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Axle Housing • Check the "cold" fill level at the differential carrier plug for a pinion angle of less than 7 degrees, or at the axle bowl plug for a pinion angle of greater than 7 degrees. Tighten the plug to 35-50 lb-ft (47-68 N·m.) (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.) • Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Breather • Check the operation. If the cap doesn't rotate freely, replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Treadle Valve • Clean the area around the treadle, boot, and mounting plate. Check the pivot and mounting plate for integrity. Check the plunger boot for cracks. Lubricate roller pin, pivot pin, and plunger (NLGI #2 grease.) (Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

210 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Lining • Inspect: replace as required. (Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) • Check the bearing endplay and adjust as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hub Seals (all) • Check for leaks: replace as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Brake Drums • Inspect for visible cracks, heat checking, galling or scoring of the braking surface, and for severe corrosion on the outside surface. Check for out-of-round or oversize condition [0.080 in. (2 mm) more than the original diameter]. Replace as required. 5 (Refer to Brake System on page 239 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission and Transfer Case • Check the drain plugs for tightness. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission • Check the oil level: refill as required. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

Clutch - Clutch Release Bearing • Lubricate. (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page 298 for maintenance instructions.) • Inspect and adjust when necessary (no adjustment required for SOLO type clutches.) (Refer to Hydraulic Clutch on page 298 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 211 MAINTENANCE - Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) • Check coolant/antifreeze condition. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (OFF HIGHWAY or CITY DELIVERY) • Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325°F (-23 to 163°C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link and Tie Rod Arm Ball Sockets (ON HIGHWAY) • Lubricate (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank StrapsFuel Tank on page 273 Electrical and Lights - Fuel and Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Sending Unit • Check the mounting screws and electrical connections for worn or damaged wires and connectors. (Refer to Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Heater and Air Conditioner • Perform the checks per Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276

Air - Air Compressor Governor • Replace air strainer. (Refer to Air Compressor on page 238 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Air Lines • Check condition and routing to prevent chafing. (Refer to Air Compressor on page 238 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

212 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km11

Air - Air Dryer • Perform the checks listed; (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

12 Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months 5 Frame - Fifth Wheel • Inspect fifth wheel operation. (Refer to Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance on page 272 for maintenance instructions.)

Frame - Engine Mounting • Inspect engine mounts every 60,000 miles (96,000 km.) (Refer to Engine Mounting on page 271 for maintenance instructions.) Contact an authorized vehicle OEM dealership if engine mounts need servicing.

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) • Synthetic SAE 75W-140, SAE 50. • Mineral Oil SAE 75W, 75W-90, 75W-140, 80W-90, 85W-140. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

11 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. 12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 213 MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Semi-fluid (Adjusted) • Semi-Fluid Synthetic Grease: Delo SF, Mobil SCH 007. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Grease Pack (Adjusted) • Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Base: #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Kingpin Bearings and Tie Rod Ends (LINE HAUL) • Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 5 Front Axle - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Axle Clamp Through Bolts • Check the tightness of the through bolts at the bolt head. Tighten fasteners using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified torque value. (Refer to the Hendrickson operator’s manual for torque specifications.)

Front Suspension - Front Spring • Inspect for cracked leaves, worn bushings, and excessive corrosion. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - Spring Pins and Shackles • Inspect for worn parts and excessive joint clearance. Shim or replace as required. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - Shock Absorbers • Inspect for leaking, body damage, and damaged or worn bushings. Replace as required. Check the shock mounting stud torque. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

214 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Front Suspension U-bolts - U-bolts (ON HIGHWAY and VOCATIONAL) • Check the general condition and the tightness of the nuts. Tighten the U-bolts using a calibrated torque wrench to the specified torque value. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Suspension - SOFTEK® NXT (Hendrickson) - Ride Height • Inspect that ride height is within specifications. (Refer to Air Suspension Ride Height for maintenance instructions)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Drain and replace MINERAL BASE lubricant.

Drive Axle (Dana) - Axle Housing • Visually inspect for damage or leaks. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.) 5 • Check oil level. Check "cold." Torque the drain plug. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Air Shift Unit • Check the lubricant level. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Pump (OFF HIGHWAY) • Remove the magnetic strainer and inspect for wear particles. Wash in solvent and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Filter (OFF HIGHWAY) • Change. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Magnetic Drain Plug and Breather (OFF HIGHWAY) • Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 215 MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Drive Axle (SISU) • Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 • Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection on page 287 • Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287

Rear Suspension - U-bolts • Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Camshaft Bearing • Check for excessive camshaft play in the axial and radial directions. Max allowable play is 0.003 in. Lubricate (NLGI #2 grease.) 5 (Refer to Drum Brake Inspection on page 241 for maintenance instructions.)

Drum Brakes (All) - Brake Air System • Clean or replace the inline filters. (Refer to Air System on page 232 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix®) - Brake Pads • Inspect: replace as required. (Refer to How to inspect brake pads on disc brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix®) - Brake Disc/rotor • Inspect for visible cracks, heat checking, galling, or scoring of surface. Check for runout (max allowable is 0.002 in.) (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix®) - Caliper Sliding Function • Ensure caliper slides freely with no obstructions or excessive play. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

216 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Disc Brakes (Bendix®) - Caliper Slide Pins • Inspect protective caps of the guide pins for damage or cracking. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Disc Brakes (Bendix®) - System Operation • Check operation: inspect as per manufacturer’s service literature. (Refer to Air Disc Brakes on page 240 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) • Inspect for leaks. Check the bearing endplay and adjust as required. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions. ) 5 Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners • Check the condition of the fasteners and their torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Oil Cooler • Clean the fins (air-to-oil type) and body. Check the hose condition and for leaks: replace as required. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (OFF HIGHWAY) • Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 217 MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Auxiliary Transmission - Cotta Transfer Case TR2205 Fabco Transfer Case TC142/TC143/ TC170/ TC270 Marmon-Harrington Transfer Case MVG2000/ MVG2000SD • Initial oil change: Drain oil while warm: flush case with gear oil-compatible fluid, clean magnetic drain plug, and refill. Do not flush the case with any solvent. • Change oil.

Air Intake - Air Intake Piping, Mounting, and Charge Air Cooler • Check the system for broken pipes, leaks, joint integrity, cleanliness, and proper support. (Refer to Air Intake System on page 268 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Hoses 5 • Check the radiator and heater hoses for leaks. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Fan Clutch • Check for air leaks. Check the fan drive bearings (turn the sheave in both directions to check for worn hub bearings.) (Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.

Cooling - Solenoid Valve • Check the fan drive for proper engagement and disengagement. (Refer to Engine Fan on page 267 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Reservoir (OFF HIGHWAY) • Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

218 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Power Steering - Steering Gear • Check the lash of the sector shaft: adjust as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.) • Grease the trunnion bearing (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.) • Grease the input shaft seal (EP NLGI #2 lithium-based, moly-filled, HD grease.) (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Power Steering - Hoses and Tubes • Check for leaks and chafing. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Drag link Tube Clamp and Ball Socket • Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance 5 instructions.)

Steering Components - Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt and Nut • Check the torque: tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft • Check the torque on the pinch bolt and nut. (Refer to Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications on page 290 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Intermediate Shaft U-joints (ON HIGHWAY) • Lubricate [EP NLGI #2 HD grease, -10 to 325°F (-23 to 163°C) range]. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 219 MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tanks • Inspect tanks, brackets, hoses, and fittings for correct location, tightness, abrasion damage, and leaks: repair or replace as required. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL- 140/140HD/170/170HD/250/250HD Slip Members and U- joints (ON HIGHWAY and LINEHAUL) • Lubricate*

Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Batteries (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) • Check for cracks and damage, electrolyte level, condition of terminals, and tightness of hold downs. Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions. 5 Battery Boxes, Tool Boxes, and Steps - Battery Box and Tray (ON HIGHWAY and LINE HAUL) • Check the box integrity. Clean the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box. Check the drain tube and check for acid leaks. Check condition of all equipment mounted under the box. (Refer to Batteries on page 258 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Alternator • Check operation and output. (Refer to Alternator on page 262 • Check tightness of the pulley nut. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.) • Check the tension of the drive belt. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.) • Check tightness of the terminal hex nuts. (Refer to Install Engine Belt on page 266 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Starter • Check torque on hex nuts. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. * Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

220 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Electrical and Lights - ECM Connector • Check the tightness of the ECM connector. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.) for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Wheel Sensors • Check for damaged sensors and connectors, and worn or frayed wires. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.)

Electrical and Lights - Power Supply Harnesses (engine, Transmission, etc.) • Check for worn or damaged insulation, corroded terminals, frayed. Wash to remove excess grease. (Refer to Electrical System on page 254 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods - Body and Cab Hold down Bolts, Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247

For Cab Structure, Doors, Hoods – Hinges and Latch (EXCLUDING door hinges) • Lubricate with silicone spray. (Refer to Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Condenser • Clear any debris from the front of the condenser. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for maintenance instructions.)

Aftertreatment System - Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank • Inspect the tank, straps, brackets, hoses and fittings for abrasion damage, leaks, tightness and fully engaged connectors. (Refer to Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 221 MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months12

Air - System • Lubricate. (Refer to Air System on page 232 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Inline Filters • Replace elements or clean with solvent. (Refer to Replace Engine Air Filter for maintenance instructions.)

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 5 km / Annually Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Frame - Frame Fasteners • Check for tightness: tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304 for maintenance instructions.)

Frame - Crossmembers and Mounting Brackets • Inspect for cracks and loose fasteners. Replace or tighten to the specified torque value as required. (Refer to Frame Fastener Torque Requirements on page 304 for maintenance instructions.)

12 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. 13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

222 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) • Synthetic SAE 75W-140, SAE 50W. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath (Adjusted) • Mineral Oil SAE 75W, 75W-90, 75W-140, 80W-90, 85W-140. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Semi-fluid (Adjusted) • Semi-Fluid Synthetic Grease: Delo SF, Mobil SCH 007. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.) Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Grease Pack (Adjusted) 5 • Heavy-Duty Multipurpose Lithium Base: #2 Grade. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Front Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath LMS • Synthetic SAE 75W-90. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Shaft • Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value.

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Shaft • Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value.

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 223 MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Drive Axle (Dana) - Air Shift Unit • Remove the housing cover and drain the lubricant. Wash the parts thoroughly and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Breather • Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Pump (ON HIGHWAY) • Remove the magnetic strainer and inspect for wear particles. Wash in solvent and dry in air. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.) 5 Drive Axle (Dana) - Lube Filter (ON HIGHWAY) • Change. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Dana) - Magnetic Drain Plug and Breather (ON HIGHWAY) • Clean or replace. (Refer to Drive Axle - Dana on page 285 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Lubricant Filter • Change the filter. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Input Shaft and Pinion Shaft • Check and adjust the endplay. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Axle Shaft • Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

224 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Drive Axle (Meritor Line Haul / ON HIGHWAY) - Interaxle Differential • Check the operation. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Lubricant Filter • Change the filter. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Input Shaft and Pinion Shaft • Check and adjust the endplay. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Axle Shaft • Tighten the rear axle flange nuts to the specified torque value. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.) 5

Drive Axle (Meritor City Delivery / OFF HIGHWAY) - Interaxle Differential • Check the operation. (Refer to Drive Axle - Meritor on page 286 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle (SISU) • Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing on page 287 for maintenance instructions.) • Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287 • Drive Axle - SISU Breather and Brakes on page 287

Rear Suspension - Frame and Crossmembers Bolts • Check the torque. Tighten to specified torque value as required. (Refer to Rear Axle and Suspension on page 282 for maintenance instructions.)

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 225 MAINTENANCE - Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Rear Suspension - Mounting Brackets and Fasteners • Check the condition and the fastener torque. Tighten to the specified torque value as required.(Refer to Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) with Standard Seals • Clean the components and check for excessive wear or damage. Change the oil and seal. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) • Perform lab analysis. If lab analysis shows coolant is unsuitable for continued use: Flush, drain, and refill. Add ELC Extender. 5 (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.) Power Steering - Reservoir (ON HIGHWAY) • Drain, replace the filter, and refill. (Refer to Check Power Steering Fluid Level on page 289 for maintenance instructions.)

Steering Components - Steering Linkage • Check all joints for excessive lash: replace as required. (Refer to Steering System on page 288 for maintenance instructions.)

Fuel and Tanks - Fuel Tank Breathers • Check for proper function: clean the drain hoses. (Refer to Fuel Tank on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Driveshafts - Models SPL-140XL/ 170XL/250XL Slip Members and U- joints (OFF HIGHWAY and CITY) • Lubricate

Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods - Body and Cab Hold down Bolts, Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods on page 247

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. * Use only Spicer Driveshaft approved lubricants when greasing Spicer U-joints.

226 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km

Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually13

Heating and Air Conditioning - Heater and Air Conditioner • Full operational and diagnostic check. (Refer to Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance on page 276 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Sleeper Air Filter • Inspect and clean, replace if necessary. (Refer to Sleeper HVAC Air Filter on page 279 for maintenance instructions.)

Heating and Air Conditioning - Recirculation Cab Air Filter (ON HIGHWAY) • Please contact an authorized dealer when the service interval is required to inspect the cabin recirculation air filter. (Refer to Replace the Recirculation Air Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.) Heating and Air Conditioning - Recirculation Cab Air Filter (OFF-HIGHWAY) 5 • Please contact an authorized dealer when the service interval is required to inspect the cabin recirculation air filter. (Refer to Replace the Recirculation Air Filter on page 278 for maintenance instructions.)

Air - Air Dryer (OFF HIGHWAY) • Replace cartridge. (Refer to Air Dryer Maintenance on page 234 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km

13 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 227 MAINTENANCE - Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years

Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km14

Drive Axle - Vocational (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Drain and replace SYNTHETIC BASE lubricant.

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - Hubs (non-LMS) with Outrunner Seals • Clean the components and check for excessive wear or damage. Change the oil and seal. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

5 Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years

Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years15

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) • Replace blank water filter, if applicable. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) with Mineral Lubricant • Wheels on page 294

14 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here. 15 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

228 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years

Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years16

Front Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Steer Axle Wheel Ends: Oil Bath LMS • Synthetic SAE 75W-90. (Refer to Front Axle and Suspension on page 273 for maintenance instructions.)

Drive Axle - Linehaul (PACCAR) - Axle Assembly • Drain and replace SYNTHETIC BASE lubricant. Hub, Drum, and Hubcap - LMS Hubs (Dana) with Synthetic Lubricant 5 • Service the bearings, seals and oil. This interval may be different depending on the results of the regular inspection. (Refer to Wheels on page 294 for maintenance instructions.)

Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years

16 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 229 MAINTENANCE - Lubricants

Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years17

Cooling - Extended Life Coolant (ELC) • Flush, drain, and refill with new coolant. (Refer to Cooling System Maintenance on page 250 for maintenance instructions.)

Main and Auxiliary Transmission (including Eaton Automated or PACCAR Transmission) - Main and Auxiliary Transmission (ON HIGHWAY) • Drain lubricant while warm. Flush each unit with clean flushing oil. (Refer to Transmission Maintenance on page 297 for maintenance instructions.)

therefore, drain (or remove) old lubri- WARNING cants from the unit before refilling it. 5 Lubricants Handle lubricants carefully. Vehicle lu- Engine Schedule service more frequently if you bricants (oil and grease) can be poi- Proper engine lubrication depends on the are operating under severe conditions such sonous and cause sickness, personal outside temperatures where you will be as extreme heat or cold, with very heavy injury, or death. They can also damage driving. Use the oil recommended for the loads, off-road, etc. For any special service the paint on the vehicle. requirements, consult your service conditions you are most likely to be manuals and your lubricant supplier. operating in. You will find a complete engine lubrication service guide in the Please remember: one key to keeping your CAUTION truck running at top economy and Engine Operation Manual that came with prolonging its life is proper lubrication your vehicle. The engine operator manual DO NOT mix different types of lubri- contains specific maintenance tasks that servicing. Neglecting this essential aspect cants. Mixing lubricants (oil and of vehicle care can cost time and money in you or a qualified service technician need grease) of different brands or types to perform to maintain the engine. the long run. could damage vehicle components;

17 Ensure that all maintenance intervals leading up to this point are repeated during this interval prior to the completion of those listed here.

230 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Checking Oil Level

Non-PACCAR Transmissions, Axles and Hubs WARNING NOTE For all non-PACCAR brands, see the Exhaust fumes from the engine con- Keep the engine exhaust system and manufacturer's operator's manual for tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and the vehicle's cab ventilation system recommended lubrication specifications odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- properly maintained. It is recommend- and maintenance intervals. gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, ed that the vehicle's exhaust system damaged, or corroded exhaust system and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- can allow carbon monoxide to enter tent technician every 15,000 miles Checking Oil Level the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into (24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change the cab is also possible from other ve- is noticed in the sound of the exhaust For oil reservoir with side filler plugs hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust (transmission, axles, steering gear boxes, tain your vehicle could cause carbon system, underbody, or cab is dam- transfer cases, etc.) the oil must be level 5 monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in aged. with the filler opening. Use care when personal injury or death. checking the oil level with a finger. Just because you can reach the oil level with a NOTE finger does not mean the oil level is WARNING correct. Use only an exact replacement DPF in Improper Oil Level Never idle your vehicle for prolonged exhaust systems. Using a noncompli- periods of time if you sense that ex- ant DPF as a replacement could vio- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- late these standards and also void the vestigate the cause of the fumes and emission system's warranty. correct it as soon as possible. If the vehicle must be driven under these Driveline Universal Joints Correct Oil Level conditions, drive only with the windows open. Failure to repair the source of Refer to the Spicer Universal Joints and the exhaust fumes may result in death, Driveshafts service manual and lubrication personal injury, equipment or property specifications. damage.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 231 MAINTENANCE - Air System

ber push rods and slack adjusters, Air System they may apply as system pressure WARNING drops. The operation of the vehicle’s braking Never exceed recommended air pres- system and many vehicle accessories sure and always wear safety glasses depends upon the storage and application WARNING when working with air pressure. Never of a high-pressure air supply. look into air jets or direct them at any- After completing any repairs to the air one. Failure to comply may result in WARNING system, always test for air leaks and property damage, personal injury, or check the brakes for safe operation death. DO NOT attempt to modify, alter, re- before putting the vehicle in service. pair or disconnect any component of Failure to comply may result in proper- 5 the air system. Repairs or modifica- ty damage, personal injury, or death. WARNING tions to the air system, other than what is described in this section, should on- Never attempt to disassemble a com- ly be performed by an authorized deal- WARNING ponent until you have read and under- er. Failure to comply may result in per- stood recommended procedures. sonal injury or death. Never connect or disconnect a hose or Some components contain powerful line containing air pressure. It may springs and injury can result if not whip as air escapes. Never remove a properly disassembled. Use only prop- WARNING component or pipe plug unless you are er tools and observe all precautions certain all system pressure has been pertaining to use of those tools. Failure Prior to the removal of any air system depleted. Failure to comply may result to comply may result in property dam- component, always block and hold the in property damage, personal injury, or age, personal injury, or death. vehicle by a secure means other than death. the vehicle's own brakes. Depleting air system pressure may cause the vehi- cle to roll unexpectedly resulting in an accident causing personal injury or death. Keep hands away from cham-

232 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Air System

chambers. Contamination of the air supply cause loss of vehicle control and may system is the major cause of problems in WARNING lead to death or serious personal in- air-operated components such as brake jury. valves, and suspension height control Completely bypassing a Bendix® air valves. To keep contaminants to the lowest dryer will bypass the system’s pres- possible level, follow these maintenance sure protection valves. This could lead WARNING procedures. to loss of air pressure or damage to the vehicle’s air system, which could If the supply and service air tanks are Daily Checks cause an accident involving death or not drained at the recommended fre- • Drain moisture from the supply and personal injury. Always adhere to the quency, water could enter the air lines service air tanks. manufacturer’s procedure if it is nec- and valves. This could cause corrosion essary in an emergency to temporarily or blockage, which could compromise • Operate air devices to circulate bypass a Bendix® air dryer. Failure to the brake system safety and potential- lubricant within the unit. 5 comply may result in death, personal ly cause an accident. Failure to comply Periodically injury, equipment or property damage. may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death. • Clean filter screens ahead of the valves by removing the screens WARNING Your vehicle’s compressor takes outside air and soaking them in solvent. Blow and compresses it, usually to 100-120 psi them dry with pressurized air If a different air dryer brand or model is (689-827 kPa). The compressed air then before reinstalling them. installed on the vehicle other than goes to the reservoirs to be stored until Twice a Year what was originally installed, it could needed. When you operate your air cause the air system to not perform brakes, the stored compressed air flows • Maintain the air compressor to correctly unless the full air system de- into the chambers where it is used to apply prevent excessive oil bypass. See sign is reviewed and modifications your truck and trailer brakes. That is why, your maintenance manual for made to comply with Federal Motor when you push down on your brake pedal, details. Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) you don’t feel the same amount of • Replace worn seals in valves and 121 AirBrake Systems. Failure to pressure on the pedal that you do when air motors as needed. abide by this warning and maintain you apply the brakes on your car. All you compliance to FMVSS 121 could are doing on your truck is opening an air valve to allow air to flow into the brake

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 233 MAINTENANCE - Dual Air System Function Test

accumulation and should be considered Dual Air System Function Air Dryer Maintenance before replacing the desiccant cartridge. • Air usage is exceptionally high and Test not normal for a highway vehicle. NOTE This may be due to accessory air Conduct this test at least every 3 months demands or some unusual air or if there is any indication of a potential Because no two vehicles operate un- requirement that does not allow the problem. der identical conditions, maintenance compressor to load and unload Park the vehicle on level ground and block and maintenance intervals will vary. (compressing and non- the wheels. Have an assistant open drain Experience is a valuable guide in de- compressing cycle) in a normal valves and, where required, observe brake termining the best maintenance inter- fashion or it may be due to action at the wheels. If a malfunction val for any one particular operation. excessive leaks in the air system. occurs during this test, do not move the • In areas where more than a 30°F vehicle until the problem has been 5 (17°C) range of temperature occurs corrected. Engine should be Off with the in one day, small amounts of water key switch to the ON or RUN position. NOTE can accumulate in the air brake A small amount of oil in the system system due to condensation. Under NOTE may be normal and should not, in it- these conditions, the presence of self, be considered a reason to replace small amounts of moisture is Tractor air system must be connected the desiccant cartridge. Oil stained normal and should not be to trailer. desiccant can function adequately. considered as an indication that the dryer is not performing properly. Every 900 operating hours or 25,000 miles • An outside air source has been (40,000 km) or every 3 months check for used to charge the air system. This moisture in the air brake system by air did not pass through the drying opening air tanks, drain cocks, or valves bed. and checking for presence of water. A tablespoon of water found in the air tank would point to the need for a desiccant cartridge change. However, the following conditions can also cause water

234 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Air Dryer Maintenance

Maintenance could cause loss of vehicle control and NOTE may lead to serious personal injury or CAUTION death. Review the warranty policy before per- Replace oil-coalescing desiccant air forming any maintenance procedures. The AD-HF Series air dryer has dryer cartridge every 1 year regardless An extended warranty may be voided incorporated into its design various of mileage. Only use oil-coalescing if unauthorized maintenance is per- components that have typically been desiccant replacement cartridge when formed during this period. installed separately on the vehicle (see replacing. Failure to perform this main- below for components/areas affected): tenance task will void the PACCAR • Pressure protection valves Transmission warranty and may result Bendix® AD-HF Series Air Dryer • Safety valve in expensive transmission damage. Your vehicle may be equipped with a • Solenoid valves and plumbing Bendix® AD-HF series air dryer. Any air • Plumbing of the front and rear 5 Replace (non-oil-coalescing) desiccant dryer replacement should be made with an service air tanks cartridge: identical component. • Plumbing to accessory systems • On-highway operation replace every 2-3 years, 350,000 miles These components are required to meet (560,000 km) or 10,800 hours. WARNING the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 121 - Air Brake • High duty cycle usage such as Systems). As the Warning above states, transit bus, refuse hauler, dump Use of an air dryer brand or model that any other type of air dryer installed in the truck, cement mixers and off- differs from what was originally instal- place of an AD-HF Series will require highway operation replace every 1 led could cause the air system to not changes, modifications and/or additions to year, 100,000 miles (160,000 km) perform correctly unless the full air your vehicle’s air system to maintain or 3,600 hours. system design is reviewed and modifi- cations are made to comply with Fed- compliance with FMVSS 121. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 121 Air Brake Systems. Fail- ure to abide by this warning and main- tain compliance with FMVSS 121

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 235 MAINTENANCE - Air Tanks

• Replace worn seals in valves and air motors as they are needed. Air Tanks Your authorized dealer carries rebuild kits for most units WARNING

If the supply and service air tanks are Air Gauges and Air Leaks not drained at the recommended fre- quency, water could enter the air lines and valves. This could cause corrosion WARNING or blockage, which could compromise the brake system safety and potential- To eject moisture from the air system DO NOT operate the vehicle if leakage 5 ly cause an accident. Failure to comply tanks, pull the line that is connected to the in the air system is detected. Conduct may result in property damage, per- moisture ejection valve. Continue pulling the following procedure and contact an sonal injury, or death. until the air comes out free of water. authorized dealer (or any other proper- ly equipped service center) if a leak is Daily detected. Failure to check the brakes CAUTION The supply and service air tanks, must be or follow these procedures could drained on a daily basis. Operate air cause a system failure, increasing the DO NOT use penetrating oil, alcohol, devices daily to circulate lubricants within risk of an accident and may result in brake fluid, or wax-based oils in the air the unit. personal injury, property damage, or system. These fluids may cause se- death. vere damage to air system compo- Periodically nents. If your vehicle is equipped with air brakes, Clean filter screens ahead of the valves by it has two separate, additional air systems: removing the screens and soaking them in Primary and Secondary. Each air system is solvent. Blow them dry with pressurized air monitored by a gauge indicating system before reinstalling them. pressure in either pounds per square inch • Maintain the air compressor to (psi), and/or kilopascals (kPa). prevent excessive oil bypass

236 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Air Gauges and Air Leaks

The Primary gauge indicates pressure in • Turn red How to Check the Compressed Air the rear braking system: • Indicate below 65 psi (448 kPa) System for Leaks Primary Air Pressure Gauge Or the Low Air System Pressure Alarm • Turns on WARNING • Does not turn off do not attempt to drive the vehicle until the DO NOT operate the vehicle if leakage problem is found and fixed: system in the air system is detected. Conduct The Secondary gauge indicates pressure pressure is too low for normal brake the following procedure and contact an in the front braking system: operation. authorized dealer (or any other proper- Secondary Air Pressure Gauge ly equipped service center) if a leak is detected. Failure to check the brakes NOTE or follow these procedures could cause a system failure, increasing the 5 Park brakes lock up at 60 psi (414 risk of an accident and may result in The Primary and Secondary Air Pressure kPa), the audible alarm will sound at personal injury, property damage, or gauges are shown in the Primary Gauges 65 psi (448 kPa). death. View on the Digital Display.18 At start-up, the Primary and Secondary Air Use this procedure to check the Pressure gauges may indicate red, and the compressed air system due to the Low Air System Pressure alarm may sound following: until the minimum operational pressure • After maintenance 1920 setpoint of 65 psi (448 kPa) is reached. • When an air system component is If the tanks are empty, this can take up to replaced two minutes. If these gauges • When a leak is suspected • Remain red

18 The model 520 Right-hand Stand-up uses additional physical gauges for Primary and Secondary Air Pressure. 19 The model 520 Right-hand Stand-up also indicates low air pressure using a warning light in the physical gauges. 20 The Low Air System Pressure alarm is not active when the engine is off.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 237 MAINTENANCE - Air Compressor

• Periodically, to ensure system 6. Start the engine and build up air pressure reaches 120 psi (827 kPa) and integrity pressure again. compression is reestablished when system To check for Air System leaks 7. Turn the Ignition Switch to OFF pressure falls to 100 psi (690 kPa). 1. Start the engine if not already (stopping the engine) and then Preventive Maintenance running. back to the ON position, but don't 2. Scroll to either the Basic or start the engine. The following service checks are provided Enhanced View to monitor Primary 8. Apply the brakes fully, holding the for your information only and should be and Secondary Air Pressures: see pedal down for five minutes. The performed by a certified mechanic. Contact (1) of Enhanced View. pressure drop should not exceed your dealer or the engine manufacturer's

2 1 1 2 3.0 psi (21 kPa) per minute. Maintenance Manual for further information 9. If you detect excessive leakage (air on servicing air compressors. After pressure loss greater than 3.0 psi completing any repairs to the air system, (21 kPa) after five minutes of brake always test for air leaks, and check the 5 application), a leakage test should brakes for safe operation before putting the be made at the air line connections vehicle in service. Below is a list of areas and at all air brake control units. to maintain for the air compressor: 3 These tests should determine • Inspect compressor air filter 3. Build up air pressure in the system where air is escaping. element, if so equipped, and until the system cutout setpoint or replace element if clogged. Check until 120 psi (827 kPa) is reached. compressor mounting and drive for 4. Turn the Ignition Switch to OFF alignment and belt tension. Adjust (stopping the engine) and then Air Compressor if necessary. back to the ON position, but don't • Remove compressor discharge All compressors, regardless of make or start the engine. valve cap nuts and check for model, run continuously while the engine is The Basic or Enhanced View will presence of excessive carbon. If running. System pressure is controlled by appear. excessive carbon is found, clean or the governor. The governor acts in 5. Release the service brakes, and replace the compressor cylinder conjunction with the unloading mechanism observe the rate of air pressure head. Also, check compressor in the compressor cylinder block to start drop. This rate should not exceed discharge line for carbon, and and stop compression of air. The 2.0 psi (14 kPa) per minute. clean or replace the discharge line compressor is unloaded when the system if necessary.

238 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Brake System

• Disassemble compressor and thoroughly clean and inspect all complies with the respective portions types are so related to one another parts. Repair or replace all worn or of FMVSS 121. A tractor shall not be that a seemingly unimportant change damaged parts, or replace operated or configured as a truck, nor in one may result in a change in how compressor with a factory shall a truck be operated or configured well the brakes work for you on the exchange unit. as a tractor, without significant modifi- road. If parts do not work together cations to the air brake system in order properly, you could lose control of your to retain compliance with FMVSS 121. vehicle, which could cause a serious Contact your dealer for instructions. accident. Brake System Brake adjustment and brake balance must To learn more about brakes, see the Index, WARNING be set carefully to (1) make the most under Brakes. efficient use of the forces available for DO NOT use brake linings with a thick- braking and (2) allow equal stopping forces 5 ness below the specified minimum. at all wheels. Once a brake system is set WARNING Such linings will have lining rivets ex- to specifications, changing any one of its posed that can damage the brake components or any combination of DO NOT work on the brake system drum and reduce brake efficiency, components may cause the system to not without the parking brake set and which could cause death, personal in- work as well. All parts have to work wheels chocked securely. If the vehicle jury or system failure. together to perform as they should. Any is not secured to prevent uncontrolled replacement components in your brake vehicle movement, it could roll and system should be exactly equal to the cause damage to the vehicle, serious WARNING original components. Any changes from personal injury, or death. the original specifications can affect the DO NOT use any replacement part in whole system. All of the following areas are the brake system unless it conforms interrelated and must conform to original CAUTION exactly to original specifications. A specifications: nonconforming part in your vehicle's • Tire size The air brake system of this vehicle brake system could cause a malfunc- • Drum brakes was configured for ONE of the follow- tion resulting in an accident causing • Cam radius ing operations: tractor or truck, and death or personal injury. Sizes and • Wedge angle

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 239 MAINTENANCE - Brake System

• Drum radius How to inspect brake pads on disc brake calipers can burn skin on • Brake linings brakes contact. To inspect the brake pads: • Brake chambers 2. Chock the wheels. 1. Park on level ground and chock the • Slack adjusters 3. Temporarily release the parking wheels. • Disc brakes brakes. 2. Temporarily release the parking • Disc rotors 4. Grab the caliper and move it. This brakes. movement is Running Clearance. All vehicle operators should check their 3. Looking from the ground up at the brakes regularly. 5. Proper Running Clearance is 0.08 bottom of the caliper and rotor, in. (2 mm) of movement of the compare the relative position of two brake caliper (approximately the Air Disc Brakes notches; one located on the caliper thickness of a nickel) in the This vehicle may have disc brakes instead and the other on the carrier. inboard/outboard direction. 5 of drum brakes. 4. Take a measurement from between Have a qualified mechanic provide further these two notches and compare inspection if the caliper does not move or them to the specifications to appears to move more than the specified determine if the pads need to be clearance replaced. Have a qualified mechanic perform a Auto Slack Adjuster detailed inspection if the notches are not found. The pads and rotors should be The auto slack adjuster is a mechanism to measured and compared against the maintain the correct amount of space manufacturers specifications located in the between the braking surface and the brake manufacturer’s service manual. friction material.

1. Brake caliper Inspect Disc Brake Caliper for 2. Caliper mounting flange Running Clearance 3. Brake rotor Regularly inspect caliper for Running 4. Inspection notches Clearance: 1. Stop the vehicle on level ground and let the brakes cool down. Hot

240 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

1. Start the vehicle and get the air Automatic Slack Adjuster Stroke system up to normal operating Specification pressure. Do not apply the parking brake. Chamber Type Stroke 2. Apply pressure to the brake pedal and measure the distance the air 36 (rear brakes) 1.5-2.5 in. (38-57 chamber pushrod traveled. mm) 3. Compare the results to the 30 (rear brakes) 1.5-2 in. (38-51 specification to determine if the mm) automatic slack adjusters need replacing. 16, 20 and 24 (front 1-1.75 in. brakes) (25.4-44.4 mm) WARNING 5 1. Retracted position, no brake pedal applied Manual adjustment of automatic slack 2. Applied position, brake pedal adjusters is a dangerous practice that Cab Maintenance engaged could have serious consequences. It gives the operator a false sense of se- Cab exterior, interior, frame and engine Drum Brake Inspection curity about the effectiveness of the compartment components need brakes. Contact the Service Depart- Have brake drum linings inspected by a maintenance to ensure longevity and safe ment at your dealership if the stroke qualified mechanic for wear at regular operations. A clean vehicle also allows exceeds specifications. A stroke ex- intervals according to the maintenance leaks to be detected easier. ceeding specifications may indicate a schedule. In severe service or off-highway problem with the slack adjuster or the applications inspect the linings more brake foundation. frequently. In addition, periodically check the brake chamber stroke. Replace the slack adjuster if proper stroke cannot be maintained. Operational checks of automatic slack adjusters

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 241 MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

• Only use spot removing fluids in well ventilated areas WARNING WARNING • Any vehicle is subjected to deterioration from multiple causes Always allow hot surfaces to cool DO NOT clean the underside of chas- (i.e. industrial fumes, ice, snow, down before attempting to work near sis, fenders, wheel covers, etc. without corrosive road salt, etc.,) them. Failure to comply may result in protecting your hands and arms. You personal injury or death. may cut yourself on sharp edged metal Exterior and Engine Compartment parts. Failure to comply may result in personal injury, property damage, or Corrosive materials used to remove ice, WARNING death. snow and dust from the road can collect on the entire vehicle with concentrated Handle cleaning agents carefully. accumulations throughout the underbody 5 Cleaning agents may be poisonous. WARNING and engine compartment. If these Keep them out of the reach of children. materials are not removed, accelerated Failure to comply may result in proper- Moisture, ice, and road salt on brakes corrosion (rust) can occur on underbody ty damage, personal injury, or death. may affect braking efficiency. Test the parts such as fuel lines, frame rails, floor brakes carefully after each vehicle pan, electrical and exhaust system, even wash. Failure to comply may result in though they have been provided with WARNING death, personal injury, equipment or corrosion protection. property damage. At least every spring, flush these materials DO NOT use gasoline, kerosene, from the entire vehicle, including the naphtha, nail polish remover or other Vehicle Cleaning underbody and engine compartment, with volatile cleaning fluids. They may be plain water using light water pressure. On • Observe all caution labels toxic, flammable or hazardous in other vehicles used in applications and/or areas ways. Failure to comply may result in • Always read directions on the that experience high usage of, or exposure personal injury, property damage or container before using any product to, corrosive materials, cleaning of the death. • Do not use any solution that can entire vehicle should be done more damage the body paint frequently. If desired, your dealer can do • Most chemical cleaners are this service for you. concentrates that require dilution

242 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

• Chrome surfaces are best cleaned water, especially when the salt-laden with fresh water. Wipe dry to moisture is held against the metal surface CAUTION preserve their luster. A commercial by road grime. It is important to frequently chrome cleaner will remove light clean salty moisture and grime from Do not direct high pressure water onto rust. After cleaning, wax flat stainless steel surfaces. seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- surfaces and apply a thin coat of • If surface rust is encountered, ter the part which will contaminate the rust preventive lubricant around wash the surface and use a system lubricants and fluids. To pre- bolts or other fasteners. commercial polishing compound to vent damage to these components, • Clean aluminum wheels and clean off the rust, followed by a keep a gentle flow of water moving at bumpers with cool water. Tar- coating of wax. all times. Failure to comply may result remover will get rid of heavy • Never use steel wool when in equipment damage. deposits of road grime. To prevent cleaning stainless steel. Minute spotting, wipe aluminum surfaces particles of the steel wool can dry after washing. become embedded in the surface 5 CAUTION • Under corrosive conditions, such of the stainless steel part and as driving on salted roads, clean cause rust staining. Do not direct high pressure water onto aluminum parts with steam or high- electrical components, plug connec- pressure water from a hose. A mild Weather Stripping tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- automotive soap solution will help. Frequent washing of the vehicle is required gine. Failure to comply can accelerate Rinse thoroughly. to remove road grime and contaminants corrosion and degrade electrical com- To maintain the tailpipe's quality finish, that can stain and oxidize paint and ponent which may cause a fire or wash the tailpipe with a soft cloth, mild accelerate corrosion of plated and polished equipment damage. automotive soap, and water or glass metal surfaces. Waxing offers added cleaner. A non-abrasive chrome polish can To prevent rust, keep chromed parts clean protection against staining and oxidation. be used sparingly on hard-to-clean areas. and protected with wax at all times, Do not apply wax in the hot sun and do not DO NOT clean your high-heat chrome especially in winter conditions when the friction burn the paint with a buffing using scouring pads, abrasive chrome roads are salted. machine. Occasionally spray weather- polish, highly acidic chemical cleaners or stripping on doors and windows with • If necessary, use a commercial any other abrasive cleaners. silicone compound to help preserve chrome cleaner to remove light Even high quality stainless steel parts can resiliency. This is especially useful in rust. rust under prolonged exposure to salt

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 243 MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

freezing weather to prevent doors and fabric upholstery with upholstery shampoo • Bleach windows from sticking shut with ice. specially formulated for this purpose. • Acetone • First remove loose dirt, dust or • Any other strong solvent debris with a vacuum cleaner. NOTE • Abrasive cleaners • Use a soft brush to loosen caked- • Sunscreen To allow enough time for your truck's on dirt before vacuuming it away. • Wipe the fabric surface with a finish to cure, wait at least thirty days How to Wash the Exterior of the after the date of manufacture before slightly damp cloth and dry the seat waxing. fabric thoroughly. If the fabric is still Vehicle dirty, wipe using a mixture of mild Your dealer has a number of vehicle-care Cleaning Interior Vinyl and soap and lukewarm water, then dry products and can advise you on which Upholstery thoroughly. ones to use for cleaning the exterior and 5 • If the stain does not come out use interior of your vehicle. an upholstery shampoo specially NOTE formulated for this purpose. Test WARNING the cleaner on a hidden place to Strong cleaning agents such as hand make sure it does not harm the Handle cleaning agents carefully. sanitizer, solvents, paint thinners, win- fabric. Follow the instructions on Cleaning agents may be poisonous. dow cleaner and gasoline/ diesel fuel the container. must never be used on your vehicle's Keep them out of the reach of children. Other interior surfaces may be cleaned interior. Repeated exposure to chemi- Failure to comply may result in proper- using a mixture of mild soap and lukewarm cals such as sunscreen, insect repel- ty damage, personal injury, or death. water, or an automotive interior cleaner, lents containing DEET, or brake fluid used on its intended surface (i.e. use may cause accelerated wear, tacki- leather conditioner on leather surfaces, ness or discoloration of interior surfa- etc.). ces. Avoid frequent or repeated use of the following products on interior surfaces: Wipe vinyl upholstery and lining with a good commercial upholstery cleaner. Do • Alcohol-based cleaners (including not use acetone or lacquer thinner. Clean hand sanitizer) • Methanol-based cleaners

244 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

death, personal injury, equipment or CAUTION WARNING property damage. Do not direct high pressure water onto DO NOT use gasoline, kerosene, seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- naphtha, nail polish remover or other CAUTION ter the part which will contaminate the volatile cleaning fluids. They may be system lubricants and fluids. To pre- toxic, flammable or hazardous in other DO NOT aim the water jet directly at vent damage to these components, ways. Failure to comply may result in door locks or latch. Tape the key holes keep a gentle flow of water moving at personal injury, property damage or to prevent water from seeping into the all times. Failure to comply may result death. lock cylinders. Water in lock cylinders in equipment damage. should be removed with compressed air. To prevent locks from freezing in WARNING the winter, squirt glycerin or lock deicer CAUTION 5 into the lock cylinders. DO NOT clean the underside of chas- sis, fenders, wheel covers, etc. without Do not direct high pressure water onto protecting your hands and arms. You NOTE electrical components, plug connec- may cut yourself on sharp edged metal tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- gine. Failure to comply can accelerate parts. Failure to comply may result in To allow enough time for your truck's corrosion and degrade electrical com- personal injury, property damage, or finish to cure, wait at least thirty days ponent which may cause a fire or death. after the date of manufacture before equipment damage. waxing. • Do not wash the vehicle in WARNING 1. Begin by spraying water over the direct sunshine. dry surface to remove all loose dirt Moisture, ice, and road salt on brakes before applying the car wash • Do not spray water directly into may affect braking efficiency. Test the solution. the cab vents. brakes carefully after each vehicle 2. Using soapy water, wash the wash. Failure to comply may result in vehicle with a clean soft cloth or a soft brush made for automotive cleaning.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 245 MAINTENANCE - Cab Maintenance

• Use cool water and a mild, all times. Failure to comply may result mounted to the firewall in the passenger automotive-type soap. Strong in equipment damage. side rear corner of the engine industrial detergents, cleaning compartment. The filter can be replaced agents and household-type without using any tools. soaps are not recommended CAUTION 1. Tilt the hood open. and may damage the vehicle's 2. Locate the air intake housing at the paint. Do not direct high pressure water onto passenger side rear corner of the • Do not use stiff brushes, paper electrical components, plug connec- engine bay, below the rain tray. towels, steel wool, or abrasive tors, seals or flexible hoses on the en- cleaning compounds because gine. Failure to comply can accelerate they will scratch painted, plated, corrosion and degrade electrical com- and polished metal surfaces. ponent which may cause a fire or 3. Rinse painted surfaces with gentle equipment damage. 5 water pressure frequently while washing to flush away dirt that 5. Wipe everything dry with a chamois might scratch the finishes during to avoid water spots. To prevent the washing operation. water spotting, dry off the cosmetic 4. Hose dirt and grime from the entire surfaces with a clean cloth or chassis. chamois. 6. Remove road tar with an 3. Locate the filter cover labeled automotive-type tar remover or “OPEN” with an arrow pointing CAUTION mineral spirits. towards the rear of the vehicle. 7. After cleaning and drying the entire Slide the filter cover towards the Do not direct high pressure water onto vehicle, apply a quality automotive rear of the vehicle, until you are seals or flexible hoses. Water may en- wax to protect the vehicle's finish. able to remove the cover. ter the part which will contaminate the system lubricants and fluids. To pre- vent damage to these components, Cab HVAC Fresh Air Filter keep a gentle flow of water moving at Replacement The fresh air filter for the cab HVAC is located in the air intake housing that is

246 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods

Care of Display Screens on the Dashboard Safety Restraint System - To clean the screen, dampen a clean, soft, lint-free cloth with water only. A mild glass Inspection cleaner that does not contain alcohol or ammonia may also be used. Cleaners that WARNING contain alcohol and/or ammonia will eventually dry-out, crack and "yellow" the Failure to properly inspect and main- 4. Remove and inspect the filter, screen. Wipe the screen gently back and tain restraint systems can lead to in- referring to the maintenance forth. You can also use a commercial jury or loss of life. Without periodic in- interval schedule. cleaner especially designed for LCD spection and maintenance to detect 5. Install the new air filter into its screens. unsafe conditions, seat restraint com- housing, taking care to align the ponents can wear out or not protect 5 airflow direction indicated on the you in an accident. filter element with the airflow Cab Structure, Doors and direction that's marked on the air intake housing. Hoods 6. Replace the filter cover on the air Lubricate the lower hood pivot (only if lube intake housing and slide the cover fittings are present.) toward the front of the vehicle. An audible "snap" sound can be heard when the cover is correctly installed. If the snap feature is damaged there are two screw features that may be used to secure the cover. 7. Close and secure the vehicle's hood.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 247 MAINTENANCE - Safety Restraint System - Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection Points 7. Mounting hardware for corrosion, proper tightness of bolts and nuts WARNING 8. Web for deterioration, due to exposure to the sun It is important to remember that any time a vehicle is involved in an acci- Factors contributing to reduced seat belt dent, the entire seat belt system must life: be replaced. Unexposed damage • Heavy trucks typically accumulate caused by the stress of an accident twice as many miles as the could prevent the system from func- average passenger car in a given tioning properly the next time it is time period. needed. Failure to comply may result • Seat and cab movement in trucks in death or personal injury. causes almost constant movement 5 of the belt due to ride characteristics and seat design. The constant movement of the belt inside the restraint hardware and the potential for the belt to come in contact with the cab and other vehicle parts, contributes to the 1. Web cut or frayed or extremely wear of the entire system. worn at latch area • Environmental conditions, such as 2. Web cut or frayed at D-loop web dirt and ultraviolet rays from the guide sun, will reduce the life of the seat 3. Comfort Clip cracked or damaged belt system. 4. Buckle casting broken Due to these factors, the three-point safety 5. Retractor Web Storage for damage belt system installed in your vehicle (located behind trim panel) requires thorough inspection every 20,000 6. Tethers for web wear and proper miles (32,000 km). If the vehicle is exposed tightness of mounting hardware to severe environmental or working conditions, more frequent inspections may

248 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Safety Restraint System - Inspection

be necessary. Any seat belt system that examined to determine if it is that it spools out and retracts shows cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual coming into contact with any sharp webbing properly. wear, significant discoloration due to UV or rough surfaces on the seat or 6. If tethers are used, be sure they (ultraviolet) exposure, abrasion to the seat other parts of the cab interior. are properly attached to the seat belt webbing, or damage to the buckle, These areas are typical places and, if adjustable, that they are latch plate, retractor hardware, or any other where the web will experience adjusted in accordance with obvious problem should be replaced cutting or abrasion. Cuts, fraying, installation instructions. Tethers immediately, regardless of mileage. or excessive wear would indicate must also be inspected for web the need for replacement of the Inspection Guidelines wear and proper tightness of seat belt system. mounting hardware. Follow these guidelines when inspecting 2. The pillar web guide (D-loop) is the 7. Mounting hardware should be for cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear area where almost constant evaluated for corrosion, and for of the webbing, and damage to the buckle, movement of the seat belt webbing tightness of bolts and nuts. retractor, hardware, or other factors. occurs because of relative 8. Check web in areas exposed to 5 Damage to these areas indicates that belt movement between the seat and ultraviolet rays from the sun. If the system replacement is necessary. cab. color of the web in these areas is 3. Check the Komfort Latch for cracks gray to light brown, the physical WARNING or possible damage and check for strength of the web may have proper operation. deteriorated due to exposure to the Replace the entire belt system (retrac- 4. Check buckle and latch for proper sun's ultraviolet rays. Replace the tor and buckle side) if replacement of operation and to determine if latch system. any one part is necessary. Unexposed plate is worn, deformed, or Once the need for replacement of the seat damage to one or more components damaged. belt has been determined, be certain it is could prevent the system from func- 5. Inspect the retractor web storage only replaced with an authorized PACCAR tioning properly the next time it is device, which is mounted on the Parts replacement seat belt. If the needed. Failure to comply may result floor of the vehicle, for damage. inspection indicates that any part of the in death or personal injury. The retractor is the heart of the seat belt system requires replacement, the occupant restraint system and can entire system must be replaced. An 1. Check the web wear in the system. often be damaged if abused, even installation guide is attached to every The webbing must be closely unintentionally. Check operation to replacement belt. Utilize the proper guide ensure that it is not locked up and for your type of seat, and follow the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 249 MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

instructions very closely. It is vitally Unless otherwise optioned, factory fill important that all components be coolant is an ethylene glycol, nitrited reinstalled in the same position as the organic acid technology (NOAT) extended CAUTION original components that were removed life coolant (ELC) formulation at a 50:50 and that the fasteners be torqued to coolant-to-distilled water mixture. The The engine cooling system has very specification. This will maintain the design factory fill exceeds ASTM D6210 and specific maintenance and inspection integrity of the mounting points for the seat Caterpillar EC-1 requirements. Maintaining requirements. Failure to follow require- belt assembly. Contact your dealer if you coolant chemistry and freeze protection is ments can damage the engine. Engine have any questions concerning seat belt critical to engine and cooling system damage can include but is not limited replacement. component health and longevity. to freezing, boiling, corrosion, pitted cylinder liners. This information is found in the engine manufacturers WARNING owner’s manual. It is the owner’s re- 5 Cooling System sponsibility to follow all requirements Maintenance Coolant is toxic. DO NOT get the fluid listed in the engine manufacturers in eyes. If contact occurs, flood eyes owner’s manual. The cooling system in your vehicle was with large amounts of water for 15 mi- factory filled with extended life coolant that nutes. Avoid prolonged or repeated meets or exceeds all ASTM D6210 and contact with skin. In case of contact, NOTE Caterpillar EC-1 requirements. PACCAR immediately wash skin with soap and recommends only using a 50:50 mixture of water. DO NOT take internally. If swal- Coolant is harmful to the environment. distilled water and ELC when cooling lowed, seek immediate medical atten- Unused coolant must be stored as a system service is required. A 50:50 mixture tion. DO NOT induce vomiting. Failure toxic hazardous material in leakproof of ELC and distilled water will provide to comply may result in death, person- containers. Used coolant must be freeze protection down to -34°F (-36.7°C), al injury, equipment or property dam- processed as industrial chemical which is adequate for most locations in age. waste. Please follow HAZMAT guide- North America. For extremely cold lines with both used and unused cool- operating conditions, a 60:40 mixture ants. (coolant/water ratio) can be used to provide freeze protection down to -62°F (-52.2°C).

250 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

degradation and could result in damage to Glycol Concentration Level the cooling system and engine CAUTION components. Consult your dealer or the coolant manufacturer’s representative Desired Use of non-genuine PACCAR coolant Freeze for recommended extended life coolant test Coolant filters can cause severe engine dam- Level Point °F kits, test strips, and laboratory sample / Water age. (°C) procedures. Ratio Concentration Coolant Extender 40% -12 (-24) Check the level of freeze/boil-over Add extended life coolant extender, if protection, which is determined by the 45% -23 (-31) necessary, according to the corrosion glycol concentration. Use a glycol Recommended inhibitor concentration required. DO NOT 50% -34 (-37) refractometer to determine glycol level. Levels add coolant extender to nitrite-free coolant. 5 Add coolant to obtain the coolant/water 55% -50 (-46) Checking Coolant Level ratio required to provide the protection you need. A 50:50 mix of coolant and water is 60% -62 (-52) Check the coolant level daily. When adding adequate for most applications. For coolant, avoid mixing different brands and extremely cold operating conditions, the formulations. If the coolant is mixed with ratio can be adjusted to a higher Condition more than 25% of a different formulation, concentration of coolant. engine corrosion damage could occur. If Perform a visual inspection of the coolant. mixing exceeds 25% of total system It should have no cloudiness or floating volume, it is recommended to flush and NOTE debris. Determine the chemical inhibitor refill the system completely with one type concentration level by using an extended of coolant. Maximum recommended ELC concen- life coolant specific test kit or test strips. tration is 60% ELC and 40% water by Inhibitor concentration level determines Coolant Filter volume (a 60:40 coolant mixture). The corrosion protection. If you are concerned Your engine may be equipped with a minimum recommended concentration about possible coolant quality, coolant filter. It is a "blank filter" and does is 40%. contamination, or mechanical problems, not contain chemicals or time-release submit a coolant sample for analysis. additives. Replace it only with a blank filter Improper maintenance may cause coolant at the interval specified in your engine's

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 251 MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

operator's manual. Never use filters that The minimum fluid level is determined by contain supplemental coolant additives the line on the surge tank indicated by the (SCAs) in an ELC-filled system. Consult CAUTION letters "MIN." This indicator is located your engine operator's manual for below the fill cap. The cooling system will information on the coolant filter and service The use of sealing additives or soluble need to be filled if the level is not above the procedures. oils in the cooling system can cause "MIN" line, regardless of engine damage to the engine. These additives temperature. can plug various areas of the radiator, CAUTION EGR system and oil cooler. The plug- ging of the cooling system can hamper Use of non-genuine PACCAR coolant heat transfer, causing internal engine filters can cause severe engine dam- damage. DO NOT use sealing addi- age. tives or soluble oils in the cooling sys- 5 tem. The use of sealing additives can: Cooling System Sealing Additives • Build up in coolant low-flow and Soluble Oils areas • Plug the radiator and oil cooler OK • Damage the water pump seal • Damage heat transfer surfaces 1 • Damage seals and hoses • Corrode brass and copper 1. Fill location Failure to comply may result in equip- 2. Fill line ment or property damage. 1. Do not use soluble oils or sealing additives. Radiator Hoses Inspect Coolant Level Perform these maintenance procedures Inspect the vehicle's coolant surge tank for according to the Preventative Maintenance proper coolant level. Add coolant if the Schedule. level in the tank is below the line marked 1. Check the following radiator hose MIN. conditions:

252 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Cooling System Maintenance

• Deterioration/signs of leaking 1. Turn off the engine and let it cool • Hose clamp torque for a minimum of 10 minutes. NOTE 2. If your cooling system is built with an air bleed valve in the upper How to Add Coolant to the Cooling DO NOT use the pressure cap to fill engine coolant pipe, open the air the surge tank with fluid. System bleed valve before filling the surge Use a solution of half ethylene glycol tank. antifreeze and half water for best heater NOTE 3. Close any open coolant drain performance. Do not use more than 60 valves in the lower engine coolant percent concentration of antifreeze, as a pipe. shortened heater life will result. DO NOT overfill a cooling system. Ex- cess coolant may result in overflow, 4. Remove the surge tank fill cap (1). loss of antifreeze, and reduced corro- DO NOT remove the surge tank WARNING sion protection. pressure cap (2). 5 5. Fill the system with premixed DO NOT remove the coolant fill cap 1. Radiator Mounted Coolant Surge Tank coolant through the surge tank fill while the engine is hot. Scalding port. Pour coolant at a steady rate steam and fluid under pressure may until it reaches the lower of the two escape and cause serious burns. Fail- 2 1 3 lines indicated by either "COLD ure to comply may result in personal MIN" or "MIN" on the surge tank. injury or death. Wait for one minute after adding coolant. If the coolant level drops, add coolant until it returns to the NOTE lower line. 6. Close the air bleed valve if opened If frequent topping off is necessary and earlier in this procedure. there are no visible signs of coolant 7. Start the engine and maintain an leaks when the engine is cold, check idle at low rpm. for leaks with the engine operating at 8. While the engine is idling air will normal temperature. purge from the cooling system via the surge tank's coolant fill port,

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 253 MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

which will lower the coolant level in system, which will affect the coolant level the surge tank. Continue to fill the until the air is purged. reproductive harm. Wash hands after surge tank until the coolant level After servicing the cooling system, handling. remains approximately 1/2 in. (13 continue monitoring it for 3-5 days. The mm) above the "MIN" line. This coolant level in the surge tank will lower may take up to 2 minutes, when air trapped in the cooling system is WARNING depending on the outside purged. During each pre-trip inspection you temperature. should inspect recently serviced Before attempting any work on the bat- teries or electrical system, remove all 9. Maintain a low idle until the components of the cooling system for signs jewelry. If metal jewelry or other metal thermostat opens and the of coolant leaks. comes in contact with electrical cir- operating temperature stabilizes. A cuits, a short circuit may occur causing sign that the thermostat has NOTE you to be injured, as well as electrical opened is when the upper coolant system failure and damage. 5 pipe gets hot on the bottom side If the coolant frequently needs top- indicating hot coolant is now ping-up or there are any signs of cool- running through it. ant leakage, consult a PACCAR Serv- CAUTION 10. Add coolant to the surge tank until ice dealer. the coolant remains 1/2 in. (13 mm) DO NOT modify or improperly repair above the "MIN" level. the vehicles electrical system or power 11. Operate the engine at high idle for distribution box. All electrical repairs 10 minutes. Afterward, add coolant should be performed by an authorized to the surge tank until the coolant Electrical System dealer. Improper repair or modifica- remains 1/2 in. (13 mm) above the tions will void your warranty and/or "COLD FULL" line. WARNING cause serious damage to your vehicle. 12. Reinstall the surge tank fill cap. Check the coolant level before and after Battery posts, terminals and related each trip. Add coolant as necessary. accessories contain lead and lead Engine Aftertreatment System Coolant may not immediately appear at the compounds, chemicals known to the Power Requirements correct level after the radiator has been State of California to cause cancer and filled. Air may be trapped in the cooling The engine aftertreatment system uses battery power for up to 10 minutes after the

254 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

ignition is turned off. After the ignition turns When battery voltage drops below the LVD 3. When the two-minute countdown off, the engine aftertreatment system setting, LVD starts a two-minute has ended, the LVD “Hotel Loads circulates DEF to help cool down the fluid countdown. If battery voltage remains Disconnected” Popup appears, and and prevent overheating. For situations below the LVD setting and the engine is LVD shuts off all loads connected where the battery will be disconnected (i.e. not started, when the countdown ends, all through the LVD system. for service or maintenance of the vehicle), non-vital battery loads (hotel loads) will be The LVD condition will not clear until please wait 10 minutes before shut off. The LVD setting is adjusted in the battery voltage increases above the LVD disconnecting battery power. Settings sub-menu of the Digital Display. setting or the engine is started. When battery voltage drops below the LVD Electrical loads shut off by LVD setting CAUTION • Cab dome lamps 1. An amber LVD Popup notification • Cab accessories occurs, accompanied by an audible • Spare LVD wiring for customer Wait at least 10 minutes after the key warning. This starts the two-minute added accessories switch is turned OFF before discon- countdown. 5 necting battery power. The system 2. Thirty seconds before the uses battery power to circulate DEF countdown ends, the Battery WARNING and prevent overheating of the DEF Voltage indicator is replaced by the system. Failure to comply may result 21 DO NOT use the Spare Battery A and in property damage. amber (or red) LVD telltale . The LVD popup notification will turn red B circuits or other circuits that are con- and will be accompanied by a trolled by the LVD to power electronic continuous audible warning. engine controls, ABS circuits, or safe- Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) ty/work related lighting. Before adding (option) any device to the vehicle's electrical The Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) may system, consult your nearest author- increase battery life and avoid depleting ized dealer or read the contents of the battery below the minimum charge TMC RP136. Failure to do so may needed to start the engine by shutting off cause equipment damage or lead to non-vital battery loads. personal injury.

21 On the 15 inch display, LVD telltale color depends on the severity of battery depletion.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 255 MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Phillips-head screwdriver, and Headlight Pod – Back (cover plate removed) remove cover plate. NOTE Cover plate is removed in picture. 2. If replacing the Low Beam bulb, The determination of what circuits/ remove the rubber access cap (1). loads that were connected to the LVD The High Beam bulb does not have was based upon the recommendation an access cap (2). from Technology and Maintenance Council (TMC) of the American Truck- 3. Unlock bulb from behind by turning ing Association. To review the recom- base of bulb (and its wired mended practice, see TMC RP-136. connector) a quarter-turn counter- clockwise, then withdraw bulb and connector from its seat. NOTE 4. Unplug wired connector from back 5 of bulb, and dispose of bulb. All LVD circuits are color-coded blue 1. Low Beam rubber access cap 5. Plug the wired connector into the on the central electrical panel cover la- 2. High Beam bulb new bulb. bel. 3. Turn Signal/Parking Light bulbs Do not touch bulb globe with fingers. 6. Insert new bulb into seat, and turn How to Replace a Headlight Bulb base quarter-turn clockwise to lock. This procedure applies to low and high CAUTION 7. Replace rubber access cap if beam halogen bulbs used in side-mounted removed earlier in this procedure. headlight pods. Bulb replacements should When replacing a halogen bulb, do not 8. Replace and secure cover plate. be performed with the vehicle parked and touch the globe with your fingers. Oils Final Checks the parking brake set. See Vehicle Light or other contaminates on the skin can • After everything is reconnected, Bulb Specifications on page 309 for correct result in early bulb failure. turn on your headlights and check replacement bulbs. for operation. 1. Remove both screws securing the • Have your headlights periodically back-of-pod cover plate using a #3 checked for proper alignment by dealer.

256 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

• Keep your headlights clean using Altering the Electrical System only mild soap and water (see applications, a fuse may be used in- Refer to a wiring diagram for your chassis stead of a circuit breaker. Maintaining Headlight before adding electrical options to ensure Performance). A dirty headlight proper electrical system performance. reduces performance and creates glare. CAUTION WARNING Follow all manufacturers' circuit pro- Aiming Headlights DO NOT replace a fuse with a fuse of tection recommendations for the com- The headlights were properly aimed at the a higher rating. Doing so may damage ponents and wires being added. Fail- factory to meet safety specifications. If the the electrical system and cause a fire. ure to comply may result in equipment headlights need to be adjusted, please Failure to comply may result in proper- damage. have an authorized dealership aim the ty damage, personal injury, or death. headlights. 5 NOTE Fuses, Circuit Breakers and Relays WARNING If you are unfamiliar with proper elec- Fuses, circuit breakers, and relays are trical repair practices and procedures, located in the Power Distribution Center Never install a circuit breaker/poly- see your authorized dealer for assis- (PDC) to the left of the steering column, switch in a location indicated for “fuse tance. behind the clutch pedal. Additional fuses only.” Using a polyswitch (circuit are located in the engine compartment breaker) in a fuse-only circuit may (driver’s side firewall) and also in the cause the circuit to overheat when a sleeper (driver’s side of vehicle) under the short exists, which could lead to equip- Vehicle CAN Bus ment damage and/or personal injury. bunk storage compartment. Refer to the Your vehicle is equipped with a CAN bus fuse labels affixed at each fuse panel electrical system. Because of how the location (generally under the fuse panel electrical system is designed it is important cover) for information about the location NOTE that any accessories added after the and amp ratings of each circuit. vehicle is built are installed only on the K- Polyswitches/circuit breakers are al- CAN or the S-CAN. These dedicated CANs lowed in certain locations as indicated are provided on the driver's side of the cab, by the label on the fuse box. In these near to the interior fuse panel. Access to

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 257 MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

the K-CAN and S-CANs is provided by two Scotch locks RP1226 connectors. DO NOT tap into, connect to, tamper with, or splice into any WARNING CAN network other than the K-CAN or the S-CAN. Connecting to a unapproved CAN Never remove or tamper with battery network may trigger CAN fault codes. caps. Ignoring this could allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Failure to comply CAUTION may result in property damage, per- sonal injury, or death. Connecting to an unapproved CAN network may trigger CAN fault codes. The manufacturer will not warrant fail- CAUTION 5 ures or damage caused to CAN net- Batteries work components when the failure or Regular attention to the charging system DO NOT store other items in the bat- damage is a result of improper con- will help prolong the service life of the tery box. Failure to comply could result nections to the CAN network. batteries. in damage to the truck and/or batter- ies.

CAUTION WARNING CAUTION The use of scotch locks, scraped off insu- Batteries contain acid that can burn lation, and electrical tape are not ap- and gases that can explode. Ignoring Properly secure battery tie downs and proved CAN connection techniques. safety procedures may result in death, battery box cover when reinstalling These are the source of numerous CAN personal injury, equipment or property batteries after service. DO NOT over faults. damage. tighten. Over tightening can crack the battery case which can lead to equip- ment damage.

258 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Dirty or Loose Connections: improper • Allow no sparks or open flame connections may stop the flow of electrical anywhere near the charging area. CAUTION power to and from the battery. • Charge a battery only in a well- Battery Charging ventilated area, such as outdoors The Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sys- or in a fully open garage which tem recirculates fluid to the doser to contains no pilot lights or other prevent damage from heat after key WARNING flames. Gases generated during off. If your vehicle is equipped with the charging process must be battery disconnect switches do NOT Batteries can injure you severely. They allowed to escape. disconnect battery power within TEN contain acid, produce poisonous and • Always make sure the battery minutes of switching the ignition key explosive gases, and supply levels of charger is OFF before connecting off. Failure to comply may result in ve- electric current high enough to cause or disconnecting the cable clamps. hicle or property damage. burns. A spark or flame near a battery • To avoid short circuits, damage to on charge may cause it to explode 5 Here are some common causes of battery the vehicle, or personal injury, with great force. Never remove or tam- never place metal tools or jumper failure: per with the battery caps. Failure to Overcharge: this condition results from cables on the battery or nearby. comply may result in property damage, Metal that accidentally comes in improper voltage regulator adjustment. It personal injury, or death. results in overheating of the battery, contact with the positive battery warped plates, and evaporation of terminal or any other metal on the Except for using small trickle charges to vehicle (that is in contact with the electrolyte. maintain battery condition, you should Undercharge: the voltage regulator is positive terminal), could cause a have your vehicle's batteries charged by a short circuit or an explosion. malfunctioning, the drive belt is slipping, or qualified service facility. To help reduce the your vehicle has undergone long periods of risk of personal injuries, follow these Charging Reminders idling or short distance driving. These guidelines carefully when recharging a • Use protective eyewear conditions result in battery plates becoming battery: covered with a hard coating. • Keep all batteries away from • Before attempting any service in Vibration: loose battery hold-downs may children the electrical installation, cause battery plate failure. disconnect the battery negative • Never reverse battery poles Short Circuits: these discharge the battery cable. by draining electricity.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 259 MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

• Never attempt to place the vehicle In Cab Battery Access Category Specification in motion, or run the engine with Your vehicle may be equipped with batteries disconnected Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) batteries Voltage 12 V • Keep the battery clean and dry located in the cab under the passenger's Reserve Capacity 160 minutes • Look for any signs of damage seat. The glass mat in AGM batteries are • Battery terminals should not be designed to absorb the battery acid inside General Maintenance free coated with improper grease. Use the battery that can leak or spill out in a commercially available, conventional batteries. This design feature noncorrosive, non-conductive allows batteries to be positioned in any terminal coating, or petroleum jelly. orientation without risk of leaking. Removing Batteries • Never use a fast charger as a To access the batteries: After accessing the batteries, follow these booster to start the engine. This 1. Enter the cab. steps to remove them from the vehicle. 5 can seriously damage sensitive 2. Remove six fasteners securing the electronic components such as passenger side seat base to the relays, radio, etc., as well as the battery box assembly. CAUTION battery charger. Fast charging a 3. Remove the seat and seat base as Wait at least 10 minutes after the key battery is dangerous and should one unit to gain access to the switch is turned OFF before discon- only be attempted by a competent batteries. necting battery power. The system mechanic with the proper 4. Installation is the reverse of equipment. uses battery power to circulate DEF removal. and prevent overheating of the DEF system. Failure to comply may result Under Cab Battery Access Cranking Battery Specification in property damage. The battery compartment is located on the left side of the vehicle, under the cab Category Specification 1. Be sure all switches on the vehicle access steps. are turned OFF 1. Remove the six bolts that are Group 31 2. Wait 10 minutes after turning located in the two cab access step ignition off before disconnecting the plate. Stud Type Threaded batteries 2. Remove battery cover for access. Cold Crank Amps 650 3. Disconnect negative (-) ground cable first

260 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

4. Disconnect positive (+) cable Failure to comply may result in person- 5. Unscrew the holding plate bolts NOTE al injury or death. with an open end wrench Make sure to reconnect the ground NOTE (negative) cable last. WARNING

Always dispose of automotive batter- Fairings not installed properly could ies in a safe and responsible manner. WARNING come loose and cause other motorists Contact your authorized dealer for dis- to have an injury accident. It is impor- posal standards. Call your local au- Battery replacement may alter or dis- tant that fairings be installed properly. thorized recycling center for informa- turb battery cable routing. Check to in- Failure to comply may result in death, tion on recycling automotive batteries. sure battery cables are free from any personal injury, equipment or property point of chaffing. Failure to comply damage. 5 Follow the procedures below to reinstall may result in death, personal injury, batteries on the vehicle and replace parts equipment or property damage. 1. Replace battery cover. removed for access. 2. Install two bolts in step strut. 1. Place batteries in vehicle and Torque to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 N·m). Installing Batteries tighten bolt of holding plate 3. Install fairing and install four bolts. Follow the procedure below to reinstall 2. Reconnect positive cable Torque to 6-7 lb-ft (8-9 N·m). main batteries on the vehicle: 3. Reconnect ground (negative) 4. Install steps by installing two bolts ground cable in each step. Torque to 24-32 lb-ft (33-43 N·m). NOTE Replace Battery Box Cover Always dispose of automotive batter- ies in a safe and responsible manner. WARNING Contact your authorized dealer for dis- posal standards. Call your local au- Always reinstall steps before entering thorized recycling center for informa- the cab or accessing the deck plate. tion on recycling automotive batteries. Without steps you could slip and fall.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 261 MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

Slow Battery Charging Alternator battery chargers to these devices to recharge the vehicles batteries. Con- Take the following precautions to avoid WARNING nect directly to the conventional two burning out alternator diodes: post charging batteries to charge • DO NOT start the engine with Charger cables must be connected them. alternator disconnected positive to positive (+ to +) and nega- (connections removed) from the tive to negative (- to -). If connected circuit. improperly, batteries could explode. NOTE • Before welding, disconnect all Failure to comply may result in proper- electronic connections to the ty damage, personal injury, or death. Follow the instructions that come with vehicle batteries. your battery charger. • Remove battery power cable and insulate it from the vehicle. 5 WARNING 1. Access the battery terminals, the • DO NOT run the engine with the batteries do not have to be batteries disconnected. removed from the vehicle. Always make sure the battery charger • DO NOT disconnect the battery is OFF before connecting or discon- 2. Make sure the battery charger is cables or alternator connection necting the cable clamps. To reduce turned off. cables with the engine running the danger of explosions and resulting 3. Disconnect the battery cables. • Never turn the ignition switch from death or personal injury, do not con- 4. Connect charger cables. the ON position to the START nect or disconnect charger cables 5. Start charging the battery at a rate position with the engine running. while the charger is operating. not over 6 amperes. Normally, a • When charging the battery battery should be charged at no (installed in the vehicle) disconnect NOTE more than 10 percent of its rated the battery cables. capacity. • DO NOT reverse the cables of the Some vehicles may have an ultra ca- 6. After charging, turn OFF charger alternator, starter motor, or battery. pacitor mounted in the battery box. and disconnect charger cables. • DO NOT polarize the alternator. These devices have a similar shape to The alternator should not be a battery but have two positive posts polarized like a generator. To and one negative posts. Do not attach

262 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Electrical System

ensure correct polarity, use a test need to be reprogrammed to pair with the 2. Open the driver and passenger lamp or a voltmeter. vehicle. doors. 3. Press and hold the passenger Remote Keyless Entry door’s unlock button for 5 seconds, then release the button. The system will lock or unlock cab doors 4. Within 3 seconds press and hold with the key fob. The system will alert you Quantity Type the passenger door’s lock button with parking lights when the selected doors for 5 seconds, then release the are locked or unlocked. There are two key 1 CR2032 button. At this time you should hear fobs provided with the system which the vehicle cycle the locking provide secure rolling code technology that system by unlocking, then prevents someone from recording the entry relocking the doors. (This indicates signal. How to replace key fob battery that the door module has entered If you have issues with a key fob, replace If the key fob will not unlock the doors, “learning mode.”) 5 the battery and reprogram the key fob. In replace the battery. 5. Within the next 10 seconds, press some situations, the key fob may need to 1. Remove the cover of the key fob. be replaced and in others, a fuse may have and hold the key fob’s lock button 2. Replace the battery and dispose of for 5 seconds, (you should hear the failed that could render both key fobs the old battery. inoperative. Contact your dealer for help if vehicle lock the doors) then press 3. Check to see if the key fob is still a key fob does not work and it is not and release the unlock button. paired to the vehicle. If not, because of a bad battery. 6. Once programming is complete (or reprogram the key fob. The key fob uses one CR2032, 3V battery. the 10 seconds from Step 5 has Batteries should last approximately three passed), the vehicle will cycle the years, depending on use. Consistently Programming Key Fobs locking system twice (unlock, lock, reduced range is an indicator that the The key fob may need to be paired with the unlock, lock). This process should battery needs replacement. Batteries are truck when the battery is replaced or when be repeated for each fob to be available at most discount, hardware, and the key fob has not been used for an paired with the module. A drug stores. The battery can be accessed extended period of time. maximum of five key fobs may be by removing the cover of the key fob. After 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON paired to a single module. a new battery is installed, the key fob may position.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 263 MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

carbon monoxide, a colorless and (24,140 km); (2) Whenever a change Engine Maintenance odorless gas. Carbon monoxide can is noticed in the sound of the exhaust be fatal if inhaled. Failure to comply system; or (3) Whenever the exhaust These topics relate to the operator may result in property damage, per- system, underbody, or cab is dam- maintenance tasks for the engine. sonal injury, or death. aged. Information provided here is in addition to information contained in the Engine Operator Manual supplied with the vehicle. WARNING Check Engine Oil Level

WARNING Never idle your vehicle for prolonged periods of time if you sense that ex- WARNING Exhaust fumes from the engine con- haust fumes are entering the cab. In- 5 tain carbon monoxide, a colorless and vestigate the cause of the fumes and Hot engine oil can be dangerous. You odorless gas. DO NOT breathe the en- correct it as soon as possible. If the could be burned. Let the engine oil gine exhaust gas. A poorly maintained, vehicle must be driven under these cool down before changing it. Failure damaged, or corroded exhaust system conditions, drive only with the windows to comply may result in death, person- can allow carbon monoxide to enter open. Failure to repair the source of al injury, equipment or property dam- the cab. Entry of carbon monoxide into the exhaust fumes may result in death, age. the cab is also possible from other ve- personal injury, equipment or property hicles nearby. Failure to properly main- damage. tain your vehicle could cause carbon NOTE monoxide to enter the cab, resulting in personal injury or death. NOTE It takes approximately 15 minutes for all the oil to run into the sump when Keep the engine exhaust system and the engine is warm. If the level is WARNING the vehicle's cab ventilation system checked immediately after switching properly maintained. It is recommend- off the engine, the dipstick will show a NEVER start or let the engine run in ed that the vehicle's exhaust system low oil level. an enclosed, unventilated area. Ex- and cab be inspected (1) By a compe- haust fumes from the engine contain tent technician every 15,000 miles

264 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

1. Make sure that the vehicle frame 5. Place the dipstick back into the Topping Up the Engine Oil rail is standing on a flat and level holder. surface. 6. Pull the dipstick out again and 2. Make sure that the vehicle is check the oil level. The oil level horizontal, both lengthwise and should always be between the two crosswise. Check this carefully on marks on the dipstick.

a vehicle with air suspension. Note Engine Oil Dip Stick Markings that the engine may be inclined up to 4 degrees, depending on the vehicle model and wheelbase. 3. Twist the dipstick handle to unlock it, then pull the dipstick out of the holder. 5 1

2

1. Top up with oil, if necessary, via the filler opening. Use the correct grade in the correct quantity. For oil replacement, please see engine 1. High oil level (1) Operator’s Manual included with 2. Low oil level (2) this chassis. 4. Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint- free cloth. 7. Reinstall the dipstick and twist to 2. After topping up, wait 1 minute and lock it in place. check the oil level again.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 265 MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

3. Reinstall the oil fill cap and twist to Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque lock it in place. Values Torque specifications for engine parts.

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. N•m

Radiator and Heat Exchanger Constant Torque CT-L 90-110 10.2-12.5 Hoses

Heater Hoses Constant Tension not required not required

Air Intake Pipes Hi Torque HTM-L 100-125 11.3-14.2 5 Plastic Air Intake Pipes Constant Torque CT-L 88 10.0 Charge Air Intake Hoses Flex Seal 70-100 7.9-11.3

B9296 50-60 6-7

Fuel, Oil and Water Heat Miniature 3600L 10-15 1.1-1.7 Exchangers (for hoses less than 9/16 in. diameter).

is still the same. Follow this procedure to install an accessory drive belt: Install Engine Belt NOTE 1. Route the new belt around the You can extend the reliability and service pulleys, and then rotate the life of your vehicle's drive belts with proper See the engine manufacturer's opera- automatic tensioner so that the attention to installation and maintenance. tor's manual for further information on idler pulley swings toward the belt Neglect could cause belt failure. The result replacing engine drive belts. routing. The following figure shows could be the loss of the electrical or air an example of the rotation direction system as well as possible engine damage The images below may not appear like the to release the tensioner. from overheating. configuration of the vehicle. The procedure

266 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

2. Slip the belt around the idler pulley conditions (e.g. fan belt misaligned attached to the automatic or excessive wear/damage, etc.). tensioner. • With the engine idling and the hood 3. Release the automatic tensioner. open, stand at the front of the 4. Check the belt alignment on each vehicle. Listen for any noises pulley. The belt must fall between coming from the fan hub. Bearings the flanges of each pulley. that have lost lubricant and are dry will typically emit a squeal or a growl when the engine is at Engine Fan operating temperature and the fan clutch is engaged. If noise is WARNING detected, have the fan bearings inspected by an authorized DO NOT work on or near the fan with dealership. 5 the engine running. Anyone near the Engine Fan Blade engine fan when it turns on could be injured. If it is set at MANUAL, the fan Verify that there is enough fan blade will turn on any time the ignition key clearance with the fan shroud. The switch is turned to the ON position. In recommended distance around the fan AUTO, it could engage suddenly with- shroud is 1 in. (25 mm) from front edge of out warning. Before turning on the igni- any fan blade-to-radiator side member. tion or switching from AUTO to MAN- Minimum clearance is 3/4 in. (19 mm). UAL, be sure no workers are near the • Rear edge of any blade must be no fan. Failure to comply may result in closer than 3/8 in. (9 mm) to the death or personal injury. nearest engine component. If this cannot be obtained, the fan spacer Follow these guidelines to check your or fan is incorrectly placed. engine fan: • The leading edge of any fan blade • With the engine shut off, check the must be 1 in. (25 mm) from the fan hub bearings for looseness, inside edge of the shroud. loss of lubricant, and any abnormal

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 267 MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

Air Intake System Turbocharger this immediately. If you detect any Engine heat, vibration, and age combine to deficiencies, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for servicing. Delay could loosen air intake connections and cause WARNING cracks in the tubing and elbows. Leaks in lead to severe and expensive damage to your vehicle. the intake system allow abrasive dust to DO NOT operate engine with turbo- enter the engine and quickly cause charger intake piping disconnected. A expensive damage. During your daily walk- suction is created when the engine is How to Replace the Engine Air around inspection, carefully check all running. This suction could draw your Filter tubing, elbows, clamps, supports, and hand or anything else near it into the Engine air filter replacement should be fasteners for condition and tightness. impeller fan. You could be injured. Al- performed with the vehicle parked, the Check the charge-air-cooler for air leaks ways keep the intake piping connected ignition OFF, and the parking brake set. annually. The air leaks can be caused by when you will be running the engine. 1. Open the hood to access the cracked tubes or header. For service see engine air cleaner, located on the 5 your authorized dealer. When servicing the air intake and exhaust firewall at the back of the engine systems on a turbocharged engine, check compartment. CAUTION the items listed below: 2. Using a wrench, loosen to Lubricating System disengage the (4) bolts securing DO NOT use air intake pipes and con- the filter housing cap to the filter nections as a step or to pull yourself Check the oil lines, housing, and housing. up. This could loosen the connections connections. Look for leaks, damage, or 3. If present, remove the hose and open the system to unfiltered air deterioration. Leaks could mean you have connecting the filter housing cap to which could damage the engine. damaged oil lines or oil seals. the solenoid by pushing in on the Manifold plug and pulling the hose out. Hose is present for vehicles with an With the engine operating, check for under-hood air intake. leaking manifold or flange gaskets. Disconnecting the hose allows the cap to be removed. High Frequency Vibration 4. Pull the air filter housing cap away Vibration may indicate turbo rotor from the main enclosure to access imbalance. Have your dealer investigate the filter.

268 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

5. Visually inspect the filter housing, 11. Reconnect hose to filter housing enclosure, and hardware for cap if removed earlier in this damage. procedure. CAUTION If damaged, replace the air cleaner. 12. Verify housing cap is secure. Ensure no foreign debris enters in sol- 6. Gently, pull filter directly out of the Close and secure hood. filter housing, taking care to not enoid/airline. Failure to comply may re- sult in equipment damage. drop or tap filter on housing during Remove and Install Solenoid on Air removal. Loose dirt and dust trapped in the Filter Housing 1. Park the vehicle, set the parking filter can fall into the cleaner, which These instructions are for removing and brake, and turn the ignition OFF. can lead to engine damage. installing the under hood air intake 2. Open the hood. 7. Inspect, and if necessary (and solenoid from an air filter housing for 3. Drain front air service tank of all air using ONLY a clean, damp cloth) vehicles with the firewall mounted air pressure. clean out any debris inside the filter cleaner and optional under hood air intake 4. Disconnect the air line at the 5 housing. Be careful to not push any switch on the dash. This solenoid must be connection on the air filter housing. contaminate into the engine inlet. removed to access the air filter. 5. Push in on the collar and then pull With the under hood air intake option, there 8. Visually inspect the new filter prior the air hose out. is an additional step required to disconnect to installation. There should not be the air line attached to the air filter housing any damage to the filter media or to access the air filter. WARNING gaskets, such as dents, dings, cracks, or holes. DO NOT disconnect any lines at the 9. Install new filter element, then WARNING solenoid body. They could be pressur- inspect element for a good seal ized which may result in personal in- and proper alignment. Drain the air tank to depressurize the jury. 10. Install the filter housing cap and air system before disconnecting any tighten the bolts to 30 ± 5 in-lb. DO air hoses. Failure to perform this step NOT use the housing cap to drive may result in personal injury. the filter into position.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 269 MAINTENANCE - Engine Maintenance

10. Verify that there are no air leaks, start the engine and allow the air system to reach operating pressure. Activate the under hood 5 air switch and verify that there are no air leaks. 7. Cover the air hose end and the Disconnecting the air solenoid will allow fitting with tape or something lint- the air filter housing to be removed to free to keep the hose free from access the air filter. debris. 8. To reinstall the air solenoid to the Air Filter Restriction Indicator filter housing, tighten the 13 mm (Option) bolt to 70 lb-in. ± 5 (7.9 N·m ± 0.56) An Air Filter Restriction Indicator may be 9. To reinstall the air line to the installed on the air filter housing or air solenoid, push the air hose into the induction piping for access to clean, filtered 6. Remove the single bolt (with a 13 fitting, then pull on the air hose to air. mm wrench) that holds the ensure that it is properly seated. As the filter plugs and restriction increases, solenoid to the filter housing. a red indicator will appear in a window on the indicator. When red appears, the air filter should be replaced. The indicator can

270 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Frame

be reset by pressing the button at the end system, see "Noise and Emission Control" • Check for complete insertion of of the indicator. in your vehicle operator's manual. Please motor mount. Replace as refer to the engine operator's manual for necessary. more details on how to maintain the • New leg to mount flange head bolts emissions components in the exhaust should be torqued to 210-230 lb-ft system. (284-311 N·m).

Engine Mounting Frame CAUTION WARNING DO NOT re-torque or reuse existing flange head bolts. These bolts are fac- 5 DO NOT cut, splice or weld frame rails tory set to the specified torque. If bolts or drill through the top or bottom flang- are loose or damaged, they must be es of the rails. These operations could replaced with the new bolts. Failure to affect frame rail strength leading to a comply may result in property damage. failure resulting in an accident. Rail Periodic Inspection: Inspect engine mounts failures resulting from such modifica- tions are not warrantable. Failure to every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). comply may result in property damage, Check for the following: personal injury, or death. • Inspect both mount and leg Exhaust System fasteners. Check for loose or broken bolts. Replace as The exhaust system is part of the noise necessary. and emission control system. Periodically • Check mount and leg for fractures, check the exhaust system for wear, breaks or deformation. Replace as exhaust leaks, and loose or missing parts. necessary. For details on how to maintain the emissions components in the exhaust

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 271 MAINTENANCE - Frame

electronics that could be affected, devices, diagnostic devices, and but a few examples include the monitoring devices. WARNING following: alternator, engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU), Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance Frame welding is NOT recommended. transmission ECU, ABS ECU, • Refer to specific manufacturer's The high heat of welding nullifies the navigation devices, diagnostic literature for any special special heat treatment of the rails, devices, and monitoring devices. greatly reducing the tensile strength of instructions • Disconnect battery cables and the frame rail. If a frame member be- • Steam clean the fifth wheel insulate them from the vehicle. comes cracked from overloading, fati- • Check lock guard operation using a • Do not use the ECU or engine gue, surface damage, or a collision, commercial lock tester the only permanent repair is to replace ground stud for the ground of the • Clean and oil all moving parts the damaged frame member with a welding probe. new part. • Ensure that the ground connection • Lubricate the lock mechanism with 5 for the welder is as close to the a lithium-base grease Emergency Welding weld point as possible. This • All grease fittings (especially those ensures maximum weld current which grease the top surface of the In an emergency, a temporary repair may and minimum risk to damage of fifth wheel) be performed. Observe the following electrical components on the precautions to protect electronic systems vehicle. during welding operations. Emergency Fifth Wheel Bi-Annual Maintenance welding procedures are further explained in Painting the maintenance manuals. Please refer to Do not electrostatically paint your truck or NOTE the ordering information on the back cover any component on your truck without first to obtain a maintenance manual. removing all of the electronic components Whenever possible, torque all frame In the event of emergency welding of a from the truck. It is not possible to list all of fasteners on the nut end, not the bolt frame rail and when welding any other part the electronics that could be affected, but a head. of your truck or any component attached to few examples include the alternator, your truck, observe the following engine Electronic Control Unit (ECU), • Refer to specific manufacturer's precautions before welding: transmission ECU, ABS ECU, navigation literature for any special • Disconnect all electronic devices. It instructions. is not possible to list all of the

272 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Fuel System

• Remove fifth wheel from vehicle. Refer to the Shop Manual, "Fifth Wheel Removal." Fuel System CAUTION • Steam clean the fifth wheel and Location of Fuel Shut-off Valves mounting brackets. If anyone ever pours gasoline into your fuel tank, drain the entire system. Oth- • Check all moving parts for Fuel shut-off valves for the fuel crossover erwise, the pump and engine will be excessive wear or damage. line are on the bottom of the secondary damaged. DO NOT try to dilute the Replace all worn or broken parts. fuel tank, at the crossover line connection. They are optional on the primary fuel tank. gasoline by adding diesel fuel (see • Complete two-month service Warning above). procedure. Specification • Install fifth wheel. Refer to the Use only diesel fuel as recommended by Fuel Filters Shop Manual, "Fifth Wheel engine manufacturers. Installation." See Engine Manufacturer’s Operator Manual provided with this chassis. 5 Tighten all frame fasteners with a torque wrench. See Frame Fastener Torque WARNING Requirements on page 304. Fuel Tank Diesel fuel in the presence of an igni- Check the strap tightness: tighten to proper Sliding Fifth Wheels tion source could cause an explosion. torque value as required; aluminum tank - A mixture of gasoline or alcohol with 30 lb-ft (41 N·m) cylindrical steel tank - 8 Lubricate bearing surface of support diesel fuel increases this risk of explo- lb-ft (11 N·m.) bracket through the grease fittings on the sion. DO NOT remove a fuel tank cap side of the fifth wheel plate. Use a water near an open flame. Use only the fuel resistant lithium-base grease. and/or additives recommended for your engine. Failure to comply may re- Front Axle and NOTE sult in death, personal injury, equip- Suspension ment or property damage. The plate must be lifted up slightly to Axle Lubrication relieve the weight of the bracket while Refer to the axle manufacturer's operator's applying grease. manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 273 MAINTENANCE - Front Axle and Suspension

Kingpin Lubrication Suspension Lubrication Inspection For all vehicles, mandatory maintenance procedures include retightening all U-bolts and inspecting the suspension for loose, damaged, or abnormally worn fasteners. Visually inspect the shock absorbers, the rubber bushings, the leaf springs, and that the suspension is aligned and functioning properly. Mono leaf spring suspensions Each standard spring anchor pin has a should also have their rear shackle grease fitting. Pressure lubricate spring brackets checked for proper alignment. pins as specified. At regular intervals, the Even with proper maintenance, however, 5 spring leaves may be lubricated with a the service life of leaf springs are affected rust-inhibiting oil applied with a spray gun by many factors: fatigue, vehicle gross or brush. Depending on your suspension, weight, type of load, road conditions, and lubricate all spring pins until grease flows vehicle speed. Check for cracks, wear out of both ends of the bushing. Look for marks, splits, or other defects on the signs of rust or water in the flushed grease. surface of the spring. Defective parts must Lubricate with approved lubricant. If a pin will not accept grease, it should be be replaced. Because repaired springs Lubricate knuckle thrust bearings, knuckle removed, cleaned, and inspected. cannot be fully restored to their original pins, and tie rod ends. Lack of lubrication service life, replace the complete assembly causes premature wear and hard steering. if cracks or other defects are detected. CAUTION Lubrication schedule may be shortened if Wheel Alignment necessary. DO NOT spray the suspension with For driving safety and comfort, and to chemical products or mineral oil; it can prolong the life of your vehicle, it is cause damage to the bushings. important to have wheels correctly aligned. Check tire wear frequently. Uneven tire wear is a sign that the wheels may be misaligned. If you see uneven wear, take

274 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Front Axle and Suspension

your vehicle to an authorized dealer familiar with aligning wheels on your vehicle control and an accident. Loose death, personal injury, equipment or vehicle. U-bolts can also cause uneven tire property damage. wear and poor alignment. Failure to Suspension U-Bolts comply may result in death, personal injury, equipment or property damage. It is important that U-bolts remain tight. PACCAR 20k Front Axle Severe use of your vehicle will cause them Lubrication U-bolts are difficult to tighten unless you to loosen faster, and all vehicles need to have the right equipment. If you cannot Proper lubrication practices are important have their U-bolts checked and tightened tighten them correctly yourself, be sure to in maximizing the service life of the steer regularly. Be sure someone with the proper have them checked and tightened regularly axle assembly. training and the right tools checks and by an authorized mechanic. Tighten U-bolt tightens the U-bolts on your vehicle. New Kingpins, Thrust Bearings, and Tie nuts to the specified torque value with the springs can settle in after service, relieving Rod Ends vehicle loaded to its normal gross weight. the tension on the U-bolts. Loose U-bolts 5 See Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page On-Highway Applications - can cause leaf spring breakage, axle 306 specifications for torque values Standard misalignment, hard steering, and abnormal applying to U-bolts and nuts. tire wear. All vehicles should have • Pressure lubricate every 6 months suspension U-bolts tightened after the first or 25,000 miles (40,000 km). 500 miles (800 km) of operation. Re-torque WARNING • A more frequent lubrication cycle is the front spring pinch bolts and shackle required for axles used in on/off- pinch bolts. DO NOT replace U-bolts and nuts with highway, refuse, or other severe common U-bolts or standard nuts. service applications. Use heavy- These parts are critical to vehicle safe- duty, multipurpose lithium base (#2 WARNING ty. If the wrong U-bolts or nuts are grade) grease. used, the axle could loosen or sepa- DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- rate from the vehicle and cause a seri- pension U-bolts are not properly tight- ous accident. Use only U-bolts and ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the nuts of SAE Grade 8 specification or axle to not be properly secured to the better. Failure to comply may result in suspension, which could cause loss of

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 275 MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

prove grease flow and flush contami- NOTE nation. Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance DO NOT mix with sodium-based Oil Bath grease. Lubricate wheel end assembly with a drive The combination heater-air conditioner provides comfort for those in the cab PACCAR 20k Front Axle Lube Points axle lubricant that meets MIL-L-2105D specifications. Either SAE 80W-90 mineral through accurate control of the cab based or 75W-90 synthetic gear oil is environment in all weather conditions. 1 acceptable. Check the lubricant level at Regular attention to the items below will each greasing interval. Maintain the help you keep the heater-air conditioner lubrication fluid level at centerline of axle or unit running well. Keep the vehicle's fill line on hub cap. Always check fluid level ventilation system, engine exhaust system, 5 on flat ground. and cab joints properly maintained. It is recommended that the vehicle's exhaust system and cab be serviced by a 2 3 CAUTION competent technician as follows: • Inspected every 15,000 miles 1. Upper kingpin bearing Never mix oil bath and grease-packed • Whenever a change is noticed in 2. Tie rod end wheel ends. Mixing oil and grease will the sound of the exhaust system reduce the effectiveness of both lubri- 3. Lower kingpin bearing • Whenever the exhaust system, cants and may cause damage to the vehicle underbody, or cab is wheel ends. damaged NOTE To allow for proper operation of the vehicle ventilation system, proceed as follows: If it is difficult to grease either the up- • Keep the inlet grille at the base of per or lower bearing, try greasing the the windshield clear of snow, ice, bearings with the vehicle jacked up leaves, and other obstructions at all and supported on axle stands to im- times.

276 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

• Keep the exhaust pipe area clear to help reduce the buildup of ventilation. Failure to do so may result Temperature Control Dial to "cool," exhaust gas under the vehicle. in death or personal injury. then gradually increase the tempera- ture when you see that the windshield • Check the drain tube of the fresh If a refrigerant leak develops in the is starting to warm up. Failure to com- air inlet for trapped water before presence of excessive heat or an open ply may result in equipment damage. assuming that there is a leak in the flame, hazardous gases may be heating system. generated. If you become aware of a • Check all heater controls for full- Special Precautions refrigerant leak on your vehicle have your range operation. system serviced immediately and observe • Check hoses, connections, and the following precautions: Stay away from heater core for condition and leaks. WARNING the hot engine until the exhaust manifold has cooled. Do not permit any open flame Air Conditioner Excessive heat may cause the pres- in the area. Even a match or a cigarette surized components of the air condi- 5 lighter may generate a hazardous quantity WARNING tioning system to explode. Never weld, of poisonous gas. Do not smoke in the solder, steam clean, or use a blow area. Inhaling gaseous refrigerant through The air conditioning system is under torch near any part of the air condition- a cigarette may cause violent illness. ing system. Failure to comply may re- pressure. If not handled properly dur- sult in death, personal injury, equip- Heater ing servicing, it could explode. Any ment or property damage. servicing that requires depressurizing and recharging the air conditioning CAUTION system must be conducted by a quali- WARNING fied technician with the right facilities During extreme cold weather, DO NOT to do the job. Failure to comply may Air conditioning refrigerant can be haz- blow hot defroster air onto cold wind- result in death, personal injury, equip- ardous to your health. DO NOT ex- shields. This could crack the glass. ment or property damage. pose yourself to leaking refrigerant for Turn the Air Flow Control Dial to De- prolonged periods near excessive frost and adjust the fan speed accord- heat, open flames, or without proper ingly while the engine warms. If the engine is already warm, move the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 277 MAINTENANCE - Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance

• Check all components and 2. Locate air intake housing at connections for refrigerant leaks. If passenger rear corner of vehicle WARNING you discover a leak, do not try to under the rain tray. tighten a connection. Tightening a 3. Locate filter cover labeled "OPEN" Wear eye protection any time you blow connection may cause a leak to with an arrow pointing rearward in compressed air. Small particles blown worsen. Have a qualified technician vehicle. Slide filter cover rearward by compressed air could injure your correct the problem. in vehicle until you are able to eyes. remove the cover. • Listen to the compressor and drive NOTE 4. Remove and inspect filter referring clutch for noise and vibration. If you to maintenance interval schedule. find problems, have the system A leaking evaporator or condenser 5. Replace filter in housing taking checked thoroughly. A core cannot be repaired; it must be re- care to align the airflow direction 5 malfunctioning clutch usually placed. that is indicated on the side of the indicates trouble elsewhere in the side of the filter element with the system. Have the air conditioning system fully airflow direction that is clearly • Check the evaporator core, filter, serviced annually by your authorized marked on the air intake housing. and condenser core for debris dealer. Qualified service technicians will 6. Replace the filter cover on the air restricting air flow. Clean if have to evacuate and recharge the system. intake housing and slide the cover necessary. Small particles may be forward in vehicle. An audible snap removed with compressed air How to Replace Air Conditioner sound can be heard when the cover is correctly in place. If the blown through the core in the Filter opposite direction of normal air snap feature is damaged there are flow. Inspect and clean cab air filter element two screw features that may be every 3-6 months of service. Depending on • Check the engine belt for condition utilized to retain the cover in place. the operating environment, if air flow from and proper tension. 7. Close and secure hood of vehicle. the air conditioner and heater is less • Check all hoses for kinks, efficient or windows fog easier, you may deterioration, chafing, and leaks. need to replace the cab air filter. Replace the Recirculation Air Filter Adjust kinked or chafing hoses to 1. Tilt the hood open. Please contact an authorized dealer when eliminate restrictions and prevent the service interval is required to inspect further wear. the cabin recirculation air filter.

278 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

Sleeper HVAC Air Filter Noise Emission Warranty device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle 1. Lift the sleeper bunk to expose the Peterbilt warrants to the first person who for the purpose of noise control sleeper HVAC module. purchases this vehicle for purposes other prior to its sale or delivery to the than resale and to each subsequent 2. Find the retention tab at the side of ultimate purchaser or while it is in purchaser that this vehicle as the filter element and move it to use, or release the filter. Moving this tab manufactured by Peterbilt, was designed, 2. The use of the vehicle after such will allow the filter to be removed in built, and equipped to conform at the time it device or element of design has an upward direction. left Peterbilt's control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations. been removed or rendered 3. Align the airflow direction that is inoperative by any person. Among indicated on the side of the filter This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built, and equipped by Peterbilt, those acts presumed to constitute element such that it points into the tampering are the acts listed below: HVAC housing. and is not limited to any particular part, 4. Insert the filter and make sure the component, or system of the vehicle Air Intake Removing or rendering inoperative 5 manufactured by Peterbilt. Defects in System the air filter housing/silencers or retention tab has re-engaged to intake piping secure the filter. design, assembly, or in any part, component, or system of the vehicle as 5. Close the bunk. manufactured by Peterbilt, which, at the Engine Removing or rendering the fan Cooling clutch inoperative time it left Peterbilt's control, caused noise System Removing the fan shroud emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by this warranty for the life of Noise and Emission Engine Removing or rendering engine speed the vehicle. governor inoperative so as to allow engine Control speed to exceed manufacturer's Tampering with Noise Control specifications There are specific components on the System Modifying ECU parameters vehicle that are designed to meet certain Federal law prohibits the following acts or Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Exhaust Removing or rendering inoperative the causing thereof: emissions and noise regulations. To System exhaust system components maintain conformance with the regulations, 1. The removal or rendering these components need to be functional inoperative by any person other Fuel Removing or rendering engine speed than for purposes of maintenance, System governor inoperative, allowing engine and properly maintained. speed to exceed manufacturer's repair, or replacement, of any specifications

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 279 MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

Removing of air signal attenuator on Air Intake System fasteners and repair or replace any engines equipped with this device • Do all checks and maintenance worn or damaged fasteners. Removing of diesel exhaust fluid tank and procedures listed in this manual • Check insulators around fasteners system under engine air intake system and and stress points, especially where air filter housing. they may be affected by engine Inner Fender Removing shield or skirts vibration. Repair any cracked or Shields and Cutting away parts of shields, skirts • Check the induction tubing, elbow Cab Skirts or damaged or loose portions of connections, clamps, brackets, and damaged mounting points. Use shields or skirts fasteners for deterioration, cracks, suitable reinforcing plates to and security. ensure that the insulators will Noise Removing noise insulators from remain in position. Insulating engine block or from around the oil • If you find an air leak anywhere Blankets pan between the air filter housing and Exhaust System Cutting holes in, or cutting away part the engine, repair that leak • Check for exhaust leaks, which 5 of noise insulators immediately. would indicate a leaking manifold Removing hood-mounted noise gasket; replace gasket if insulation necessary. CAUTION • Check cap screws for tightness, including those at the flanges. Inspecting Noise and Emission Air leaks cause excessive noise and Refer to the engine manufacturer's Components may result in serious damage to the service manual for proper If, during periodic inspection and engine. If you do not repair them the tightening sequence and torque maintenance of other systems and engine damage will not be covered by values. your warranty. Repair all air leaks as components, it is found that parts of the Joints and Clamps soon as you find them. noise control system require attention, we • Check for leaks, and tighten as recommend that those parts be inspected Engine Mounted Noise Insulators necessary. Check for deterioration at more frequent intervals to assure or dents in pipes and clamps which • Check condition. Is the insulator adequate maintenance and performance. could allow exhaust to escape. The following instructions are based on secure? How you do this will • Replace any serviceable joints, inspection of the noise control system at depend on the method of attaching flexible pipes and gaskets at the regular intervals as indicated in the Noise the noise insulators on the engine service intervals. Control System - Maintenance Log on and around the oil pan (bolts, snap page 281. fasteners, or straps). Tighten loose Selective Catalysts Reduction (SCR)

280 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Noise and Emission Control

• Check SCR canister filter, clamps Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Engine Fan and Shroud and mounting brackets. Tighten if • Check DPF, clamps, and mounting Hood Insulation Blanket necessary. Inspect SCR canister brackets. Tighten if necessary. Inner Fenders Shields and Cab Skirts for signs of rust or corrosion. Inspect DPF for signs of rust or Exhaust Piping corrosion. Noise Control System - • Check exhaust piping for rust, • Check internal baffling. You can do Maintenance Log corrosion, or damage. Replace this by listening for rattling sounds To ensure your vehicle's noise control deteriorated piping before holes while tapping on the (DPF with a requirements are maintained, record appear. If piping is perforated at rubber mallet or revving the engine maintenance checks. Use the following log any point, temporary patching or up and down through its normal sheet and retain copies of documents lagging is acceptable until you can operating range. regarding maintenance services performed have permanent repairs made. On DEF Tank (See Aftertreatment System and parts replaced on the vehicle. turbocharged engines, check joints manual) at flanges and mounting brackets Exhaust Tail Pipe 5 for tightness.

Component Recom- Date & R.O. Repair Work Date & R.O. Repair Work mended No. Facility & Performed No. Facility & Performed Interval Location Location (Miles)

Exhaust System 25,000 Routing Integrity

Shutters Shrouds 25,000

Hood Insulation 10,000 Blanket

Engine Mounted Hose 10,000 Insulators Fasteners

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 281 MAINTENANCE - Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Tank Straps

Component Recom- Date & R.O. Repair Work Date & R.O. Repair Work mended No. Facility & Performed No. Facility & Performed Interval Location Location (Miles)

Inner Fender Shields 50,000

Cab Skirts Fasteners 50,000

Air Intake System 5,000 Integrity Element

Clutch-type Fan Drive 10,000 5 Rear Axle and Suspension Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 1/2" (12.7 mm) Your vehicle's suspension, by design, Tank Straps requires a minimal amount of maintenance. 1 However, suspensions in over-the-road During normal operation of the truck, the operations require periodic inspection to DEF tank straps may relax. Inspect the ensure trouble-free performance. spring on top of the strap. If more than ½" (12.7mm) of the spring is exposed, the bolt will need to be re-torqued between 70 – 80 in-lbs. (7.9 – 9 Nm). This distance (1) is measured from the washer at the end of the spring to the edge of the tube at the top of the straps. See Engine Operator's Manual for DEF filter maintenance interval.

282 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

type of load, road conditions, and vehicle cause component system failure, pos- speed. All vehicles need to have their U- WARNING sibly resulting in an accident. Improp- bolts checked and tightened regularly, but erly tightened (loose) suspension U- severe use of your vehicle can cause them DO NOT work on the vehicle without bolts can lead to unsafe vehicle condi- to loosen faster. It is important that U-bolts the parking brake set and wheels tions, including: hard steering, axle remain tight. Be sure someone with proper blocked securely. If the vehicle is not misalignment, spring breakage or ab- training and the right tools checks and secured to prevent uncontrolled vehi- normal tire wear. Failure to comply tightens the U-bolts on your vehicle. After cle movement, it could roll and may re- may result in death, personal injury, the first 500 miles (800 km) of operation, sult in death, personal injury, equip- equipment or property damage. periodically inspect the suspension as ment or property damage. noted below: • Visually check for loose or missing CAUTION WARNING fasteners, cracks in hanger, or axle connection brackets 5 DO NOT spray the suspension with • Check that springs are centered in DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- chemical products or mineral oil; it can hangers and in good condition pension U-bolts are not properly tight- cause damage to the bushings. ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the • Check for cracks, wear marks, axle to not be properly secured to the splits, or other defects on the suspension, which could cause loss of NOTE surface of the spring vehicle control and an accident. Loose • Replace defective parts. Because U-bolts can also cause uneven tire Failure to follow these recommenda- repaired springs cannot be fully wear and poor alignment. Failure to tions could void warranty. restored to their original service comply may result in death, personal life, replace the complete assembly injury, equipment or property damage. Visual Inspection if cracks or other defects are detected For all vehicles, mandatory maintenance • After replacement of any part or procedures include retightening of U-bolts WARNING discovery of loose components, and complete inspection. Even with proper check the torque of all fasteners Failure to maintain the specified torque maintenance, however, many factors affect values or to replace worn parts can the service life of springs and suspension components: fatigue, vehicle gross weight,

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 283 MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

• New springs settle-in after the vehicle's initial service, causing the bolt. No dirt, grit, or rust should be U-bolts to become loose present. WARNING Rear Suspension Fasteners DO NOT replace U-bolts and nuts with WARNING common U-bolts or standard nuts. To maintain the performance of the air These parts are critical to vehicle safe- suspension, check fastener torque values DO NOT operate the vehicle if the sus- ty. If the wrong U-bolts or nuts are after the first 2,000 miles (3,200 km) of pension U-bolts are not properly tight- used, the axle could loosen or sepa- service and every 60,000 miles (96,000 ened. Loose U-bolts will cause the rate from the vehicle and cause a seri- km) thereafter. Torque recommendations axle to not be properly secured to the ous accident. Use only U-bolts and apply to fasteners supplied and installed by suspension, which could cause loss of nuts of SAE Grade 8 specification or vehicle manufacture. The values listed at vehicle control and an accident. Loose better. Failure to comply may result in the back of this chapter (See Suspension U-bolts can also cause uneven tire death, personal injury, equipment or 5 U-Bolts, Grade 8 on page 306 and Frame wear and poor alignment. Failure to property damage. Fastener Torque Requirements on page comply may result in death, personal 304), are for cadmium plated or phosphate injury, equipment or property damage. and oil fasteners only. Rear Axle Lubrication Rear Suspension U-Bolts NOTE See the axle manufacturer's operator's U-bolts are difficult to tighten unless you manual for lubrication specifications and service intervals. have the right equipment. If you cannot Whenever possible, torque all frame Check oil level with the vehicle parked on tighten them correctly yourself, be sure to fasteners on the nut end, not the bolt level ground and the fluid warm. The level have them checked and tightened regularly head. by an authorized mechanic. should be even with the bottom of the filler hole. Load the vehicle to its normal gross weight NOTE before tightening U-bolts. Loading the vehicle ensures proper adjustment of the Rear Axle Alignment To ensure an accurate torque reading, U-bolt and spring assembly. Continual road shock and load stresses use properly maintained and calibrated may force the rear axles out of alignment. torque wrenches. Clean the nut and If you detect rapid tire wear on the rear

284 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

axles, you may have misaligned axles. If (8,000 km) if converting to an you suspect rapid tire wear, have your rear Drive Axle - Dana Eaton-approved synthetic lube. axle alignment checked and adjusted by an • Change the lubricant within the first Drain the lubricant while warm. Flush each authorized dealer. 5,000 miles (8,000 km) of operation unit with clean flushing oil. Change the Suspension alignment should be checked after a carrier head replacement, lubricant. when any one of the following conditions regardless of the lubricant type. exist: Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication • Refer to the Eaton Field • Total vehicle alignment required • The original mineral-based Maintenance Manual for a after a body has been installed on lubricant must be drained within particular axle for lubricant truck chassis. 3,000-5,000 miles (4,800-8,000 specifications. • Discovery of loose suspension km) on all Eaton axles. This initial • See your dealer for Eaton- fasteners (Loose, defined as any change is very important because it approved lubricant brands. torque below the recommended flushes out break-in contaminants • Refer to the chart below for 5 torque value) that might otherwise cause lubricant change interval. • Discovery of elongated holes in a premature wear. suspension component • No initial drain is required on Eaton • Bushing replacement axles that are factory filled with an • Excessive or abnormal tire wear Eaton-approved synthetic lubricant. • Immediately after post body • Mineral-based lubes must be installation (See First Day in the drained within the first 5,000 miles Maintenance Chapter)

Type of Lubricant On-Highway Mi. (km) Maximum Change On/Off Highway Severe Maximum Change Interval Service Mi. (km) Interval

Mineral-Based 120,000 (192,000) Yearly 60,000 (96,000) Yearly

Eaton-Approved 240,000 (384,000) 2 Years 120,000 (192,000) Yearly Synthetic

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 285 MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

Type of Lubricant On-Highway Mi. (km) Maximum Change On/Off Highway Severe Maximum Change Interval Service Mi. (km) Interval

Eaton-Approved 350,000 (560,000) Synthetic in axle with extended drain interval option

Meritor Axle Lubrication Under Meritor’s Advanced Lube Rear Drive Drive Axle - Meritor Axle program, the axles listed below are exempt from an initial lubricant change: Drain and replace the lubricant. NOTE 5 Axles utilized in 100% off-highway use are not eligible for Meritor's Advanced Lube Rear Drive Axle program.

Available Advanced Lube Axles

RS-19-145 RS-26-180 RT-40-145P RT-46-160

RS-21-145 RS-30-180 SQ-100A RT-46-160P

RS-23-160 RT-34-145 SQ-100AP RT-52-160

RS-23-161 RT-34-145P RT-44-145 RT-52-160P

RS-17-145 RS-23-180 RT-40-145 RT-44-145P

Meritor rear axles that do not appear on initial drain at 3,000-5,000 miles • Refer to the Meritor Field the list above will continue to require an (4,800-8,000 km). Maintenance Manual for a

286 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Rear Axle and Suspension

particular axle for lubricant • See your dealer for Meritor- • Refer to the following chart for specifications. approved lubricant brands. lubricant change intervals:

Application Type Of Lubricant Mileage Interval

On Highway Synthetic 240,000 mi. (384,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 500,000 mi. (800,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

City Delivery Synthetic 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 240,000 mi. (384,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km) 5

Off Highway Synthetic 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Synthetic with Pump and Filter 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

Mineral Base 120,000 mi. (192,000 km)

• Change the lubricant filter every 2. Overhaul the brakes: degrease all Drive Axle (SISU) Oil Servicing 120,000 miles (192,000 km). Top moving parts, check the bushings Change the oil in the differential carrier and off the lubricant level with a similar and seals for wear. the hubs, and clean the magnetic oil drain lubricant plugs. Drive Axle (SISU) Inspection Drive Axle - SISU Breather and 1. Check the wheel bearing hubs and Drive Axle - SISU Lube Filter Brakes adjust if necessary. Clean the suction filter for the optional 1. Check the breather for proper 2. Visually inspect for damage or pressure lubrication system. operation. leaks.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 287 MAINTENANCE - Steering System

When no input is applied through the be recalibrated. Any repairs or adjust- steering wheel, the steering gear will return Steering System ments to any part of the steering sys- to the neutral position. If, for any reason, tem must be performed by an author- the power assist system goes out, steering ized dealer. Failure to comply may re- WARNING the vehicle is still possible but it will require sult in personal injury, property dam- much greater effort. age, or death. DO NOT operate the vehicle if the Visually check the following parts: • Crosstube: Is it straight? steering system is not working proper- Hydraulic fluid (under low pressure) ly. You could lose control of your vehi- provides the power to operate the steering • Drag link tube clamp: Check for cle if the steering system is not in good gear. It also serves to lubricate moving looseness or interference working condition, which could result parts and remove heat. A loss of steering • Ball joints and steering U-joints: in a serious accident. For driving safe- efficiency will occur if too much heat builds Check for looseness 5 ty, visually check the steering gear and up in the system. • Steering wheel for excessive free- components. Frequent checks are im- If the steering feels unbalanced from side- play. Check the simplest probable portant for driving safety, especially af- to-side while turning, check for the causes first: (A) unequal tire ter traveling over rough roads. Failure following possible causes: pressures; (B) loose cap nuts; (C) to comply may result in personal injury, • Unequal tire pressures bent crosstube; or (D) lack of property damage, or death. • Vehicle overloaded or unevenly lubrication distributed load If these checks do not reveal the problem, • Wheels out of alignment or if you correct them and still have a WARNING steering problem, take your vehicle to an • Wheel bearings improperly authorized dealer for evaluation. If this chassis is equipped with an adjusted electronic stability system (ESC) and If you cannot correct the problem, check any part of the steering system (e.g., with an authorized dealer. linkage, steering driveline, column, Your vehicle is equipped with integral front end alignment, etc) is repaired, power steering. The system includes an removed, or disassembled in any way, engine-driven fluid pump, a fluid reservoir, or if the steering angle sensor is re- the steering gear, and connecting hoses. placed, the steering angle sensor must Because of the hydraulic power assist, little effort is required to turn the steering wheel.

288 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Steering System

Check Power Steering Fluid Level Power Steering Reservoir 5. Fill cap

CAUTION • If you check the fluid with the engine and steering system COLD, the fluid level should be When adding fluid, be sure to use fluid 3 of the same type. While many fluids 5 2 above the Add indicator level have the same description and intend- and should generally not ed purpose, they should not be mixed exceed the middle point due to incompatible additives. Mixing 1 between the Add and Full level incompatible fluids may lead to equip- indicators. ment damage. • If you check the fluid with the 4 engine and steering system WARM, the fluid should NOT 5 NOTE exceed the Full level indicator and should generally not drop Before removing reservoir cap, wipe below the middle point between the outside of the cap so that no dirt or the HOT Full and Add level debris falls into the reservoir. indicators. 4. To add fluid, open the fill cap to the Check the fluid level. Use the following power steering reservoir and then procedure: add fluid until the fluid level is in the 1. Park the vehicle on level ground middle of the appropriate Minimum and turn the engine off. and Maximum level indicators. 2. Open the hood. 5. Reinstall the reservoir fill cap and 3. Check the fluid level on the close the hood. 1. Cold reservoir. 2. Hot 3. Full 4. Add

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 289 MAINTENANCE - Driveline

Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications WARNING WARNING The steering (intermediate shaft) U-joint pinch bolt should be tightened on the first If this chassis is equipped with an Improper lubrication of U-joints can day or two of operation, then checked Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and cause them to fail prematurely. The weekly (see Weekly Checks). The is modified (e.g. adding or removing driveshaft could separate from the ve- following are common torque specifications an axle, converting from a truck to a hicle and result in an accident. Make for most steering shafts. tractor, converting from a tractor to a sure lubricant is purged at all four ends truck, changing the body, lengthening of each U-joint and loosen caps if nec- of the wheelbase and/or frame, relo- essary. Also, regularly inspect U-joints Steering U-joint Pinch Bolt cating frame components, or modifying for excessive wear or movement, and pneumatic or electrical ABS/ESC har- repair or replace as necessary. Failure 5 nesses) the ESC must be evaluated to comply may result in death, person- Fastener Size Torque Spec. lb-ft by a qualified technician. If you have al injury, equipment or property dam- (N•m) any questions, contact your authorized age. dealer. Failure to comply may result in 7/16 -in. 37-43 (50-58) property damage, personal injury, or death. Tires

Pitman Arm Clamp Bolt Your tires are a very important part of your Driveline vehicle’s whole braking system. How fast Fastener Size Torque Spec. lb-ft you can stop depends mostly on how much (N•m) See the driveshaft manufacturer's friction you get between the road and your operator's manual for lubrication tires. In addition, keeping your tires in good 3/4 -in. 300-320 (406-433) specifications and service intervals. condition is essential to the safe, efficient operation of your vehicle. Regular, frequent inspection and the right care will give you the assurance of safe and reliable tire

290 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Tires

operation. Here are some tips on such as flex break, radial cracks, and ply maintaining your tires. separation. Low pressure may affect WARNING Proper Over Under control of your vehicle, especially at the front wheels. Most tire wear problems are caused by underinflation as the result of DO NOT operate a vehicle with under- slow leaks, so check tire pressure inflated tires. The extra heat caused by regularly. Lower tire pressure does not underinflation can cause sudden tire provide better traction on ice or snow. Give failure such as a tire fire or blow out, your tires a visual test every day, and which can cause an accident resulting check inflation with a gauge every week: in death or personal injury. Low pres- TREAD CONTACT WITH ROAD sure may affect control at the front • When checking tire pressure, wheels, which could result in an acci- inspect each tire for damage to dent involving death or personal injury. sidewalls, cuts, cracks, uneven WARNING Keep your tires inflated to the manu- wear, rocks between duals, etc. If a 5 facturer's recommended air pressure. DO NOT repair damaged tires unless tire appears underinflated, check you are fully qualified and equipped to for damage to the wheel assembly. do so. Wheel and tire assemblies can- Don’t forget to check between dual not be worked on without proper tools wheels. If you find wheel damage, and equipment, such as: safety cages have an expert tire service repair it. or restraining devices. Have all tire re- • Maximum tire pressure will be pairs performed by an expert. Stand indicated on the sidewall of a tire. away from the tire assembly while the • Check pressure only when the tires expert is working. Failure to do this are cool. Warm or hot tires cause may result in death or injury. pressure buildup and will give you an inaccurate reading. So never Checking Inflation Pressure deflate a warm tire to the specified pressure. Low pressure is a tire’s worst enemy. Underinflation allows tires to flex improperly, causing high temperatures to build up. Heat causes early tire damage

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 291 MAINTENANCE - Tires

WARNING Effects of Load and Pressure on WARNING Tire Life DO NOT attempt to raise the vehicle to Overinflated tires can cause accidents. remove or install a damaged tire and Vehicle Tire Expected They wear more quickly than properly wheel assembly if you are not fully Load Pressure Total Tire inflated tires and are more subject to qualified and not equipped with the Mileage punctures, cracks, and other damage. proper tools and equipment. DO NOT They could fail and cause you to lose attempt to reinflate a tire that has been Normal Normal Normal control of your vehicle resulting in an run flat. Obtain expert help. A person accident causing death or personal in- can be seriously injured or killed if us- 20% Over 20% Low 70% jury. Be sure all tires are inflated cor- ing the wrong service methods. Truck 40% Over 30% Low 50% rectly according to the manufacturer's 5 tires and wheels should be serviced recommendations. only by trained personnel using proper 60% Over 35% Low 40% equipment. Follow OSHA regulations Matching Tires per section 1910.177. 80% Over 45% Low 30% Be sure to buy matched tires for your 100% Over 55% Low 25% vehicle, especially on the rear axles. NOTE Mismatched tires can cause stress between axles and cause the temperature of your axle lubricant to get too hot. Follow all warnings and cautions con- Overinflated Tires Matched tires will help your driveline last tained within the tire and wheel manu- Overinflating the tires reduces the tread longer and will give you better tire mileage. facturers literature. contact area with the road surface, concentrating all of the vehicle weight on Overloaded Tires the center of the tread. This causes Overloading your truck is as damaging to premature wear of the tire. your tires as underinflation. The following chart shows how neglect or deliberate abuse can affect the life of your tires.

292 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Tires

groove. Check at three places equally spaced around the tire. WARNING NOTE

DO NOT mismatch tires, it can be dan- WARNING To prolong your tires' life and make gerous. Never mix tires of different de- them safer, have their radial and later- sign such as steel belted radials and DO NOT replace original equipment al run-out checked at your dealer. And bias ply tires, etc. Mixing tire types and tires with load ratings less than the of course you should have your tires sizes will adversely affect the road original tires. Doing so could lead to balanced anytime you change a tire. holding ability of both types of tires unintentional overloading of the tire, and can lead to loss of vehicle control which could cause a failure resulting in Speed Restricted Tires and causing death or personal injury. loss of vehicle control and an accident. Failure to comply may result in death, WARNING personal injury, equipment or property 5 WARNING damage. This vehicle is equipped with speed re- DO NOT install regrooved or reinforce- stricted tires. Check each tire’s side- ment repaired tires on steering axles. NOTE wall and/or tire manufacturer's data They could fail unexpectedly and book for maximum rated speed. The vehicle should not be operated at cause you to lose control of your vehi- To prolong your tires' life and make speeds in excess of the maximum rat- cle resulting in an accident causing them safer, have their radial and later- ed speed. Failure to comply with these death or personal injury. al run-out checked at your dealer. And speed restrictions could cause sudden of course you should have your tires tire failure, which can result in property Replacing Tires balanced anytime you change a tire. damage or personal injury. Front: Replace front tires when less than Tire Chains 4/32 -in. of tread remains. Check at three places equally spaced around the tire. If you need tire chains, install them on both Drive Axles or Trailers: Replace tires on sides of each driving axle. drive axles or trailers when less than 2/32 - in. of tread depth remains in any major

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 293 MAINTENANCE - Wheels

Greenhouse Gas Certified Tires be clean and dry. Do not lubricate wheel for disc brake applications. If it ever nuts or studs. becomes necessary to replace an original equipment wheel, the replacement wheel NOTE must be the same brand and size as the WARNING take-off wheel. On vehicles equipped with The tires installed on this vehicle at the 22.5 in. disc wheels, installing the wrong factory as original equipment are certi- Never use oil or grease on studs or replacement wheel could result in the fied for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Effi- nuts; improper torque readings will re- wheel valve stem making contact with the ciency regulations. Replacement tires sult, which could cause improper disc brake assembly. When installing any must be of an equal or larger loaded wheel clamping and could lead to a replacement wheel, always inspect the drive tire size and an equal or lower wheel failure resulting in an accident. tires/wheels to ensure there is adequate rolling resistance level (TRRL or Crr). Failure to comply may result in death, clearance between other vehicle Consult with your tire supplier(s) for personal injury, equipment or property components. With the hood open, check 5 appropriate replacement tires. damage. for clearance between the wheel and disc brake assembly. Use a hydraulic jack to In order to limit the rolling resistance of the Wheel Replacement with Disc raise the front of the vehicle off the ground Brake Option tires and optimize fuel economy, the to allow the wheel to spin freely. While maintenance procedures specified by the rotating the wheel, check to ensure there is tire manufacturer must be followed. Please WARNING adequate clearance between the wheel see Vehicle Emissions Limited Express and disc brake assembly. Warranty for warranty on greenhouse gas Use only the wheel brand, size and certified tires. part number originally installed. Use of a different wheel brand or size could cause valve stem to interfere with a Wheels brake component which could lead to loss of vehicle control. Failure to com- After the vehicle travels about 50 to 100 ply may result in death, personal in- miles (80 to 160 km), wheel mountings jury, equipment or property damage. seat in and will lose some initial torque. Check hub/wheel mountings after this Vehicles equipped with front disc brakes initial period and retighten. Threads should are fitted with wheels designed specifically

294 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Wheels

operation and adequate service life, your not adequate for this purpose. Failure wheel bearings must be adjusted properly WARNING to comply may result in death, person- at the recommended intervals. Contact al injury, equipment or property dam- your authorized dealer to make sure the Improperly mounting and demounting age. wheel bearings are properly adjusted. tire and rim assemblies is dangerous. Failure to observe proper precautions Disc Wheels could cause the tire rim assembly to burst explosively, causing death or WARNING personal injury. See the wheel manu- facturer's literature for the proper way Use the correct components and tools to mount and demount your tires and when working on wheels. Grooves in rims. Follow their precautions exactly. the wheel disc or other damage to the disc can weaken the wheel and cause 5 WARNING it to eventually come off. This could cause you to lose control of your vehi- cle, and may result in an accident. Always ensure the hood hold open Failure to comply may result in proper- latch is engaged to keep the hood fully ty damage, personal injury, or death. open any time anyone gets under the hood for any reason. Failure to do so The end of the wheel wrench must be may cause the hood to close uncon- smooth. Burrs on the end of the wrench trollably which may result in death or can tear grooves in the disc. These personal injury. grooves may lead to cracks in the disc, and can cause it to fail. WARNING Wheel Bearings

Always support the vehicle with appro- Service the bearings, seals and oil. This priate safety stands if it is necessary to interval may be different depending on the work underneath the vehicle. A jack is results of the regular inspection. 350,000 mi (560,000 km). For safe, reliable

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 295 MAINTENANCE - Wheels

Tightening Wheel Cap Nuts Hub Piloted Disc Wheels This is a job you may not be able to do yourself. You need the right torquing equipment to do it. WARNING Stud Piloted Disc Wheels Tighten wheel cap nuts properly. If they are not tightened properly, wheel nuts could eventually cause the wheel to become loose, to fail, and/or to come off while the vehicle is moving, possibly causing loss of control and may result in death, personal injury, 5 equipment or property damage.

Proper wheel torque can best be obtained on level ground. Install lug nuts and finger- tighten in the numerical sequence as shown below. This procedure will ensure that the wheel is drawn evenly against the hub. Contact an authorized dealer for information on the proper installation procedure for the wheels on your truck.

296 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Windshield Wiper/Washer

engine compartment, on top of the Windshield Wiper/Washer radiator, and open the filler cap. 4. Fill the 2.0 Gallon (7.6 Liters) CAUTION The windshield wiper system is designed reservoir with windshield washer fluid and replace the cap. Replace oil-coalescing desiccant air to be maintenance-free. Check wiper dryer cartridge every 1 year regardless 5. Close and secure the hood. blades annually, every 60,000 miles of mileage. Only use oil-coalescing (96,000 km), or when they begin to show desiccant replacement cartridge when signs of wear. replacing. Failure to perform this main- Check the washer reservoir water level Transmission Maintenance tenance task will void the PACCAR daily, located in the engine compartment. If Transmission warranty and may result necessary, refill to the proper level. See the transmission manufacturer's in expensive transmission damage. operator's manual for lubrication How to Refill the Washer Fluid specifications and service intervals. 5 Reservoir Fuller Transmission Lubrication CAUTION Fuller transmissions are designed so that CAUTION the internal parts operate in a bath of oil When adding oil, types and brands of circulated by the motion of gears and DO NOT use antifreeze or engine oil should not be intermixed because shafts. Grey iron parts have built-in coolant in the windshield washer res- of possible incompatibility, which could channels where needed to help lubricate ervoir, damage to seals and other decrease the effectiveness of the lubri- bearings and shafts. All parts will be amply components will result. cation or cause component failure. lubricated if these procedures are closely followed: 1. Park the vehicle and apply the Vehicles configured with Eaton Automated 1. Maintain oil level; check it regularly. parking brakes. or a PACCAR transmission must maintain 2. Change oil regularly. 2. Open the hood and secure it in the the oil coalescing desiccant cartridge of the 3. Use the correct grade and type of open position. air dryer as part of transmission oil. 3. Locate the washer fluid reservoir maintenance. 4. Buy oil from a reputable dealer. located on the driver's side of the

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 297 MAINTENANCE - Hydraulic Clutch

Lubrication Change and Inspection Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Off-Highway Use CAUTION Refer to the Eaton Fuller transmission manual for servicing information. Exceeding the recommended oil Highway Use change intervals may be harmful to the life of the transmission and the trans- • Refer to the Eaton Fuller mission oil cooler. transmission manual for servicing information. • Refer to the oil change vs. Allison Transmission Lubrication temperature chart that follows for • Refer to your transmission manual special oil change information. The (furnished separately) for "intermittent peak temperature" is 5 lubrication information. the maximum temperature observed for a short time in a fully • Refer to the Allison Transmission loaded vehicle performing normally. manual for servicing information.

Hydraulic Clutch Visually inspect the clutch fluid from the The clutch pedal position is factory set and reservoir. There are molded lines with the does not require adjustment. letters MIN to indicate minimum fluid level and MAX to indicate the maximum fluid level recommended for proper operation. Be sure to maintain the fluid between the MIN and MAX levels indicated on the plastic reservoir. If the fluid level repeatedly goes below the MIN line, then it is time to have your clutch adjusted or the hydraulic system inspected for service. To replace

298 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

the fluid, locate the drain fitting on the air Clutch Adjustment manufacturer's Service Manual for the solenoid mounted to the transmission proper adjustment procedures. Some clutches are self-adjusting, however; housing. Open this fitting and allow fluid to there are manually adjusted clutches that drain out of the system. Once all the fluid is will require the operator to know when to drained out, close the fitting and fill the adjust the clutch. The clutch will need system through the master cylinder Specification Reference adjustment when your clutch pedal stroke reservoir in the engine compartment. Once seems to get longer and its effectiveness Charts the system is full, then purge the system of at a seamless shift becomes less. Another air by simultaneously pressing on the pedal sign of the clutch needing adjustment is the and opening the fitting to allow air to Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque level of the fluid in the reservoir. If the escape. Close the fitting when fluid starts Values hydraulic fluid is not leaking, but the fluid coming out. Then refill the reservoir. Torque specifications for engine parts. level is getting lower, then the clutch may Repeat this until all air has been purged need to be adjusted. Please take the from the system. Replace with the 5 vehicle to an authorized dealership to have recommended fluid per Lubrication the clutch adjusted. See the clutch Specification Chart on page 301.

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. N•m

Radiator and Heat Exchanger Constant Torque CT-L 90-110 10.2-12.5 Hoses

Heater Hoses Constant Tension not required not required

Air Intake Pipes Hi Torque HTM-L 100-125 11.3-14.2

Plastic Air Intake Pipes Constant Torque CT-L 88 10.0

Charge Air Intake Hoses Flex Seal 70-100 7.9-11.3

B9296 50-60 6-7

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 299 MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Application Type of Clamp lb-in. N•m

Fuel, Oil and Water Heat Miniature 3600L 10-15 1.1-1.7 Exchangers (for hoses less than 9/16 in. diameter).

value. After that, check wheel cap nuts at This is a job you may not be able to do Wheel Cap Nut Torque least once a week. yourself. You need the right torquing Specifications Contact an authorized dealer for equipment to do it. information on the proper installation At the first scheduled lube interval, have all procedure for the wheels on your truck. wheel cap nuts torqued to their specified

5 Torque for Two Piece Flanged Cap Nuts Wheel and Nut Configuration Stud Size lb-ft N•m

Hub-Piloted Disc-Type Wheel M22-1.5 450-500 610-680 w/Two Piece Flanged Cap Nuts: Steel or Aluminum Wheel PHP-10; Budd Uni-Mount-10; WDH-8

Stud Backnuts (when used) 3/4-16 175-200 240-270

1-14 175-300 240-410

Cast Spoke Wheel Assembly 1/2 in. Dia. 80-90 110-120 Rim Clamp Nut Torque 5/8 in. Dia. 160-185 220-250

3/4 in. Dia. 225-245 305-335

300 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Lubrication Specification Chart *Consult manufacturer or lubricant supplier for special details. NOTE

The responsibility for meeting these specifications, the quality of the prod- uct, and its performance in service rests with the lubricant supplier.

Lubricant Symbol Key

Type Application 5

ATF MD3 or MERCON®-approved automatic transmission fluid

BB High temperature ball bearing grease. Chevron SRI Mobile Grease HP, Texaco Multifax 2

CB Engine oil for mild to moderate requirements

CC/CD Engine oil for severe requirements (MIL-L-2104B /MIL-L-45199B) w/ 1.85 % max. sulfated ash

CD Engine oil meeting API “Five engine test sequence”

CD50 SAE 50W synthetic transmission fluid

CE Engine oil meeting severe duty service requirements for direct-injection turbocharged

CK-4/ Engine oil for PACCAR MX and Cummins EGR engines CJ-4

CL Multipurpose chassis grease

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 301 MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Type Application

EP Extreme Pressure Lubricant (Lithium 12-hydroxystearate base NLGI 2)

GL Straight mineral gear lubricant

HD Hypoid Gear Oil, A.P.I. - GL-5, SAE 75W-90FE synthetic gear lubricant

HT High Temperature grease (Timken Spec. 0-616)

MP Multipurpose gear lubricant (MIL-L-2105B)

DOT3 Brake Fluid 5

Component Lubrication Index

Application Type

Steering Column CL

Alternator Bearing BB (1)

Fan Hub BB (1)

Power Steering Reservoir ATF

Steering Drag Link CL

Steering Knuckles CL

Spring Pins CL

302 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Application Type

Clutch Release Bearings BB

Brake Shoe Anchor Pins HT

Brake Cam Bearings HT

Slack Adjusters CL

Starter Bearings CC

Turbocharger Aneroid CC Water Pump BB (1) 5 Suspension Fittings (other than threaded pins and bushings) EP

Steering Axle: Grease Fittings on Steering Arm; Tie Rod Ends; EP Drag Link; King Pins

Steering Shaft Grease Fittings EP

Brake Treadle Hinge and Roller Engine oil

Lock Cylinders Lock lubricant

Door Hinges Do not lubricate

Door Latches and Striker Plates Polyethylene grease stick

Door Weatherstrip Silicone lubricant

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 303 MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Application Type

Hub-piloted Aluminum Wheels Coat the wheel pilot or hub pads with Freylube #3 lubricant (light colored) or Chevron Zinc lube. Do not get lubricant on the face of the wheel or the hub.

Manual Transmission Hydraulic Clutch DOT3 (Brake Fluid)

(1) Consult manufacturer or lubricant supplier for special details.

Where Nylon lock-nuts (AKA, • When torquing, the nut must ro- Frame Fastener Torque "ESNA" or "nyloc") are indicated in tate slightly before achieving the the following tables Requirements torque value. If the nut does not 5 rotate, the fastener is over-tor- qued and should be replaced. NOTE CAUTION • To achieve correct clamp loads, the frame fasteners must be tor- The torque values and instructions Incorrectly tightening the fasteners may qued with the nut. The intended found in the following section apply result in failure of the fastener or incor- clamp load may not be achieved ONLY to Nylon locknuts (right image). rect clamp loads. Fastener failure may if the nut is held and torque is They do NOT apply to the all-metal lead to frame failure. Failure to comply applied to the bolt. lock-nut type (left image). may result in equipment or property damage. • Use a torque wrench for final tightening of these fasteners. Due to the coating on the threads of these bolts, be aware that if an impact gun is used to tighten the fasteners, they may over-torque and break.

304 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Standard Grade 8 UNF or UNC Metric Fastener Tightening Nylon Lock-Nuts Size (with Specification lb-ft NYLON insert (N•m) Tightening Fastener Size nuts) Specification lb-ft (-in.) (N•m) M5 6-9 (8-12)

16-22 (22-30) 5/16 M6 7-11 (9-15)

30-40 (41-54) 3/8 M8 17-23 (23-31)

55-65 (75-88) 7/16 • Use only lock-nut with nylon insert. Where fasteners with all-metal lock- • Lubricate nylon insert nut lightly 80-90 (109-122) 1/2 nuts are indicated in the following with SAE 20W or 30W oil. table 5 • Tighten all frame fasteners with a 115-140 (156-190) 9/16 torque wrench. 165-195 (224-265) 5/8 NOTE

290-340 (394-462) 3/4 NOTE The torque values and instructions with the following table apply ONLY to 380-460 (517-626) 7/8 The following values are applicable to all-metal lock nuts (left image) but do fasteners on the FRAME and DO NOT 700-830 (952-1,129) 1 NOT apply to Nylon lock-nuts (right im- APPLY to u-bolts for the suspension. age). 990-1,170 (1,346- 1-1/8 1,591)

1,380-1,630 (1,877- 1-1/4 2,217)

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 305 MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

authorized dealer to tighten the U-bolts on Metric Fastener Tightening your vehicle. Size (with all Specification lb-ft METAL Lock- (N•m) nuts) Torque for Grade 8 U-Bolts M10 29-41 (39.4-55.6) Peterbilt Front Suspension U-bolts M12 51-69 (69.1-93.5) U-Bolt Size Torque (lb- Torque M16 125-165 Diameter (- ft) (N•m) (169.5-223.7) • Do NOT lubricate all-metal lock- in.) nuts. M20 230-300 3/4 260-290 353-393 5 • Bolts and washers can be reused, (311.8-406.8) but nuts can only be reused once. 7/8 370-415 502-563 If in doubt, install new nuts. • If a bolt must be replaced the nut For all non-PACCAR suspension systems, see the manufacturer’s installed on it must also be Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 replaced. operator’s manual for torque Tighten all U-bolts with a torque wrench. • Fasteners must be torqued from specifications. Torque requirements in the table below the nut to achieve correct clamp apply to PACCAR proprietary suspensions load. using Protec Torque/TEXO coated U-bolts, only. For all other suspensions, follow the manufacturer's recommended torque values. PACCAR proprietary suspension u- bolts must be tightened in a specific sequence. Take your vehicle to an

306 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Peterbilt Rear Suspension U-bolts Peterbilt Rear Suspension U-bolts plied to bolts and fasteners for the frame. Rear U-Bolt Torque lb-ft Rear U-Bolt Torque lb-ft Suspensio Diamet (N•m)22 Suspensio Diamet (N•m) n Type er n Type er Rear Suspension Fasteners Low Air M22 x 375–475 (508– 18K Taper ¾ -in. 275–320 (373– Leaf (U-bolt, 1.5 644) Leaf (Axle 16 UNF 434) Air-Trac Fastener Torque Values spring) U-bolt)

Flex Air M22 x 325–375 (440– 18K Air Leaf ¾ -in. 275–320 (373– Fastener Fastener lb•ft (N•m) 1.5 508) (Axle U- 16 UNF 434) Name bolt) Tandem M22 x 375–475 (508– M16 Tracking 155–195 5 Low Air 1.5 644) For all non-PACCAR suspension rod bolts (210–264) Leaf systems, see the manufacturer’s operator’s manual for torque 0.75 NF Spring 165–210 Air Leaf (U- 1.0 -in. 450–550 (610– specifications. center bolt (224–285)23 bolt, spring) NF 746) M16 0.75 Radius rod 155–195 Air-Trac 1.0 -in. 450–550 (610– NF bolts (210–264) NF 746) NOTE (forward) 13.5K Taper ¾ -in. 275–320 (373– Radius rod 250–350 Leaf (Axle 16 UNF 434) The values shown here are for sus- bolts (at (339–475) U-bolt) pension U-bolts and should not be ap- axle)

22 Torques listed are for primed (or non-oiled) U-bolts. 23 Torque requirement applies at subassembly of airspring support and leaf spring only.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 307 MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Fastener Flex Air Fastener Torque Values Fastener lb•ft (N•m) Fastener Torque lb•ft Name Fastener Name (N•m) M16 Frame 50–65 (68– Fastener Torque lb-ft M20 x 2.5 Bar pin 325–425 Fastener bracket 88) Name (N•m) bushing bolts (441–576) Drive bolts M22 x 1.5 U-bolt, Refer to bracket - 25 section on 1.0 NF U-bolt24 Refer to spring frame bolts section on Suspension Suspension U-Bolts, Drive U-Bolts, Grade 8. bracket - link spring Grade 8. 0.5 UNC Air bag stud 40–50 (54– 5 bolt 0.5 UNC Air bag stud 40–50 (54– nut 68) Drive nut 68) M16 Tracking 155–195 bracket - rod bolts (210–264) M16 Tracking 155–195 radius rod rod bolts (210–264) 155–195 M16 bolt (210–264) Drive beam - shock bolt Low Air Leaf Torque Values (lower) Low Air Leaf Torque values apply to both Shock single and tandem axles. bracket - shock bolt (upper)

Tracking rod bolts (all) 24 See owners manual for torque tightening sequence.

308 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) MAINTENANCE - Specification Reference Charts

Fastener Torque lb-ft Vehicle Light Bulb Specifications Fastener Name (N•m) Bulb Type of Notes M10 Air spring 36–51 (49– Location Bulb support 69) beam bolts Low H11-LL, 12 (Long life beam/DRL volts, 55 version not 0.88 - 14 Drive beam 380–460 halogen Watts required) UNF - link spring (515–624) bolt High beam HB3A-LL, 12 (Long life halogen volts, 60 version not 0.88 - 14 Radius rod 380–460 Watts required) UNF bracket bolt (515–624) Turn signal/ 4157NAK, N/A 5 M22 x 1.5 U-bolt26 Refer to Parking/ 12 volts 28.5 section on Side-marker Watts Suspension halogens27 U-Bolts, Grade 8. LED Side N/A LED markers 0.5 UNC Air bag stud 40–50 (54– nut 68) Rear tail N/A LED lamps/turn signals

Interior map/ N/A LED Dome/ Indirect light

25 Contact your dealer for torque tightening procedure. 26 Contact your dealer for torque tightening procedure. 27 Bulb provides all three lighting functions.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 309 INFORMATION -

Chapter 6 | INFORMATION

Consumer Information...... 311 Vehicle Identification Labels...... 311 Clean Idle...... 314 Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration...... 315 Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty...... 318

6

310 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Consumer Information

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Transport Canada, ASFAD Place de Ville cannot get involved in individual problems Tower C 330 Sparks St. Ottawa, ON K1A Consumer Information between you, your dealer, and vehicle 0N5 How to Order Replacement Parts manufacturer. Contacting NHTSA is For additional road safety information, possible through telephone, written mail please visit the Road Safety website at: Replacement parts may be obtained from and email. NHTSA also has a website http://www.tc.gc.ca an authorized dealership. When you order, where you can input your comments it is IMPORTANT that you have the directly to them on the web. Please use following information ready: any of the four ways to contact NHTSA: • Your name and address Vehicle Identification • Serial number of the truck Labels • The name of the part you need Toll Free 1-888-327-4236 (800-424-9153 Each vehicle completed by Peterbilt Motors • The name and number of the TTY) 8:00 a.m. to 10:00 p.m. EST Monday-Friday Company uses a vehicle identification component for which the part is number (VIN) that contains the model year required Office of Defects Investigations/CRD designation of your vehicle. The practice is • The quantity of parts you need NVS-216 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE in compliance with 49 CFR 565, Code of 6 • How you want your order shipped Washington, D.C. 20590 Federal Regulations. The full, 17-digit VIN is located on the www.safercar.gov National Highway Traffic and Safety Weight Rating Data Label. The label is Administration (NHTSA) email: [email protected] located on the driver's side door edge or If you believe that your vehicle has a on the driver's side door frame. defect, which could cause a crash or could cause death or personal injury, you should Transport Canada immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in Canadian customers who wish to report a addition to notifying the vehicle safety-related defect to Transport Canada, manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar Defect Investigations and Recalls, may complaints, it may open an investigation, telephone the toll free hotline and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a 1-800-333-0510, or contact Transport group of vehicles, it may order a recall and Canada by mail at:

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 311 INFORMATION - Vehicle Identification Labels

• Back of cab, left-hand rear panel, edge or on the driver’s side door frame. It lower edge contains the following information: • Tire, Rim, and Weight Rating Data • GVWR - Gross Vehicle Weight label (truck) Rating • Components and Weights label • GAWR FRONT, INTERMEDIATE • Noise Emission label and REAR - Gross Axle Weight • Paint Identification label Ratings for Front, Intermediate and Rear Axle Certification Labels • TIRE/RIM SIZES AND INFLATION Your vehicle information and specifications PRESSURES - Tire/Rim Sizes and are documented on labels. As noted below, Cold Pressure Minimums each label contains specific information • VIN including CHASSIS NUMBER. pertaining to vehicle capacities and The components of your vehicle are specifications that you should be aware of. designed to provide satisfactory service, if the vehicle is not loaded in excess of either 6 Components and Chassis Weight the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR), or Label the maximum front and rear gross axle The Components and Chassis Weight weight ratings (GAWRs). Label is located on either the driver’s side Chassis Number door edge or on the driver’s side door WARNING frame. It includes chassis number, chassis The Chassis Number refers to the last six weight and gross weight, plus model DO NOT exceed the specified load rat- characters of the VIN. This number will information for the vehicle, engine, ing. Overloading can result in loss of allow your dealer to identify your vehicle. transmission, and axles. You will be asked for this number when vehicle control, either by causing com- you bring it in for service. Chassis Number Tire, Rim and Weight Rating Data ponent failures or by affecting vehicle Locations Label handling. Exceeding load ratings can also shorten the service life of the ve- • Right frame rail, top flange, about 3 The Tire, Rim, and Weight Rating Data hicle. Failure to comply may result in ft. from the front end Label is located on the driver’s side door death or personal injury.

312 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Vehicle Identification Labels

Paint Identification Label indicates the date of manufacture and other pertinent information, is located on The Paint Identification Label contains the NOTE the driver’s side door edge or on the paint colors used by the factory to paint driver’s side door frame. GVW is the TOTAL SCALE WEIGHT your vehicle. It lists frame, wheels, cab the vehicle is designed to carry. This interior and exterior colors. This label is Component Identification includes the weight of the empty vehi- located inside the glove box. Each of the major components on your cle, loading platform, occupants, fuel, Federal Safety Standard vehicle has an identification label or tag. and any load. Certification Label For easy reference, record component numbers such as, model, serial, and Noise Emission Label The NHTSA regulations require a label assembly number. certifying compliance with Federal Safety The Noise Emission Label is located in the Standards, for United States and U.S. driver's side door frame. It contains Territories, be affixed to each motor vehicle information regarding U.S. noise emission and prescribe where such label may be regulations, chassis number, and date of located. This certification label, which manufacture. 6 Engine For further information, please refer to the Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Transmission For both manual and automatic transmissions, the identification number is stamped on a tag affixed to the right rear side of the transmission case.

Clutch Enclosed in clutch housing. Location depends on manufacturer.

Steer Axle The front axle serial number is stamped on a plate located on the center of the axle beam.

Axle Specification Number Usually stamped on the right rear side of the axle housing. This number identifies the complete axle.

Axle Housing Number Usually located on the left forward side of the housing arm. This tag identifies the axle housing.

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 313 INFORMATION - Clean Idle

Axle Differential Carrier Identification Usually located on the top side of the differential carrier. The following information is either stamped, or marked with a metal tag: Model No., Production Assembly No., Serial No., Gear Ratio, and Part Number.

able to help you to determine whether or Engine Shutdown System not your vehicle's engine may be a If the vehicle’s engine does not meet the candidate for a Certified Clean Idle label if low exhaust emission standard it will have Clean Idle it did not already have the label. an Engine Shutdown System (ESS) to If you have a PACCAR PX-7 or PX-9 To comply with CARB emissions meet limited idle regulations implemented requirements, your vehicle will either have engine, your label will look like the image by CARB and some additional states. the Certified Clean Idle label or an Engine below. These regulations require that the engine Shutdown System (ESS). Some vehicles, have an automatic system to restrict the however, are exempt from these idle time on certain vehicles. An Engine requirements because of their Shutdown System will shut down the configurations (for example: fire truck engine after 5 minutes if the vehicle idles 6 service). with the park brake set and the Your vehicle may have either of these transmission in ‘neutral’ or ‘park’. The ESS labels affixed to the vehicle to identify that will also allow the vehicle 15 minutes of its engine meets the strict low exhaust idle time if the driver does not set the park emission regulations instituted by the state If you have a Cummins engine, your label brake and shifts the transmission to of California (and other states that have will look like the image below. ‘neutral’ or ‘park’. The ESS, however, will chosen to adopt CARB emissions not shut down the engine if the engine is requirements). Trucks with this type of operating in Power Take Off (PTO) mode, if engine will not require an Engine the engine coolant is below 60 degrees Shutdown System and will be allowed to Fahrenheit, or if the engine is performing a idle continuously. It is important that you do parked regeneration. The check engine not remove or deface this label. Do not light will alert you when the ESS shutdown block it from view. Please contact your timer reaches the last 30 seconds before authorized dealership if you need to the engine shuts down. The last 30 replace this label. The dealership will be seconds prior to engine shutdown is the

314 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

only time the driver may reset the idle time ject to fines and penalties. Please con- regulatory by pressing on the accelerator. More subcategory detailed information may be available in tact the vehicle manufacturer for fur- the Engine Operator’s Manual provided ther information about this vehicle’s with your vehicle. certified configuration. Vehicle Emission Control Emission Emission Control Information Label Descriptions Controls Descriptions Greenhouse Gas Certified ARF Aerodynamic roof Configuration fairing Label Identifiers Label Identifier This vehicle includes Greenhouse Gas Descriptions ARFR Adjustable height (GHG) regulated parameters and aerodynamic roof Family Name Describes the technologies. A Vehicle Emission Control fairing vehicle’s certified Information label is located on the driver’s manufacturer, ATS Aerodynamic side door with codes that partially identify the regulatory category, skit and/or fuel tank vehicle’s GHG certified configuration. In and regulatory fairing 6 addition to the Vehicle Emission Control subcategory Information label, other technologies that AFF Aerodynamic front reduce GHG emissions and regulated Emission Controls Describes fairing parameters included in the vehicle’s GHG regulated emission certified configuration are described in this control devices AREF Aerodynamic rear section. installed on the fairing vehicle TGR Gap reducing NOTE Compliance Describes the fairing Statement vehicle’s LRRA Low rolling Modifying a vehicle’s certified configu- compliance resistance tires (all) ration without good engineering judg- standards ment or PACCAR’s approval may be a violation of the Clean Air Act and sub- Regulatory Describes the Subcategory vehicle’s certified

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 315 INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

LRRD Low rolling technology configuration. resistance tires components Changing (drive) aluminum wheels ADVO Vehicle includes to a steel wheels LRRS Low rolling other advanced- may be a violation resistance tires technology of the Clean Air Act (steer) components and subject to fines VSL Vehicle speed INV Vehicle includes and penalties. limiter innovative (off- Nonwheel-Related Nonwheel-related cycle) technology VSLS Soft-top vehicle Weight Reduction weight reduction speed limiter ATI Automatic tire benefits may be inflation system included in this VSLE Expiring vehicle vehicles certified speed limiter TPMS Tire pressure configuration. monitoring system Changing VSLD Vehicle speed 6 aluminum material limiter with both to steel material soft-top and may be a violation expiration GHG Regulated Technology Not On the Emission Control Information of the Clean Air Act IRT Engine shutoff Label and subject to fines system and penalties.

IRT5 Engine shutoff after Technology Compliance 5 minutes or less of Requirements idling Wheel-Related Wheel-related IRTE Expiring engine Weight Reduction weight reduction shutoff benefits may be ADVH Vehicle includes included in this advanced hybrid vehicles certified

316 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration

Other Technologies This vehicle may GHG Regulated Powertrain GHG Regulated Certified Tires be equipped with Parameters Not On the Emission Control Information Label factory installed NOTE automatic engine shutdown (AES), The tires installed on this vehicle at the Powertrain Regulated neutral idle, start- factory as original equipment are certi- Components Parameters stop systems, fied for Greenhouse Gas and Fuel Effi- intelligent controls Engine Engine idle speed, ciency regulations. Replacement tires (Predictive Cruise torque, must be of an equal or larger loaded Control and Neutral horsepower, and drive tire size and an equal or lower Coast), or governed RPM rolling resistance level (TRRL or Crr). extended idle Consult with your tire supplier(s) for reduction systems Transmission Lock up gear, appropriate replacement tires. (Engine Idle number of gears, Shutdown Timer, and torque In order to limit the rolling resistance of the Engine Auto Start, converter tires and optimize fuel economy, the Sleeper APUs, 6 Axle Configuration and maintenance procedures specified by the Fuel-Fire Sleeper drive axle ratio tire manufacturer must be followed. Please Heater System). see Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Disabling or Warranty for warranty on greenhouse gas modifying any GHG certified tires. regulated GHG Regulated Aerodynamic technology may be Performance GHG Regulated Air Conditioning Leakage Standards a violation of the The vehicle needs to stay in as-built Clean Air Act and aerodynamic performance unless good Loss of refrigerant from the air conditioning subject to fines and engineering judgment shows that the systems may not exceed a total leakage penalties. modification will improve safety or will not rate of 11.0 grams per year or a percent increase greenhouse gases. leakage rate of 1.50 percent per year, whichever is greater. This vehicle was built to meet this air conditioning leakage

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 317 INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

standards. Any modification of the air relating to original equipment tires is valid LOSS OF INCOME OR LOST PROFITS; conditioning system must comply with for two (2) years or 24,000 miles (38,000 VEHICLE DOWNTIME; leakage rates defined in SAE J2727. km), whichever occurs first. YOUR SOLE COMMUNICATION EXPENSES; AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST LODGING AND/OR MEAL EXPENSES; PACCAR Inc. IS LIMITED TO THE FINES; APPLICABLE TAXES OR NOTE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF BUSINESS COSTS OR LOSSES; ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT TIRES, ATTORNEY’S FEES; AND ANY LIABILITY Modifying a vehicle’s certified configu- SUBJECT TO PACCAR’S TIME AND YOU MAY HAVE IN RESPECT TO ANY ration without good engineering judg- MILEAGE LIMITATIONS LISTED ABOVE. OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY RELATING ment or PACCAR’s approval may be a This Vehicle Emissions Limited Express TO WARRANTABLE EMISSIONS violation of the Clean Air Act and sub- Warranty relating to original equipment FAILURES. This Vehicle Emissions Limited ject to fines and penalties. Please con- tires begins on the date of delivery of the Express Warranty relating to original tact the vehicle manufacturer for fur- vehicle to the first purchaser or lessee and equipment tires is limited to emissions ther information about this vehicle’s accrued time and mileage is calculated compliance only. The tires are separately certified configuration. when the vehicle is brought in for warranted by their manufacturer for defects correction of the Warrantable Emissions in materials and workmanship other than 6 Failures relating to the original equipment those which cause non-compliance with tires. PACCAR MAKES NO OTHER U.S. and Canadian GHG regulations, Vehicle Emissions Limited VEHICLE EMISSIONS WARRANTIES subject to limitations and conditions RELATING TO THE ORIGINAL contained within the tire manufacturer’s Express Warranty EQUIPMENT TIRES, EXPRESS OR warranty agreement. You are responsible IMPLIED. WHERE PERMITTED BY LAW, for the safe operation and maintenance of Original Equipment Tires PACCAR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY the vehicle and its tires. PACCAR does not PACCAR Inc. warrants the tires installed WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR warrant wear and tear of the tires. as original equipment on this vehicle only FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE RELATING TO VEHICLE Greenhouse Gas (GHG) against defects in materials and Components Other Than Tires workmanship which cause the vehicle to EMISSIONS. PACCAR AND THE fail to comply with applicable U.S. and SELLING DEALER SHALL NOT BE This GHG vehicle Warranty applies to the Canadian greenhouse gas emission limits LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR vehicle (hereafter, vehicle) certified with the ("Warrantable Emissions Failures"). This CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES US Environmental Protection Agency. vehicle emissions limited express warranty INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO:

318 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

Your Warranty Rights and Owner's Warranty Responsibilities costs such as: communication expenses, Obligations meals, lodging incurred by Owner or The vehicle owner is responsible for employees of Owner as a result of a This vehicle is warranted for components performing required maintenance that is Warrantable Condition. Owner is that directly impact the manufacturers listed in your engine and vehicle responsible for downtime expenses, cargo GHG certification with the US Operator’s Manuals. The owner is damage, fines, all applicable taxes, all Environmental Protection Agency. responsible for presenting the vehicle to a business costs, and other losses resulting PACCAR must warrant these components service location as soon as a problem from a Warrantable Condition. Owner is for the periods of time listed below exists. Any warranty repairs should be responsible for maintaining all emissions provided there has been no abuse, neglect completed in a reasonable amount of time. related engine and vehicle computer or improper maintenance of the vehicle. If Retain all receipts covering maintenance program settings in accordance with a GHG-related part on your vehicle is on this equipment. PACCAR cannot deny manufacturer specifications. This found to have a defect in material or warranty solely for the lack of receipts or responsibility includes GHG specific assembly, the part will be repaired or for the failure to ensure the performance of settings that may not be altered before the replaced by PACCAR. all scheduled maintenance. PACCAR may GHG-related expiration mileage has been deny warranty coverage if a vehicle Manufacturer's Warranty Coverage reached for each system. Owner is component has failed due to abuse, responsible for maintaining all physical 6 neglect, improper maintenance, This warranty coverage is provided for five parts related to GHG-regulations in the as- unapproved modifications (both physical years or 100,000 miles (160,000 km), built configuration and in proper working components and computer programming) whichever occurs first, from the date of order for the full regulatory useful life of or using non-Original Equipment delivery of the vehicle to the first purchaser 435,000 miles (700,000 km) or 10 years for replacement parts. If there are any or first lessee. Where a Warrantable Class 8 vehicles, 185,000 miles (300,000 questions regarding these warranty rights Condition exists, PACCAR will diagnose km) or 10 years for Class 5-7. and repair the vehicle, parts and labor and responsibilities, please contact the included, at no cost to the first purchaser or vehicle OEM manufacturer at the customer Replacement Parts first lessee and each subsequent center telephone number provided with the PACCAR recommends that any service purchaser or lessee. This warranty does vehicle operating instructions. Prior to the parts used for maintenance, repair or not override any extended warranty expiration of the applicable warranty, replacement of GHG components be new purchased to cover specific vehicle Owner must give notice of any warranted or genuine approved rebuilt parts and components. failure to an authorized PACCAR dealer and deliver the vehicle to such facility for assemblies. The use of non-genuine repair. Owner is responsible for incidental engine or vehicle replacement parts that

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 319 INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

are not equivalent to the PACCAR engine new or genuine approved rebuilt parts and operation without adequate coolants or or OEM vehicle manufacturer’s original assemblies will utilize replacement parts lubricants; overfueling; overspeeding; lack part specification as built from the factory that are selected and installed to support of maintenance of cooling, lubricating or may impair the engine and vehicle the GHG compliance certification. intake systems; improper storage, starting, emissions control system from working or PACCAR will repair parts found by warm-up, run-in or shutdown practices; functioning effectively, and may jeopardize PACCAR to be defective without charge for unauthorized modifications to the vehicle your GHG warranty coverage. In addition, parts or labor (including diagnosis which and its components. PACCAR is also not genuine vehicle or engine parts must be results in determination that there has responsible for failures caused by incorrect replaced with the same material and been a failure of a warranted part). oil, fuel or diesel exhaust fluid or by water, function as the part assembled on the dirt or other contaminants in the fuel, oil or vehicle from the factory. The owner may Warranty Limitations diesel exhaust fluid. Failure of replacement elect to have maintenance, replacement or Sole and exclusive remedy against parts used in repairs due to the above non- repair of the emission control parts PACCAR and the Selling Dealer arising warrantable conditions is not warrantable. performed by a facility other than an from the purchase and use of this vehicle This warranty is void if the vehicle is authorized PACCAR dealer and may elect is limited to the repair or replacement of altered with parts that do not meet the to use parts other than new or genuine "warrantable failures", for replacement material and functional specifications as 6 approved rebuilt parts and assemblies for parts that are similar in material and manufactured from the factory. Any such maintenance, replacement or repair; function to OEM specifications and subject alterations to vehicle or engine computer however, the cost of such service or parts to PACCAR’s time, mileage, and hour settings will void GHG warranty and and subsequent failures resulting from limitations of the greenhouse gas warranty. potentially cause the vehicle to become such service or parts may not be fully The maximum time, mileage and hour non-compliant with EPA Clean Air Act warranted if the manufacturer determines limitations of the warranty begin with the GHG regulations. Any alterations to GHG that the replacement part is not of similar Date of Delivery to the first purchaser or specific settings prior to the GHG related material and function as the OEM part first lessee. The accrued time, mileage, or expiration mileage for each system will assembled to the vehicle at the factory. hours is calculated when the vehicle is void GHG warranty and potentially cause the vehicle to become non-compliant with PACCAR Responsibilities brought in for correction of warrantable failures. PACCAR is not responsible for EPA Clean Air Act GHG regulations. This The warranty coverage begins when the failures or damage resulting from what warranty is void if certain GHG vehicle is delivered to the first purchaser or PACCAR determines to be abuse, neglect components are not properly maintained first lessee. Repairs and service performed or uncontrollable acts of nature, including, and thus cannot perform to their designed by any authorized PACCAR dealer using but not limited to: damage due to accident; capability. PACCAR is not responsible for

320 Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) INFORMATION - Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty

failures resulting from improper repair or OTHER ENGINES, VEHICLES OR the use of parts which are not genuine PROPERTY, ATTACHMENTS, TRAILERS approved parts. PACCAR is not AND CARGO; LOSS OR DAMAGE TO responsible for the material and labor costs PERSONAL CONTENTS; of emission control parts and assemblies COMMUNICATION EXPENSES; replaced during Scheduled Maintenance of LODGING AND/OR MEAL EXPENSES; the engine as specified in PACCAR FINES; APPLICABLE TAXES OR Operator’s Manuals. THIS WARRANTY, BUSINESS COSTS OR LOSSES; TOGETHER WITH THE EXPRESS ATTORNEYS’ FEES; AND ANY LIABILITY COMMERCIAL WARRANTIES ARE THE YOU MAY HAVE IN RESPECT TO ANY SOLE WARRANTIES MADE BY PACCAR OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY. IN REGARD TO THIS VEHICLE. THIS LIMITED GHG WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY MADE BY PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER. EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE LIMITED WARRANTY, PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER 6 MAKE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. PACCAR AND THE SELLING DEALER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO: LOSS OF INCOME OR LOST PROFITS; ENGINE OR VEHICLE DOWNTIME; THIRD PARTY DAMAGE, INCLUDING DAMAGE OR LOSS TO

Y53-6126-1A1 (01/21) 321 Index

Index

Anti-Theft 76 A Antilock Brake System 86 At first 15,000 mi / 24,000 km or at first PM 195 Active Cruise Control Set Following Distance 146 Auto Slack Adjuster 240 Active Warnings 64, 81 Automated Emergency Braking, See Collision Mitigation adaptive cruise control 135 Automated transmission 158 Adaptive Cruise Control 145 Automatic Slack Adjuster Stroke Specification 241 Adaptive Cruise Control Notification, See ADAS Notification Automatic time 72 ADAS Camera Fault 84 Automatic Traction Control 164 ADAS Notification 68 Axle Temperature Gauge 92 Additives to Cooling System 250 Axle, Traction Control 84, 85, 161 Adjust Seat 23 See also ATC Adjust Side Mirrors 113 AxleAuxiliary 172 Advanced ABS with Stability Control 163 AxleDiff Lock 170 Advanced Driver Assistance Systems (ADAS), See Driver Assistance AxleDifferential Lock 170 Aiming Headlamps 257 AxleDual Range 170 Air Conditioner 114 AxlePusher Tag 172 Air Conditioner Sleeper 120 AxleTwo Speed 170 Air ConditionerDefrost Windshield 119 Air Disc Brakes 240 Air Dryer Maintenance 234 B Air Filter Restriction Indicator 270 Air Gauges and Air Leaks 236 Back Button 63 Air Intake 22 Basic View 69 Air Intake System 268 Batteries 258 Air Ride Height Data 176 Battery Voltage 66 Air Tanks 236 Battery,Jump Start 46 Air-Controlled Sliding Fifth Wheel 180 Air-Operated Kingpin Release, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab Belt Air-Trac Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 307 Komfort Latch 30 Alarm ClockSet alarm 123 Lap/Shoulder 28 Alarm ClockSet time 123 Safety 26 Alert Switch 120 Tether 29 Allison Transmission Lubrication 298 Bendix® AD-HF Series Air Dryer 235 Altering the Electrical System 257 Brake System 239 Alternator 262 Brake, Park Brake 86 Index

Brake, ParkingManual release 49 Brakes, Antilock Brake System 86 D Brakes, Low Air 86 Brakes, Trailer Antilock Brake System 86 Daily Checks 35 Bulb Check 79 Dash Switch Tailer Hand Brake 161 Bunk Ladder 14, 17, 18, 185 Dashboard Display Screen 247 Dedicated Telltales 80 Deep Snow and Mud Switch 165 C Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) 70 Diesel Exhaust Fluid tank maintenance 282 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Warning Light 88 Cab Differential, Inter-Axle Lock 87 How to Lock and Unlock the Doors 13 Digital Display 76 Cab Access 12 Digital Gauges 70 Cab Air Filter 246 Display 76 Cab HVAC Fresh Air Filter Replacement 246 Display Launch 63 Cab Maintenance 241 DNR 65 Cab Structure, Doors and Hoods 247 Door Mounted Mirror Controls 113 Camera Obstruction Conditions 150 DPA, See Driver Performance Assistant CAN bus 257 DR, See Driver Rewards Care of Display Screens on the Dashboard 247 Drive Axle - Dana 285 Check Engine Oil Level 264 Drive Axle - Meritor 286 Cleaning LCD Display Screens 247 Drive Axle SISU 287 Clock 66, 72 Drive Axle Temperature Gauge 92 Collision Mitigation 147 Driver Assistance Column Mounted Transmission Control 157, 158 Coolant fill 252 Object Detected Alert 146 Coolant level 252 Drum Brake Inspection 241 Cooling system maintenance 250 Dual Air System Function Test 234 Cooling System Overheating 42 Dual Range (Two-Speed) Rear Axle 170 Cranking Battery Specification 260 Dump Truck, Body Up 87 cruise control 135 Dump Truck, Gate 87 Cruise Control 143 Dynamic Telltale 81 Cruise ControlCancel 144 Cruise ControlChange Set Speed 144 Cruise ControlResume Set Speed 144 E Cruise ControlSet Speed 143 Cruise ControlStandard 142 Eaton/Dana Axle Lubrication 285 Effectiveness and Limitations 166 Electrical System 254 ELST 107 Emissions 141 Index

Emissions Engine Derate 90 Emissions, High Exhaust System Temperature 88 F Emissions, Malfunction Indicator Lamp 88 Engine Aftertreatment System 141 Fast Idle Control 91 Engine Brake 108, 111 Favorites View 71 Engine Brake Allison Automatic Transmission 111 Fifth Wheel 177, 179 Engine Brake Column Mounted Transmission Control 136, 137 Fifth Wheel Bi-Annual Maintenance 272 Engine Brake indicator 135 Fifth Wheel Locked IndicatorFifth Wheel 90 Engine Brake Manual Transmission 111 Fifth Wheel Monthly Maintenance 272 Engine Brake PACCAR Transmission 136, 137 Fifth Wheel Slide, See How to Slide the Fifth Wheel Engine Cooling Recommendations and Specifications 250 Fifth Wheel Slide Switch 100 Engine Fan 267 Fifth Wheel Slide Unlocked 90 Engine Hours 66 Fifth Wheel Unlocked IndicatorFifth Wheel 91 Engine is overheating 42 Filling Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Engine Maintenance 264 Final Chassis Bill of Material 12 Engine Mounting 271 Final Stopping Procedures 186 Engine Start Module 46 Flashing Headlamps, Aftertreatment Warning 141 Engine Wait-To-Start Lamp 89 Flex Air Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 308 Engine Warm Up 133 Frame 271 Engine, Check Engine 89 Frame Fastener Torque Requirements, Nyloc, ESNA, Lock-Nuts 304 Engine, Engine Block Heater 89 Front axle and Suspension 273 Engine, Low Coolant Level 89 Front Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 306 Engine, Overspeed Air Shutdown 89 Fuel Level 70 Engine, Retarder (Brake) 89 Fuel System 273 Engine, Stop Engine 89 Fuel Tank 273 Enhanced View 69 Fuller Transmission Lubrication 297 ESM 46 Fuse box label 257 Every 120,000 mi / 192,000 km / Annually 222 FuseInspect and replace 44 Every 15,000 mi / 24,000 km / Monthly 203 FuseLocation 46 Every 240,000 mi / 384,000 km 227 Every 30,000 mi / 48,000 km 209 Every 300,000 mi / 480,000 km / 6,750 Hours / 3 Years 228 G Every 500,000 mi / 800,000 km / 5 years 229 Every 60,000 mi / 96,000 km / 6 Months 213 General Safety Instructions 7 Every 750,000 mi / 1,200,000 km/ 24,000 Hours / 8 years 229 Greenhouse Gas Certified Configuration 315 Exhaust 141 Greenhouse Gas Certified Tires 294 Exhaust System 271 Exterior Lamp Self Test Switch 108 Exterior Lamps Self Test 107 Exterior Lights Self Test 107 H

Hand Brake Trailer 161 Index

HDB, See Highway Departure Braking Keyless Entry 263 Heater and Air Conditioner Maintenance 276 Heating and Air Conditioning 114 High Beam 110 L High Beam Flash 110 Highway Departure Braking 151 Lamp Self Test 107 Horn 113 Lamp Test 107 Horn honking, Aftertreatment Warning 141 Lamps, Headlamps Flashing, Aftertreatment Warning 141 How to Add Coolant to the Cooling System 253 Lane Departure 150 How to Adjust Mirrors 113 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 91 How to Change a Headlight Bulb, See How to Replace a Headlight Bulb Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Disable 101 How to Check the Compressed Air System for Leaks 237 Lane Departure Warning Fault 91 How to inspect brake pads on disc brakes 240 Lane Departure Warning Mute, See Lane Departure Warning Disable How to Prepare the Axles for Towing 52 Lane Keeping Assist Mute, See Lane Departure Warning Disable How to Recover a VehicleTowing 48 How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir 297 Language How to Replace Air Conditioner Filter 278 English 72 How to Replace the Engine Air filter 268 French 72 How to Use the ELST Switch 108 Spanish 72 How to Wash the Exterior of the Vehicle 244 LDW 150 HVAC 114 Light Self Test 107 HVAC Air Filter 246 Lights Marker Clearance 110 Hydraulic Clutch 298 Lights, High Beam 91 Locking the Fifth Wheel, See How to Lock the Kingpin Low Air Alarm 41 I Low Air Leaf Fastener Torque ValueRear Suspension Fasteners 308 Low Oil Pressure Lamp 42 Lubricants 230 Ice 56 Lubrication Specification Chart 301 Illustrations 7 LVD, See Low Voltage Disconnect In Cab Battery Access 260 Inside/Outside Engine Air Intake 99, 133 Inspect Disc Brake Caliper for Running Clearance 240 Inspecting Noise and Emission Components 280 M Install Engine Belt 266 Installing Batteries 261 Maintenance Manuals 11 Instrument Cluster 60 Maintenance Schedule 194 Manifold Pressure Gauge 92 Manual Kingpin ReleaseFifth Wheel Operation 179 K Manually lock a differential 53 MAX Mode 137 Menu 72 Key Fob 263 Index

Meritor Axle Lubrication 286 Power Take Off 138 Metric Units 72 Pre-Trip Inspection 32 minimized view 2 66 Predictive Cruise Control 148 Mirror Controls 113 Predictive Cruise Control Behavior 148 Mirror Passenger Side 'down' Mirror 128 Predictive Cruise Control Controls 149 Mirror switch 113 Predictive Cruise Control Interrupt 149 Mud 56 Predictive Cruise Control Set Undershoot 150 Predictive Cruise Control Software Information 149 Predictive Cruise Control Troubleshooting 149 N Predictive Cruise Overshoot 72 Prepare the Axles for Towing 52 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule 191 Program Key Fobs 263 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 2,000 mi / 3,218 km 192 PTO 138 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 50-100 mi / 80-160 km 192 PTO indicator 135 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First 500 mi / 800 km 192 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule: First Day 191 New Vehicle Maintenance Schedule:First 3,000-5,000 mi / 4800-8000 km 193 R Noise and Emission Control 279 Noise Control System - Maintenance Log 281 Radiator Hoses 252 Notifications 72 Rear Axle Alignment 284 Rear Axle and Suspension 282 Rear Axle Lubrication 284 O Rear Suspension U-Bolts, Grade 8 306 Recovery Hitch 51 Odometer 66 Recovery hitch capacities 54 Off-Road ABS Function Switch (Optional) 165 Recovery hitch How to use tow pin 52 Oil Level 231 Recovery hitchBest practices 55 Outside Air Temperature 64 Recovery hitchPrepare axles 52 Overflow tank 252 Refrigerator 91 Release KingpinFifth Wheel Operation 179 Releasing the Kingpin, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab Remote Keyless Entry 263 P Remove Optional Solenoid on Air Filter Housing 269 Removing Batteries 260 PACCAR 20k Front Axle Lubrication 275 Repairs 11 PACCAR AMT 158 Replace Battery Box Cover 261 PACCAR AMT Shifting gears 157 Replace HVAC Air Filter 246 PACCAR Shifter 108 Replace the Recirculation Air Filter 278 PCC 148 Returning to Service after Recovering 55 Pipe and Hose Clamp Torque Values 266, 299 Roadside Assistance 41 power distribution box 257 Roll Stability 163 Power Steering Fluid 289 Index

Roll Stability Example 163 Systems Check 37 S T

Safety 6 Tachometer 66, 184 Safety Alerts 6 Testing Exterior Lamps 107 Safety Restraint System - Inspection 247 Tilt Telescope 108 Sand 56 Time 72 Scroll Wheel 62 Tire Inflation 91, 290 Seat Tire Pressure Monitoring System 37 Tires 290 Komfort Latch 30 Topping Up the Engine Oil 265 Lap/Shoulder Belt 28 Tow Pin 51 Safety Restraint Belts 26 Towing Doubles Or Triples May Reduce The Effectiveness Of Stability Systems 167 Tether Belts 29 Towing the Vehicle 56 Seat Belt Fasten 91 TPMS 37 Set Shut Down Timer 140 Traction Control 104 Settings 72 Trailer Hand Brake 98, 161 Shortcuts 76 Trailer Hand Brake Dash Switch 161 Shut Down Timer 73 Transmission Gear Display 66 Sleeper control panel 119 Transmission, Automated 155 Sleeper HVAC Air Filter 279 Transmission, Auxiliary 92 Sliding Fifth Wheels 273 Transmission, Check 92 Sliding the Fifth Wheel, See How to Slide the Fifth Wheel TransmissionMaintenance 297 Slow Battery Charging 262 Trip Odometer 65 Snow 56 Trip Summary 72 Specific Cruise Indicator 87 Truck Information 77 Speed Sign Recognition 152 Turbocharger 268 Speedometer 66 Turn Signal 108, 110 Stability Control 84, 85 Turn Signal, Left 92 Standard Units 72 Turn Signal, Right 92 Steering Shaft Bolt Torque Specifications 290 Steering System 288 Steering Wheel Controls 112 Steering Wheel Pod Use 62 U Stop Engine Light 42 Stopping Procedures 186 Under Cab Battery Access 260 Sub-trip Odometer 65 Under hood air filter housing 22, 268 Suppressing Popups 81 Under Hood Air Intake Symbol 99, 133 Surge tank 252 Under Hood Intake 99, 133 Suspension U-Bolts 306 Unlock Fifth Wheel, See How to Release the Kingpin from the Cab Index

Unlocking the Fifth WheelFifth Wheel Operation 179 V

Variable Road Speed Limiter 144 Variable Speed LimiterHow to Set the Variable Speed Limiter 144 Vehicle Emissions Limited Express Warranty 318 Vehicle ID Labels 311 Vehicle is stuck 56 Vehicle Light Bulb Specifications 309 Vehicle Loading 34 View Indicator 65 Visual inspection while approaching the vehicle 34 W

Warm Up, Engine 133 Warning Icons 81 Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Weekly Checks 36 What is an Air Compressor 238 What is the Air System 232 What to do before starting the vehicle 32 Wheel Cap Nut Torque Specifications 300 Wheels 294 Windsheild Wiper Interlock 73 Windshield Washer 109 Windshield Washer Fluid, See How to Refill the Washer Fluid Reservoir Windshield Wiper 109 Windshield Wiper/Washer 297 Y

Yaw Control 164 Yaw Control Example 164 Yaw Stability 163

PETERBILT MOTORS COMPANY

A PACCAR Company P.O. Box 90208 Denton, Texas 76202

Do not remove the manual from vehicle. Before operating vehicle study the manual carefully. Read and understand all warnings, cautions and notes.

Need help? Give us a call 24 hours a day Y53-6126-1A1 1.800.4.PETERBILT Printed in the U.S.A. 01/21